<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>Early Americas</title>
	<atom:link href="http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com</link>
	<description>Just another WordPress.com weblog</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Thu, 27 Sep 2007 11:49:19 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<generator>http://wordpress.com/</generator>
	<language>en</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>hourly</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>1</sy:updateFrequency>
	<cloud domain='earlyamericas.wordpress.com' port='80' path='/?rsscloud=notify' registerProcedure='' protocol='http-post' />
<image>
		<url>http://www.gravatar.com/blavatar/25bb351271adb6293af87652d8fa5dd9?s=96&#038;d=http://s.wordpress.com/i/buttonw-com.png</url>
		<title>Early Americas</title>
		<link>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com</link>
	</image>
			<item>
		<title>Sir Walter Raleigh, Discovery of the large, rich, and beautiful Empire of Guiana</title>
		<link>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/sir-walter-raleigh-discovery-of-the-large-rich-and-beautiful-empire-of-guiana/</link>
		<comments>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/sir-walter-raleigh-discovery-of-the-large-rich-and-beautiful-empire-of-guiana/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Thu, 27 Sep 2007 03:20:04 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>jimgroom</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Exploration & Contact to 1600]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Sir Walter Raleigh]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[and beautiful Empire of Guiana]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[discovery]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guiana]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[walter raleigh]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/sir-walter-raleigh-discovery-of-the-large-rich-and-beautiful-empire-of-guiana/</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Discovery of the large, rich, and beautiful 			 Empire of Guiana
An Electronic Edition
 			 Sir Walter Raleigh 			 1560-1621
 Original Source:  		  Sir Walter Raleigh, &#8220;The Discovery of Guiana.&#8221; In Voyages and 			 travels : ancient and modern, with introductions, notes and illustrations. New 			 York : P. F. Collier and son, [c1910] [...]<img alt="" border="0" src="http://stats.wordpress.com/b.gif?host=earlyamericas.wordpress.com&blog=1164232&post=26&subd=earlyamericas&ref=&feed=1" />]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class='snap_preview'><br /><h3><em>Discovery of the large, rich, and beautiful 			 Empire of Guiana</em><br />
<font size="-1">An Electronic Edition</font></h3>
<h4> 			 Sir Walter Raleigh 			 1560-1621</h4>
<p><font size="-1"> Original Source:  		  Sir Walter Raleigh, &#8220;The Discovery of Guiana.&#8221; In Voyages and 			 travels : ancient and modern, with introductions, notes and illustrations. New 			 York : P. F. Collier and son, [c1910] The Harvard classics, ed. by C. W. Ellot, 			 vol. XXXIII</p>
<p>Copyright 2003. This text is freely available provided the text is 				distributed with the header information provided.</p>
<p><a href="//"> Full Colophon Information</a></font><br />
<hr width="50%" /> 		 		  <em>The DISCOVERY of the large, rich, and beautiful  			 EMPIRE OF GUIANA; with a Relation of the 			 great and golden  			 CITY OF MANOA, which the Spaniards call  			 EL DORADO, and the Provinces of Emeria, 			 Aromaia, Amapaia, and other Countries, with their rivers, adjoining. Performed 			 in the year 1595 by  			 SIR WALTER RALEIGH, KNIGHT, CAPTAINof her 			 Majesty&#8217;s GUARD, Lord Warden of the Stannaries, and her 			 Highness&#8217;  			 <em>LIEUTENTANT-GENERAL</em>of the  			 Countyof  			 Cornwall.</em> 		 	  		 		   			 <font size="+1"><em>To the Right Honourable my singular good Lord and kinsman  			  			 CHARLES HOWARD, 			  Knight of the Garter, Baron, and Councillor, and of the Admirals of  			  England the most renowned; and to the Right Honourable Sir  			  ROBERT CECIL, KNIGHT, Councillor in her Highness&#8217; Privy Councils.  </em></font>FOR your Honours&#8217; many honourable and friendly parts, I have 				hitherto only returned promises; and now, for answer of both your adventures, I 				have sent you a bundle of papers, which I have divided between your Lordship 				and  				<em>Sir Robert Cecil</em>, in these two respects 				chiefly; first, for that it is reason that wasteful factors, when they have 				consumed such stocks as they had in trust, do yield some colour for the same in 				their account; secondly, for that I am assured that whatsoever shall be done, 				or written, by me, shall need a double protection and defence. The trial that I 				had of both your loves, when I was left of all, but of malice and revenge, 				makes me still presume that you will be pleased (knowing what little power I 				had to perform aught, and the great advantage of forewarned enemies) to answer 				that out of knowledge, which others shall but object out of malice. In my more 				happy times as I did especially honour you both, so I found that your loves 				sought me out in the darkest shadow of adversity, and the same affection which 				accompanied my better fortune soared not away from me in my many miseries; all 				which though I cannot requite, yet I shall ever acknowledge; and the great debt 				which I have no power to pay, I can do no more for a time but confess to be 				due. It is true that as my errors were great, so they have yielded very 				grievous effects; and if aught might have been deserved in former times, to 				have counterpoised any part of offences, the fruit thereof, as it seemeth, was 				long before fallen from the tree, and the dead stock only remained. I did 				therefore, even in the winter of my life, undertake these travails, fitter for 				bodies less blasted with misfortunes, for men of greater ability, and for minds 				of better encouragement, that thereby, if it were possible, I might recover but 				the moderation of excess, and the least taste of the greatest plenty formerly 				possessed. If I had known other way to win, if I had imagined how greater 				adventures might have regained, if I could conceive what farther means I might 				yet use but even to appease so powerful displeasure, I would not doubt but for 				one year more to hold fast my soul in my teeth till it were performed. Of that 				little remain I had, I have wasted in effect all herein. I have undergone many 				constructions; I have been accompanied with many sorrows, with labour, hunger, 				heat, sickness, and peril; it appeareth, notwithstanding, that I made no other 				bravado of going to the sea, than was meant, and that I was never hidden in 				Cornwall, or elsewhere, as was supposed. They have grossly belied me that 				forejudged that I would rather become a servant to the Spanish king than 				return; and the rest were much mistaken, who would have persuaded that I was 				too easeful and sensual to undertake a journey of so great travail. But if what 				I have done receive the gracious construction of a painful pilgrimage, and 				purchase the least remission, I shall think all too little, and that there were 				wanting to the rest many miseries. But if both the times past, the present, and 				what may be in the future, do all by one grain of gall continue in eternal 				distaste, I do not then know whether I should bewail myself, either for my too 				much travail and expense, or condemn myself for doing less than that which can 				deserve nothing. From myself I have deserved no thanks, for I am returned a 				beggar, and withered; but that I might have bettered my poor estate, it shall 				appear from the following discourse, if I had not only respected her Majesty&#8217;s 				future honour and riches. <span class="numbering-line">1.</span><br />
It became not the former fortune, in which I once lived, to 				go journeys of picory; it had sorted ill with the offices of honour, which by 				her Majesty&#8217;s grace I hold this day in  				<em>England</em>, to run from cape to cape and 				from place to place, for the pillage of ordinary prizes. Many years since I had 				knowledge, by relation, of that mighty, rich, and beautiful empire of  				<em>Guiana</em>, and of that great and golden 				city, which the Spaniards call  				<em>El Dorado</em>, and the naturals  				<em>Manoa</em>, which 				city was conquered, re-edified, and enlarged by a younger son of  				<em>Guayna-capac</em>, Emperor of Peru, at such 				time as  				<em>Francisco Pizarro</em> and others conquered 				the said empire from this two elder brethren,  				<em>Guascar</em>and  				<em>Atabalipa</em>, both then contending for the 				same, the one being favoured by the <em>orejones</em>of  				<em>Cuzco</em>, the other by the people 				of  				<em>Caxamalca</em>. I sent my servant  				<em>Jacob Whiddon</em>, the year before, to get 				knowledge of the passages, and I had some light from Captain  				<em>Parker</em>, sometime my servant, and now 				attending on your Lordship, that such a place there was to the soulhward of the 				great bay of  				<em>Charuas</em>, or  				<em>Guanipa</em>: but I found that it was 600 				miles farther off than they supposed, and many impediments to them unknown and 				unheard. After I had displanted  				<em>Don Antonio de Berreo</em>, who was upon the 				same enterprise, leaving my ships at Trinidad, at the port called  				<em>Curiapan</em>, I wandered 400 miles into the 				said country by land and river; the particulars I will leave to the following 				discourse. <span class="numbering-line">2.</span><br />
<em>The country hath more quantity of gold, by manifold, 				than the best parts of the  				<em>Indies</em>, or  				<em>Peru</em>. All the most of the kings of the 				borders are already become her Majesty&#8217;s vassals, and seem to desire nothing 				more than her Majesty&#8217;s protection and the return of the English nation. It 				hath another ground and assurance of riches and glory than the voyages of the  				<em>West Indies</em>; an easier way to invade the 				best parts thereof than by the common course. The king of  				<em>Spain</em> is not so impoverished by taking 				three or four port towns in  				<em>America</em> as we suppose; neither are the 				riches of  				<em>Peru</em> or  				<em>Nueva España</em> so left by the sea 				side as it can be easily washed away with a great flood, or spring tide, or 				left dry upon the sands on a low ebb. The port towns are few and poor in 				respect of the rest within the land, and are of little defence, and are only 				rich when the fleets are to receive the treasure for  				<em>Spain</em> ; and we might think the Spaniards 				very simple, having so many horses and slaves, if they could not upon two days&#8217; 				warning carry all the gold they have into the land, and far enough from the 				reach of our footmen, especially the Indies being, as they are for the most 				part, so mountainous, full of woods, rivers, and marishes. In the port towns of 				the province of  				<em>Venezuela</em> , as  				<em>Cumaná</em> ,  				<em>Coro</em> , and  				<em>St. Iago</em> (whereof  				<em>Coro</em> and  				<em>St. Iago</em> were taken by Captain  				<em>Preston</em> , and  				<em>Cumaná</em> and  				<em>St. Josepho</em> by us) we found not the 				value of one real of plate in either. But the cities of  				<em>Barquasimeta</em> ,  				<em>Valencia</em> ,  				<em>St. Sebastian</em> ,  				<em>Cororo</em> ,  				<em>St. Lucia</em> ,  				<em>Laguna</em> ,  				<em>Maracaiba</em> , and  				<em>Truxillo</em> , are not so easily invaded. 				Neither doth the burning of those on the coast impoverish the king of  				<em>Spain</em> any one ducat; and if we sack the  				<em>River of Hacha</em> ,  				<em>St. Martha</em> , and  				<em>Carthagena</em> , which are the ports of  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> and  				<em>Popayan</em> , there are besides within the 				land, which are indeed rich and prosperous, the towns and cities of  				<em>Merida</em> ,  				<em>Lagrita</em> ,  				<em>St. Christophoro</em> , the great cities of  				<em>Pamplona</em> ,  				<em>Santa Fe de Bogota</em> ,  				<em>Tunxa</em> , and  				<em>Mozo</em> , where the emeralds are found, the 				towns and cities of  				<em>Marequita</em> ,  				<em>Velez</em> ,  				<em>la Villa de Leiva</em> ,  				<em>Palma</em> ,  				<em>Honda</em> ,  				<em>Angostura</em> , the great city of  				<em>Timana</em> ,  				<em>Tocaima</em> ,  				<em>St. Aguila</em> ,  				<em>Pasto</em> ,  				<em>[St.] Iago</em> , the great city of  				<em>Popayan</em> itself,  				<em>Los Remedios</em> , and the rest. If we take 				the ports and villages within the bay of  				<em>Uraba</em> in the kingdom or rivers of  				<em>Darien</em> and  				<em>Caribana</em> , the cities and towns of  				<em>St. Juan de Rodas</em> , of  				<em>Cassaris</em> , of  				<em>Antiochia</em> ,  				<em>Caramanta</em> ,  				<em>Cali</em> , and  				<em>Anserma</em> have gold enough to pay the 				king&#8217;s part, and are not easily invaded by way of the ocean. Or if  				<em>Nombre de Dios</em> and  				<em>Panama</em> be taken, in the province of  				<em>Castilla del Oro</em> , and the villages upon 				the rivers of  				<em>Cenu</em> and  				<em>Chagre</em> ;  				<em>Peru</em> hath, besides those, and besides 				the magnificent cities of  				<em>Quito</em> and  				<em>Lima</em> , so many islands, ports, cities, 				and mines as if I should name them with the rest it would seem incredible to 				the reader. Of all which, because I have written a particular treatise of the  				<em>West Indies</em> , I will omit the repetition 				at this time, seeing that in the said treatise I have anatomized the rest of 				the sea towns as well of  				<em>Nicaragua</em> , Yucatan,  				<em>Nueva España</em> , and the islands, as 				those of the inland, and by what means they may be best invaded, as far as any 				mean judgment may comprehend. </em><span class="numbering-line">.</span><br />
But I hope it shall appear that there is a way found to 				answer every man&#8217;s longing; a better  				<em>Indies</em> for her Majesty than the king of  				<em>Spain</em> hath any; which if it shall please 				her Highness to undertake, I shall most willingly end the rest of my days in 				following the same. If it be left to the spoil and sackage of common persons, 				if the love and service of so many nations be despised, so great riches and so 				mighty an empire refused; I hope her Majesty will yet take my humble desire and 				my labour therein in gracious part, which, if it had not been in respect of her 				Highness&#8217; future honour and riches, could have laid hands on and ransomed many 				of the kings and <em>caciqui</em> of the country, and 				have had a reasonable proportion of gold for their redemption. But I have 				chosen rather to bear the burden of poverty than reproach; and rather to endure 				a second travail, and the chances thereof, than to have defaced an enterprise 				of so great assurance, until I knew whether it pleased God to put a disposition 				in her princely and royal heart either to follow or forslow the same. I will 				therefore leave it to His ordinance that hath only power in all things; and do 				humbly pray that your honours will excuce such errors as, without the defence 				of art, overrun in every part the following discourse, in which I have neither 				studied phrase, form, nor fashion; that you will be pleased to esteem me as 				your own, though over dearly bought, and I shall ever remain ready to do you 				all honour and service. <span class="numbering-line">3.</span><br />
<font size="+1"><strong>TO THE READER</strong></font>Because there have been divers opinions conceived of the 				gold ore brought from  				<em>Guiana</em> , and for that an alderman of  				<em>London</em> and an officer of her Majesty&#8217;s 				mint hath given out that the same is of no price, I have thought good by the 				addition of these lines to give answer as well to the said malicious slander as 				to other objections. It is true that while we abode at the island of  				<em>Trinidad</em> I was informed by an Indian 				that not far from the port where we anchored there were found certain mineral 				stones which they esteemed to be gold, and were thereunto persuaded the rather 				for that they had seen both English and Frenchmen gather and embark some 				quantities thereof. Upon this likelihood I sent forty men, and gave order that 				each one should bring a stone of that mine, to make trial of the goodness; 				which being performed, I assured them at their return that the same was  				<em>marcasite</em> , and of no riches or value. 				Notwithstanding, divers, trusting more to their own sense than to my opinion, 				kept of the said marcasite, and have tried thereof since my return, in divers 				places. In  				<em>Guiana</em> itself I never saw  				<em>marcasite</em> ; but all the rocks, mountains, 				all stones in the plains, woods, and by the rivers&#8217; sides, are in effect 				thorough-shining, and appear marvellous rich; which, being tried to be no  				<em>marcasite</em> , are the true signs of rich 				minerals, but are no other than  				<em>El madre del oro</em> , as the Spaniards term 				them, which is the mother of gold, or, as it is said by others, the scum of 				gold. Of divers sorts of these many of my company brought also into  				<em>England</em> , every one taking the fairest 				for the best, which is not general. For mine own part, I did not countermand 				any man&#8217;s desire or opinion, and I could have afforded them little if I should 				have denied them the pleasing of their own fancies therein; but I was resolved 				that gold must be found either in grains, separate from the stone, as it is in 				most of the rivers in  				<em>Guiana</em> , or else in a kind of hard stone, 				which we call the white spar, of which I saw divers hills, and in sundry 				places, but had neither time nor men, nor instruments fit for labour. Near unto 				one of the rivers I found of the said white spar or flint a very great ledge or 				bank, which I endeavoured to break by all the means I could, because there 				appeared on the outside some small grains of gold; but finding no mean to work 				the same upon the upper part, seeking the sides and circuit of the said rock, I 				found a clift in the same, from whence with daggers, and with the head of an 				axe, we got out some small quantity thereof; of which kind of white stone, 				wherein gold is engendered, we saw divers hills and rocks in every part of  				<em>Guiana</em> wherein we travelled. Of this 				there have been made many trials; and in  				<em>London</em> it was first assayed by Master  				<em>Westwood</em> , a refiner dwelling in  				<em>Wood Street</em> , and it held after the rate 				of twelve or thirteen thousand pounds a ton. Another sort was afterward tried 				by Master  				<em>Bulmar</em> , and Master  				<em>Dimock</em> , assay-master; and it held after 				the rate of three and twenty thousand pounds a ton. There was some of it again 				tried by Master  				<em>Palmer</em> , Comptroller of the  				<em>Mint</em> , and Master  				<em>Dimock</em> in  				<em>Goldsmith&#8217;s Hall</em> , and it held after six 				and twenty thousand and nine hundred pounds a ton. There was also at the same 				time, and by the same persons, a trial made of the dust of the said mine; which 				held eight pounds and six ounces weight of gold in the hundred. There was 				likewise at the same time a trial of an image of copper made in  				<em>Guiana</em> , which held a third part of gold, 				besides divers trials made in the country, and by others in  				<em>London</em> . But because there came ill with 				the good, and belike the said alderman was not presented with the best, it hath 				pleased him therefore to scandal all the rest, and to deface the enterprise as 				much as in him lieth. It hath also been concluded by divers that if there had 				been any such ore in  				<em>Guiana</em> , and the same discovered, that I 				would have brought home a greater quantity thereof. First, I was not bound to 				satisfy any man of the quantity, but only such as adventured, if any store had 				been returned thereof; but it is very true that had all their mountains been of 				massy gold it was impossible for us to have made any longer stay to have 				wrought the same; and whosoever hath seen with what strength of stone the best 				gold ore is environed, he will not think it easy to be had out in heaps, and 				especially by us, who had neither men, instruments, nor time, as it is said 				before, to perform the same. <span class="numbering-line">4.</span><br />
There were on this discovery no less than an hundred 				persons, who can all witness that when we passed any branch of the river to 				view the land within, and stayed from our boats but six hours, we were driven 				to wade to the eyes at our return; and if we attempted the same the day 				following, it was impossible either to ford it, or to swim it, both by reason 				of the swiftness, and also for that the borders were so pestered with fast 				woods, as neither boat nor man could find place either to land or to embark; 				for in June, July, August, and September it is impossible to navigate any of 				those rivers; for such is the fury of the current, and there are so many trees 				and woods overflown, as if any boat but touch upon any tree or stake it is 				impossible to save any one person therein. And ere we departed the land it ran 				with such swiftness as we drave down, most commonly against the wind, little 				less than an hundred miles a day. Besides, our vessels were no other than 				wherries, one little barge, a small cock-boat, and a bad  				<em>galiota</em> which we framed in haste for 				that purpose at  				<em>Trinidad</em> ; and those little boats had 				nine or ten men apiece, with all their victuals and arms. It is further true 				that we were about four hundred miles from our ships, and had been a month from 				them, which also we left weakly manned in an open road, and had promised our 				return in fifteen days.<span class="numbering-line">5.</span><br />
Others have devised that the same ore was had from  				<em>Barbary</em> , and that we carried it with us 				into  				<em>Guiana</em> . Surely the singularity of that 				device I do not well comprehend. For mine own part, I am not so much in love 				with these long voyages as to devise thereby to cozen myself, to lie hard, to 				fare worse, to be subjected to perils, to diseases, to ill savours, to be 				parched and withered, and withal to sustain the care and labour of such an 				enterprise, except the same had more comfort than the fetching of  				<em>marcasite</em> in  				<em>Guiana</em> , or buying of gold 				ore in Barbary. But I hope the better sort will judge me by themselves, and 				that the way of deceit is not the way of honour or good opinion. I have herein 				consumed much time, and many crowns; and I had no other respect or desire than 				to serve her Majesty and my country thereby. If the Spanish nation had been of 				like belief to these detractors we should little have feared or doubted their 				attempts, wherewith we now are daily threatened. But if we now consider of the 				actions both of  				<em>Charles the Fifth</em> , who had the 				maidenhead of  				<em>Peru</em> and the abundant treasures of  				<em>Atabalipa</em> , together with the affairs of 				the Spanish king now living, what territories he hath purchased, what he hath 				added to the acts of his predecessors, how many kingdoms he hath endangered, 				how many armies, garrisons, and navies he hath, and doth maintain, the great 				losses which he hath repaired, as in Eighty-eight above an hundred sail of 				great ships with their artillery, and that no year is less infortunate, but 				that many vessels, treasures, and people are devoured, and yet notwithstanding 				he beginneth again like a storm to threaten shipwrack to us all; we shall find 				that these abilities rise not from the trades of sacks and  				<em>Seville</em> oranges, nor from aught else 				that either  				<em>Spain</em> ,  				<em>Portugal</em> , or any of his other provinces 				produce; it is his Indian gold that endangereth and disturbeth all the nations 				of  				<em>Europe</em> ; it purchaseth intelligence, 				creepeth into counsels, and setteth bound loyalty at liberty in the greatest 				monarchies of  				<em>Europe</em> . If the Spanish king can keep us 				from foreign enterprises, and from the impeachment of his trades, either by 				offer of invasion, or by besieging us in  				<em>Britain</em> ,  				<em>Ireland</em> , or elsewhere, he hath then 				brought the work of our peril in great forwardness.<span class="numbering-line">6.</span><br />
Those princes that abound in treasure have great advantages 				over the rest, if they once constrain them to a defensive war, where they are 				driven once a year or oftener to cast lots for their own garments; and from all 				such shall all trades and intercourse be taken away, to the general loss and 				impoverishment of the kingdom and commonweal so reduced. Besides, when our men 				are constrained to fight, it hath not the like hope as when they are pressed 				and encouraged by the desire of spoil and riches. Farther, it is to be doubted 				how those that in time of victory seem to affect their neighbour nations will 				remain after the first view of misfortunes or ill success; to trust, also, to 				the doubtfulness of a battle is but a fearful and uncertain adventure, seeing 				therein fortune is as likely to prevail as virtue. It shall not be necessary to 				allege all that might be said, and therefore I will thus conclude; that 				whatsoever kingdom shall be enforced to defend itself may be compared to a body 				dangerously diseased, which for a season may be preserved with vulgar 				medicines, but in a short time, and by little and little, the same must needs 				fall to the ground and be dissolved. I have therefore laboured all my life, 				both according to my small power and persuasion, to advance all those attempts 				that might either promise return of profit to ourselves, or at least be a let 				and impeachment to the quiet course and plentiful trades of the Spanish nation; 				who, in my weak judgement, by such a war were as easily endangered and brought 				from his powerfulness as any prince in  				<em>Europe</em> , if it be considered from how 				many kingdoms and nations his revenues are gathered, and those so weak in their 				own beings and so far severed from mutual succour. But because such a 				preparation and resolution is not to be hoped for in haste, and that the time 				which our enemies embrace cannot be had again to advantage, I will hope that 				these provinces, and that empire now by me discovered, shall suffice to enable 				her Majesty and the whole kingdom with no less quantities of treasure than the 				king of  				<em>Spain</em> hath in all the  				<em>Indies</em> ,  				<em>East</em> and  				<em>West</em> , which he possesseth; which if the 				same be considered and followed, ere the Spaniards enforce the same, and if her 				Majesty will undertake it, I will be contented to lose her Highness&#8217; favour and 				good opinion for ever, and my life withal, if the same be not found rather to 				exceed than to equal whatsoever is in this discourse promised and declared. I 				will now refer the reader to the following discourse, with the hope that the 				perilous and chargeable labours and endeavours of such as thereby seek the 				profit and honour of her Majesty, and the English nation, shall by men of 				quality and virtue receive such construction and good acceptance as themselves 				would like to be rewarded withal in the like. <span class="numbering-line">7.</span><br />
<font size="+1"><strong>THE DISCOVERY OF GUIANA</strong></font>On Thursday, the sixth of February, in the year 1595, we 				departed  				<em>England</em> , and the Sunday following had 				sight of the north cape of  				<em>Spain</em> , the wind for the most part 				continuing prosperous; we passed in sight of the  				<em>Burlings</em> , and the Rock, and so onwards 				for the  				<em>Canaries</em> , and fell with  				<em>Fuerteventura</em> the 17. of the same month, 				where we spent two or three days, and relieved our companies with some fresh 				meat. From thence we coasted by the  				<em>Grand Canaria</em> , and so to  				<em>Teneriffe</em> , and stayed there for the  				<em>Lion&#8217;s Whelp</em> , your Lordship&#8217;s ship, and 				for Captain  				<em>Amyas Preston</em> and the rest. But when 				after seven or eight days we found them not, we departed and directed our 				course for  				<em>Trinidad</em> , with mine own ship, and a 				small barque of Captain  				<em>Cross&#8217;</em> only; for we had before lost 				sight of a small  				<em>galego</em> on the coast of  				<em>Spain</em> , which came with us from  				<em>Plymouth</em> . We arrived at  				<em>Trinidad</em> the 22. of March, casting 				anchor at Point  				<em>Curiapan</em> , which the Spaniards call  				<em>Punta de Gallo</em> , which is situate in 				eight degrees or thereabouts. We abode there four or five days, and in all that 				time we came not to the speech of any Indian or Spaniard. On the coast we saw a 				fire, as we sailed from the Point  				<em>Carao</em> towards  				<em>Curiapan</em> , but for fear of the Spaniards 				none durst come to speak with us. I myself coasted it in my barge close aboard 				the shore and landed in every cove, the better to know the island, while the 				ships kept the channel. From  				<em>Curiapan</em> after a few days we turned up 				north-east to recover that place which the Spaniards call  				<em>Puerto de los Españoles</em> , and the 				inhabitants  				<em>Conquerabia</em> ; and as before, 				revictualling my barge, I left the ships and kept by the shore, the better to 				come to speech with some of the inhabitants, and also to understand the rivers, 				watering-places, and ports of the island, which, as it is rudely done, my 				purpose is to send your Lordship after a few days. From  				<em>Curiapan</em> I came to a port and seat of 				Indians called  				<em>Parico</em> , where we found a fresh water 				river, but saw no people. From thence I rowed to another port, called by the 				naturals Piche, and by the Spaniards  				<em>Tierra de Brea</em> . In the way between both 				were divers little brooks of fresh water, and one salt river that had store of 				oysters upon the branches of ehe trees, and were very salt and well tasted. All 				their oysters grow upon those boughs and sprays, and not on the ground; the 				like is commonly seen in other places of the  				<em>West Indies</em> , and elsewhere. This tree is 				described by  				<em>Andrew Thevet</em> , in his  				<em>France Antarctique</em> , and the form figured 				in the book as a plant very strange; and by  				<em>Pliny</em> in his twelfth book of his  				<em>Natural History</em> . But in this island, as 				also in  				<em>Guiana</em> , there are very many of them. At 				this point, called  				<em>Tierra de Brea or Piche</em> , there is that 				abundance of stone pitch that all the ships of the world may be therewith laden 				from thence; and we made trial of it in trimming our ships to be most excellent 				good, and melteth not with the sun as the pitch of  				<em>Norway</em> , and therefore for ships trading 				the south parts very profitable. From thence we went to the mountain foot 				called  				<em>Annaperima</em> , and so passing the river  				<em>Carone</em> , on which the Spanish city was 				seated, we met with our ships at  				<em>Puerto de los Españoles</em> or  				<em>Conquerabia</em> .<span class="numbering-line">8.</span><br />
This island of  				<em>Trinidad</em> hath the form of a sheephook, 				and is but narrow; the north part is very mountainous; the soil is very 				excellent, and will bear sugar, ginger, or any other commodity that the  				<em>Indies</em> yield. It hath store of deer, 				wild porks, fruit, fish, and fowl; it hath also for bread sufficient maize,  				<em>cassavi</em> , and of those roots and fruits 				which are common everywhere in the  				<em>West Indies</em> . It hath divers beasts which 				the  				<em>Indies</em> have not; the Spaniards confessed 				that they found grains of gold in some of the rivers; but they having a purpose 				to enter  				<em>Guiana</em> , the magazine of all rich metals, 				cared not to spend time in the search thereof any further. This island is 				called by the people thereof  				<em>Cairi</em> , and in it are divers nations. 				Those about  				<em>Parico</em> are called  				<em>Jajo</em> , those at  				<em>Punta de Carao</em> are of the  				<em>Arwacas</em> and between  				<em>Carao</em> and  				<em>Curiapan</em> they are called  				<em>Salvajos</em> . Between  				<em>Carao</em> and  				<em>Punta de Galera</em> are the  				<em>Nepojos</em> , and those about the Spanish 				city term themselves  				<em>Carinepagotes</em> . Of the rest of the nations, and of other 				ports and rivers, I leave to speak here, being impertinent to my purpose, and 				mean to describe them as they are situate in the particular plot and 				description of the island, three parts whereof I coasted with my barge, that I 				might the better describe it. <span class="numbering-line">9.</span><br />
Meeting with the ships at  				<em>Puerto de los Españoles</em> , we found at the 				landing-place a company of Spaniards who kept a guard at the descent; and they 				offering a sign of peace, I sent Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> to speak with them, whom 				afterwards to my great grief I left buried in the said island after my return 				from  				<em>Guiana</em> , being a man most honest and 				valiant. The Spaniards seemed to be desirous to trade with us, and to enter 				into terms of peace, more for doubt of their own strength than for aught else; 				and in the end, upon pledge, some of them came aboard. The same evening there 				stale also aboard us in a small  				<em>canoa</em> two  				<em>Indians</em> , the one of them being a 				caciqueor lord of the people, called  				<em>Cantyman</em> , who had the year before been 				with Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> , and was of his acquaintance. By 				this  				<em>Cantyman</em> we understood what strength 				the Spaniards had, how far it was to their city, and of  				<em>Don Antonio de Berreo</em> , the governor, 				who was said to be slain in his second attempt of  				<em>Guiana</em> , but was not. <span class="numbering-line">.</span><br />
While we remained at  				<em>Puerto de los Españoles</em> some Spaniards 				came aboard us to buy linen of the company, and such other things as they 				wanted, and also to view our ships and company, all which I entertained kindly 				and feasted after our manner. By means whereof I learned of one and another as 				much of the estate of  				<em>Guiana</em> as I could, or as they knew; for 				those poor soldiers having been many years without wine, a few draughts made 				them merry, in which mood they vaunted of  				<em>Guiana</em> and the riches thereof, and all 				what they knew of the ways and passages; myself seeming to purpose nothing less 				than the entrance or discovery thereof, but bred in them an opinion that I was 				bound only for the relief of those English which I had planted in Virginia, 				whereof the bruit was come among them; which I had performed in my return, if 				extremity of weather had not forced me from the said coast. <span class="numbering-line">10.</span><br />
I found occasions of staying in this place for two causes. 				The one was to be revenged of  				<em>Berreo</em> , who the year before, 1594, had 				betrayed eight of Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> &#8217;s men, and took them while he 				departed from them to seek the  				<em>Edward Bonaventure</em> , which arrived at  				<em>Trinidad</em> the day before from the  				<em>East </em>  				<em>Indies</em> : in whose absence  				<em>Berreo</em> sent a  				<em>canoa</em> aboard the pinnace only with  				<em>Indians</em> and dogs inviting the company to 				go with them into the woods to kill a deer. Who like wise men, in the absence 				of their captain followed the  				<em>Indians</em> , but were no sooner one arquebus 				shot from the shore, but  				<em>Berreo</em> &#8217;s soldiers lying in ambush had 				them all, notwithstanding that he had given his word to Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> that they should take water and 				wood safely. The other cause of my stay was, for that by discourse with the 				Spaniards I daily learned more and more of  				<em>Guiana</em> , of the rivers and passages, and 				of the enterprise of  				<em>Berreo</em> , by what means or fault he 				failed, and how he meant to prosecute the same.<span class="numbering-line">11.</span><br />
While we thus spent the time I was assured by another 				caciqueof the north side of the island, 				that  				<em>Berreo</em> had sent to  				<em>Margarita</em> and  				<em>Cumaná</em> for soldiers, meaning to 				have given me a  				<em>cassado</em> at parting, if it had been 				possible. For although he had given order through all the island that no Indian 				should come aboard to trade with me upon pain of hanging and quartering (having 				executed two of them for the same, which I afterwards found), yet every night 				there came some with most lamentable complaints of his cruelty: how he had 				divided the island and given to every soldier a part; that he made the ancient 				cacique, which were lords of the country, to 				be their slaves; that he kept them in chains, and dropped their naked bodies 				with burning bacon, and such other torments, which I found afterwards to be 				true. For in the city, after I entered the same, there were five of the lords 				or little kings, which they call caciquein 				the  				<em>West Indies</em> , in one chain, almost dead 				of famine, and wasted with torments. These are called in their own language  				<em>acarewana</em> , and now of late since 				English, French, and Spanish, are come among them, they call themselves  				<em>captains</em> , because they perceive that the 				chiefest of every ship is called by that name. Those five captains in the chain 				were called  				<em>Wannawanare</em> ,  				<em>Carroaori</em> ,  				<em>Maquarima</em> ,  				<em>Tarroopanama</em> , and  				<em>Aterima</em> . So as both to be revenged of 				the former wrong, as also considering that to enter  				<em>Guiana</em> by small boats, to depart 400 or 				500 miles from my ships, and to leave a garrison in my back interested in the 				same enterprise, who also daily expected supplies out of  				<em>Spain</em> , I should have savoured very much 				of the ass; and therefore taking a time of most advantage, I set upon the  				<em>Corps du garde</em> in the evening, and 				having put them to the sword, sent Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> onwards with sixty soldiers, 				and myself followed with forty more, and so took their new city, which they 				called  				<em>St. Joseph</em> , by break of day. They abode 				not any fight after a few shot, and all being dismissed, but only  				<em>Berreo</em> and his companion, I brought them 				with me aboard, and at the instance of the  				<em>Indians</em> I set their new city of St. 				Joseph on fire. The same day arrived Captain  				<em>George Gifford</em> with your lordship&#8217;s 				ship, and Captain  				<em>Keymis</em> , whom I lost on the coast of  				<em>Spain</em> , with the  				<em>galego</em> , and in them divers gentlemen and 				others, which to our little army was a great comfort and supply. We then hasted 				away towards our purposed discovery, and first I called all the captains of the 				island together that were enemies to the Spaniards; for there were some which  				<em>Berreo</em> had brought out of other 				countries, and planted there to eat out and waste those that were natural of 				the place. And by my Indian interpreter, which I carried out of  				<em>England</em> , I made them understand that I 				was the servant of a queen who was the great caciqueof the north, and a virgin, and had more  				<em>caciqui</em> under her than there were trees 				in that island; that she was an enemy to the  				<em>Castellani</em> in respect of their tyranny 				and oppression, and that she delivered all such nations about her, as were by 				them oppressed; and having freed all the coast of the northern world from their 				servitude, had sent me to free them also, and withal to defend the country of  				<em>Guiana</em> from their invasion and conquest. 				I shewed them her Majesty&#8217;s picture, which they so admired and honoured, as it 				had been easy to have brought them idolatrous thereof. The like and a more 				large discourse I made to the rest of the nations, both in my passing to  				<em>Guiana</em> and to those of the borders, so 				as in that part of the world her Majesty is very famous and admirable; whom 				they now call <em>Ezrabeta cassipuna aquerewana</em>,which is as much as &#8216;Elizabeth, the 				Great Princess, or Greatest Commander.&#8217; This done, we left  				Puerto de los Españoles , and 				returned to  				<em>Curiapan</em> , and having  				<em>Berreo</em> my prisoner, I gathered from him 				as much of  				<em>Guiana</em> as he knew. This  				<em>Berreo</em> is a gentleman well descended, 				and had long served the Spanish king in  				<em>Milan</em> ,  				<em>Naples</em> , the  				<em>Low Countries</em> , and elsewhere, very 				valiant and liberal, and a gentleman of great assuredness, and of a great 				heart. I used him according to his estate and worth in all things I could, 				according to the small means I had.<span class="numbering-line">12.</span><br />
I sent Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> the year before to get what 				knowledge he could of  				<em>Guiana</em> : and the end of my journey at 				this time was to discover and enter the same. But my intelligence was far from 				truth, for the country is situate about 600 English miles further from the sea 				than I was made believe it had been. Which afterwards understanding to be true 				by  				<em>Berreo</em> , I kept it from the knowledge of 				my company, who else would never have been brought to attempt the same. Of 				which 600 miles I passed 400, leaving my ships so far from me at anchor in the 				sea, which was more of desire to perform that discovery than of reason, 				especially having such poor and weak vessels to transport ourselves in. For in 				the bottom of an old  				<em>galego</em> which I caused to be fashioned 				like a galley, and in one barge, two wherries, and a ship-boat of the  				<em>Lion&#8217;s Whelp</em> , we carried 100 persons and 				their victuals for a month in the same, being all driven to lie in the rain and 				weather in the open air, in the burning sun, and upon the hard boards, and to 				dress our meat, and to carry all manner of furniture in them. Wherewith they 				were so pestered and unsavoury, that what with victuals being most fish, with 				the wet clothes of so many men thrust together, and the heat of the sun, I will 				undertake there was never any prison in  				<em>England</em> that could be found more 				unsavoury and loathsome, especially to myself, who had for many years before 				been dieted and cared for in a sort far more differing. <span class="numbering-line">13.</span><br />
If Captain  				<em>Preston</em> had not been persuaded that he 				should have come too late to  				<em>Trinidad</em> to have found us there (for the 				month was expired which I promised to tarry for him there ere he could recover 				the coast of  				<em>Spain</em> ) but that it had pleased God he 				might have joined with us, and that we had entered the country but some ten 				days sooner ere the rivers were overflown, we had adventured either to have 				gone to the great city of  				<em>Manoa</em> , or at least taken so many of the 				other cities and towns nearer at hand, as would have made a royal return. But 				it pleased not God so much to favour me at this time. If it shall be my lot to 				prosecute the same, I shall willingly spend my life therein. And if any else 				shall be enabled thereunto, and conquer the same, I assure him thus much; he 				shall perform more than ever was done in  				<em>Mexico</em> by  				<em>Cortes</em> , or in  				<em>Peru</em> by  				<em>Pizarro</em> , whereof the one conquered the 				empire of  				<em>Mutezuma</em> , the other of  				<em>Guascar</em> and  				<em>Atabalipa</em> . And whatsoever prince shall 				possess it, that prince shall be lord of more gold, and of a more beautiful 				empire, and of more cities and people, than either the king of  				<em>Spain</em> or the  				<em>Great Turk</em> .<span class="numbering-line">14.</span><br />
But because there may arise many doubts, and how this 				empire of  				<em>Guiana</em> is become so populous, and 				adorned with so many great cities, towns, temples, and treasures, I thought 				good to make it known, that the emperor now reigning is descended from those 				magnificent princes of  				<em>Peru</em> , of whose large territories, of 				whose policies, conquests, edifices, and riches,  				<em>Pedro de Cieza</em> ,  				<em>Francisco Lopez</em> , and others have written 				large discourses. For when  				<em>Francisco Pizarro</em> ,  				<em>Diego Almagro</em> and others conquered the 				said empire of  				<em>Peru</em> , and had put to death  				<em>Atabalipa</em> , son to  				<em>Guayna Capac</em> , which  				<em>Atabalipa</em> had formerly caused his eldest 				brother  				<em>Guascar</em> to be slain, one of the younger 				sons of  				<em>Guayna Capac</em> fled out of  				<em>Peru</em> , and took with him many thousands 				of those soldiers of the empire called <em>orejones</em>, and with those and many others which followed 				him, he vanquished all that tract and valley of  				<em>America</em> which is situate between the 				great river of  				<em>Amazons</em> and  				<em>Baraquan</em> , otherwise called  				<em>Orenoque</em> and  				<em>Marañon</em> .<span class="numbering-line">15.</span><br />
The empire of  				<em>Guiana</em> is directly east from  				<em>Peru</em> towards the sea, and lieth under 				the equinoctial line; and it hath more abundance of gold than any part of  				<em>Peru</em> , and as many or more great cities 				than ever  				<em>Peru</em> had when it flourished most. It is 				governed by the same laws, and the emperor and people observe the same 				religion, and the same form and policies in government as were used in  				<em>Peru</em> , not differing in any part. And I 				have been assured by such of the Spaniards as have seen  				<em>Manoa</em> , the imperial city of  				<em>Guiana</em> , which the Spaniards call  				<em>El Dorado</em> , that for the greatness, for 				the riches, and for the excellent seat, it far exceedeth any of the world, at 				least of so much of the world as is known to the Spanish nation. It is founded 				upon a lake of salt water of 200 leagues long, like unto  				<em>Mare Caspium</em> . And if we compare it to 				that of  				<em>Peru</em> , and but read the report of  				<em>Francisco Lopez</em> and others, it will seem 				more than credible; and because we may judge of the one by the other, I thought 				good to insert part of the 120. chapter of  				<em>Lopez</em> in his  			 <em>General History of the Indies</em>, wherein 			 he describeth the court and magnificence of  			 <em>Guayna Capac</em> , ancestor to the emperor of  			 <em>Guiana</em> , whose very words are these:–<span class="numbering-line">.</span><br />
&#8216;Todo el servicio de su casa, mesa, y cocina era de oro y de 				  plata, y cuando menos de plata y cobre, por mas recio. Tenia en su recamara 				  estatuas huecas de oro, que parescian gigantes, y las figuras al propio y 				  tamano de cuantos animales, aves, arboles, y yerbas produce la tierra, y de 				  cuantos peces cria la mar y agua de sus reynos. Tenia asimesmo sogas, costales, 				  cestas, y troxes de oro y plata; rimeros de palos de oro, que pareciesen lena 				  rajada para quemar. En fin no habia cosa en su tierra, que no la tuviese de oro 				  contrahecha; y aun dizen, que tenian los Ingas un verjel en una isla cerca de 				  la Puna, donde se iban a holgar, cuando querian mar, que tenia la hortaliza, 				  las flores, y arboles de oro y plata; invencion y grandeza hasta entonces nunca 				  vista. Allende de todo esto, tenia infinitisima cantidad de plata y oro por 				  labrar en el Cuzco, que se perdio por la muerte de  				  <em>Guascar</em> ; ca los Indios lo escondieron, 				  viendo que los Españoles se lo tomaban, y enviaban a España.&#8217;. 				That is,  				&#8220;All the vessels of his house, table, and kitchen, were of 				  gold and silver, and the meanest of silver and copper for strength and hardness 				  of metal. He had in his wardrobe hollow statues of gold which seemed giants, 				  and the figures in proportion and bigness of all the beasts, birds, trees, and 				  herbs, that the earth bringeth forth; and of all the fishes that the sea or 				  waters of his kingdom breedeth. He had also ropes, budgets, chests, and troughs 				  of gold and silver, heaps of billets of gold, that seemed wood marked out to 				  burn. Finally, there was nothing in his country whereof he had not the 				  counterfeit in gold. Yea, and they say, the Ingas had a garden of pleasure in 				  an island near  				  <em>Puna</em> , where they went to recreate themselves, when they would 				  take the air of the sea, which had all kinds of garden-herbs, flowers, and 				  trees of gold and silver; an invention and magnificence till then never seen. 				  Besides all this, he had an infinite quantity of silver and gold unwrought in 				  <em>Cuzco</em> , which was lost by the death of  				  <em>Guascar</em> , for the  				  <em>Indians</em> hid it, seeing that the 				  Spaniards took it, and sent it into  				  <em>Spain</em> .&#8217;<span class="numbering-line">16.</span><br />
And in the 117. chapter;  				<em>Francisco Pizarro</em> caused the gold and 				silver of  				<em>Atabalipa</em> to be weighed after he had 				taken it, which  				<em>Lopez</em> setteth down in these words 				following:–  				&#8216;Hallaron cincuenta y dos mil marcos de buena plata, y un 				  millon y trecientos y veinte y seis mil y quinientos pesos de oro.&#8217; 				Which is,  				&#8216;They found 52,000 marks of good silver, and 1,326,500  				  <em>pesos</em> of gold.&#8217;Now, although 				these reports may seem strange, yet if we consider the many millions which are 				daily brought out of  				<em>Peru</em> into  				<em>Spain</em> , we may easily believe the same. 				For we find that by the abundant treasure of that country the Spanish king 				vexes all the princes of  				<em>Europe</em> , and is become, in a few years, 				from a poor king of  				<em>Castile</em> , the greatest monarch of this 				part of the world, and likely every day to increase if other princes forslow 				the good occasions offered, and suffer him to add this empire to the rest, 				which by far exceedeth all the rest. If his gold now endanger us, he will then 				be unresistible. Such of the Spaniards as afterwards endeavoured the conquest 				thereof, whereof there have been many, as shall be declared hereafter, thought 				that this  				<em>Inga</em> , of whom this emperor now living is 				descended, took his way by the river of  				<em>Amazons</em> , by that branch which is called 				<em>Papamene</em>. For by that way followed  				<em>Orellana</em> , by the commandment of  				<em>Gonzalo Pizarro</em> , in the year 1542, whose 				name the river also beareth this day. Which is also by others called  				<em>Marañon</em> , although  				<em>Andrew Thevet</em> doth affirm that between  				<em>Marañon</em> and  				<em>Amazons</em> there are 120 leagues; but sure 				it is that those rivers have one head and beginning, and the  				<em>Marañon</em> , which  				<em>Thevet</em> describeth, is but a branch of  				<em>Amazons</em> or  				<em>Orellana</em> , of which I will speak more in 				another place. It was attempted by Ordas; but it is now little less than 70 				years since that  				<em>Diego Ordas</em> , a Knight of the Order of  				<em>Santiago</em> , attempted the same; and it was 				in the year 1542 that  				<em>Orellana</em> discovered the river of 				Amazons; but the first that ever saw  				<em>Manoa</em> was  				<em>Juan Martinez</em> , master of the munition 				to  				Ordas . At a port called  				<em>Morequito</em> , in  				<em>Guiana</em> , there lieth at this day a great 				anchor of  				<em>Ordas</em> his ship. And this port is some 				300 miles within the land, upon the great river of  				<em>Orenoque</em> . I rested at this port four 				days, twenty days after I left the ships at  				<em>Curiapan</em> .<span class="numbering-line">17.</span><br />
The relation of this  				<em>Martinez</em> , who was the first that 				discovered  				<em>Manoa</em> , his success, and end, is to be 				seen in the Chancery of  				<em>St. Juan de Puerto Rico</em> , where of  				<em>Berreo</em> had a copy, which appeared to be 				the greatest encouragement as well to  				<em>Berreo</em> as to others that formerly 				attempted the discovery and conquest.  				<em>Orellana</em> , after he failed of the 				discovery of  				<em>Guiana</em> by the said river of  				<em>Amazons</em> , passed into  				<em>Spain</em> , and there obtained a patent of 				the king for the invasion and conquest, but died by sea about the islands; and 				his fleet being severed by tempest, the action for that time proceeded not.  				<em>Diego Ordas</em> followed the enterprise, and 				departed  				<em>Spain</em> with 600 soldiers and thirty 				horse. Who, arriving on the coast of  				<em>Guiana</em> , was slain in a mutiny, with the 				most part of such as favoured him, as also of the rebellious part, insomuch as 				his ships perished and few or none returned; neither was it certainly known 				what became of the said  				<em>Ordas</em> until  				<em>Berreo</em> found the anchor of his ship in 				the river of  				<em>Orenoque</em> ; but it was supposed, and so it 				is written by Lopez, that he perished on the seas, and of other writers 				diversely conceived and reported. And hereof it came that  				<em>Martinez</em> entered so far within the land, 				and arrived at that city of Inga the emperor; for it chanced that while  				<em>Ordas</em> with his army rested at the port 				of  				<em>Morequito</em> (who was either the first or 				second that attempted  				<em>Guiana</em> ), by some negligence the whole 				store of powder provided for the service was set on fire, and Martinez, having 				the chief charge, was condemned by the General  				<em>Ordas</em> to be executed forthwith.  				<em>Martinez</em> , being much favoured by the 				soldiers, had all the means possible procured for his life; but it could not be 				obtained in other sort than this, that he should be set into a  				<em>canoa</em> alone, without any victual, only 				with his arms, and so turned loose into the great river. But it pleased God 				that the  				<em>canoa</em> was carried down the stream, and 				certain of the  				<em>Guianians</em> met it the same evening; and, 				having not at any time seen any Christian nor any man of that colour, they 				carried  				<em>Martinez</em> into the land to be wondered 				at, and so from town to town, until he came to the great city of  				<em>Manoa</em> , the seat and residence of  				<em>Inga</em> the emperor. The emperor, after he 				had beheld him, knew him to be a Christian, for it was not long before that his 				brethren  				<em>Guascar</em> and  				<em>Atabalipa</em> were vanquished by the 				Spaniards in  				<em>Peru</em> : and caused him to be lodged in his 				palace, and well entertained. He lived seven months in  				<em>Manoa</em> , but was not suffered to wander 				into the country anywhere. He was also brought thither all the way blindfold, 				led by the  				<em>Indians</em> , until he came to the entrance 				of  				<em>Manoa</em> itself, and was fourteen or 				fifteen days in the passage. He avowed at his death that he entered the city at 				noon, and then they uncovered his face; and that he travelled all that day till 				night thorough the city, and the next day from sun rising to sun setting, yere 				he came to the palace of  				<em>Inga</em> . After that  				<em>Martinez</em> had lived seven months in  				<em>Manoa</em> , and began to understand the 				language of the country,  				<em>Inga</em> asked him whether he desired to 				return into his own country, or would willingly abide with him. But  				<em>Martinez</em> , not desirous to stay, obtained 				the favour of  				<em>Inga</em> to depart; with whom he sent divers 				 				<em>Guianians</em> to conduct him to the river of 				 				<em>Orenoque</em> , all loaden with as much gold 				as they could carry, which he gave to  				<em>Martinez</em> at his departure. But when he 				was arrived near the river&#8217;s side, the borderers which are called  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> robbed him and his  				<em>Guianians</em> of all the treasure (the 				borderers being at that time at wars, which  				<em>Inga</em> had not conquered) save only of two 				great bottles of gourds, which were filled with beads of gold curiously 				wrought, which those  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> thought had been no other 				thing than his drink or meat, or grain for food, with which  				<em>Martinez</em> had liberty to pass. And so in  				<em>canoas</em> he fell down from the river of  				<em>Orenoque</em> to  				<em>Trinidad</em> , and from thence to  				<em>Margarita</em> , and so to  				<em>St. Juan del Puerto Rico</em> ; where, 				remaining a long time for passage into  				<em>Spain</em> , he died. In the time of his 				extreme sickness, and when he was without hope of life, receiving the sacrament 				at the hands of his confessor, he delivered these things, with the relation of 				his travels, and also called for his <em>calabazas</em> or gourds of the gold beads, 				which he gave to the church and friars, to be prayed for. <span class="numbering-line">18.</span><br />
This  				<em>Martinez</em> was he that christened the city 				of  				<em>Manoa</em> by the name of  				<em>El Dorado</em> , and, as  				<em>Berreo</em> informed me, upon this occasion, 				those  				<em>Guianians</em> , and also the borderers, and 				all other in that tract which I have seen, are marvellous great drunkards; in 				which vice I think no nation can compare with them; and at the times of their 				solemn feasts, when the emperor carouseth with his captains, tributaries, and 				governors, the manner is thus. All those that pledge him are first stripped 				naked and their bodies anointed all over with a kind of white  				<em>balsamum</em> (by them called  				<em>curca</em> ), of which there is great plenty, 				and yet very dear amongst them, and it is of all other the most precious, 				whereof we have had good experience. When they are anointed all over, certain 				servants of the emperor, having prepared gold made into fine powder, blow it 				thorough hollow canes upon their naked bodies, until they be all shining from 				the foot to the head; and in this sort they sit drinking by twenties and 				hundreds, and continue in drunkenness sometimes six or seven days together. The 				same is also confirmed by a letter written into  				<em>Spain</em> which was intercepted, which 				Master  				<em>Robert Dudley</em> told me he had seen. Upon 				this sight, and for the abundance of gold which he saw in the city, the images 				of gold in their temples, the plates, armours, and shields of gold which they 				use in the wars, he called it  				<em>El Dorado</em> .<span class="numbering-line">19.</span><br />
After the death of  				<em>Ordas</em> and  				<em>Martinez</em> , and after  				<em>Orellana</em> , who was employed by  				<em>Gonzalo Pizarro</em> , one  				<em>Pedro de Orsúa</em> , a 				knight of  				<em>Navarre</em> , attempted  				<em>Guiana</em> , taking his way into  				<em>Peru</em> , and built his brigandines upon a 				river called  				<em>Oia</em> , which riseth to the southward of  				<em>Quito</em> , and is very great. This river 				falleth into  				<em>Amazons</em> , by which  				<em>Orsúa</em> with his companies 				descended, and came out of that province which is called  				<em>Motilones</em> ; and it seemeth to me that 				this empire is reserved for her Majesty and the English nation, by reason of 				the hard success which all these and other Spaniards found in attempting the 				same, whereof I will speak briefly, though impertinent in some sort to my 				purpose. This  				<em>Pedro de Orsóa</em> had among his 				troops a Biscayan called  				<em>Aguirre</em> , a man meanly born, who bare no 				other office than a sergeant or  				<em>alferez</em> : but after certain months, when 				the soldiers were grieved with travels and consumed with famine, and that no 				entrance could be found by the branches or body of  				<em>Amazons</em> , this  				<em>Aguirre</em> raised a mutiny, of which he 				made himself the head, and so prevailed as he put  				<em>Orsúa</em> to the sword and all 				his followers, taking on him the whole charge and commandment, with a purpose 				not only to make himself emperor of  				<em>Guiana</em> , but also of  				<em>Peru</em> and of all that side of the West  				<em>Indies</em> . He had of his party 700 				soldiers, and of those many promised to draw in other captains and companies, 				to deliver up towns and forts in  				<em>Peru</em> ; but neither finding by the said 				river any passage into  				<em>Guiana</em> , nor any possibility to return 				towards  				<em>Peru</em> by the same  				<em>Amazons</em> , by reason that the descent of 				the river made so great a current, he was enforced to disemboque at the mouth 				of the said  				<em>Amazons</em> , which cannot be less than 1,000 				leagues from the place where they embarked. From thence he coasted the land 				till he arrived at  				<em>Margarita</em> to the north of  				<em>Mompatar</em> , which is at this day called  				<em>Puerto de Tyranno</em> , for that he there 				slew  				<em>Don Juan de Villa Andreda</em> , Governor of  				<em>Margarita</em> , who was father to  				<em>Don Juan Sarmiento</em> , Governor of  				<em>Margarita</em> when Sir  				<em>John Burgh</em> landed there and attempted 				the island.  				<em>Aguirre</em> put to the sword all other in 				the island that refused to be of his party, and took with him certain  				<em>cimarrones</em> and other desperate 				companions. From thence he went to  				<em>Cumaná</em> and there slew the 				governor, and dealt in all as at  				<em>Margarita</em> . He spoiled all the coast of  				<em>Caracas</em> and the province of  				<em>Venezuela</em> and of  				<em>Rio de la Hacha</em> ; and, as I remember, it 				was the same year that  				<em>Sir John Hawkins</em> sailed to  				<em>St. Juan de Ullua</em> in the  				<em>Jesus of Lubeck</em> ;for himself told me that 				he met with such a one upon the coast, that rebelled, and had sailed down all 				the river of  				<em>Amazons</em> .  				<em>Aguirre</em> from thence landed about  				<em>Santa Marta</em> and sacked it also, putting 				to death so many as refused to be his followers, purposing to invade Nuevo 				Reyno de Granada and to sack  				<em>Pamplona</em> ,  				<em>Merida</em> ,  				<em>Lagrita</em> ,  				<em>Tunja</em> , and the rest of the cities of  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> , and from thence again to 				enter  				<em>Peru</em> ; but in a fight in the said Nuevo 				Reyno he was overthrown, and, finding no way to escape, he first put to the 				sword his own children, foretelling them that they should not live to be 				defamed or upbraided by the Spaniards after his death, who would have termed 				them the children of a traitor or tyrant; and that, sithence he could not make 				them princes, he would yet deliver them from shame and reproach. These were the 				ends and tragedies of  				<em>Ordas</em> ,  				<em>Martinez</em> ,  				<em>Orellana</em> ,  				<em>Orsúa</em> , and  				<em>Aguirre</em> . Also soon after  				<em>Ordas</em> followed  				<em>Jeronimo Ortal de Saragosa </em> , with 130 				soldiers; who failing his entrance by sea, was cast with the current on the 				coast of  				<em>Paria</em> , and peopled about  				<em>S. Miguel de Neveri</em> . It was then 				attempted by  				<em>Don Pedro de Silva</em> , a Portuguese of the 				family of  				<em>Ruy Gomez de Silva</em> , and by the favour 				which  				<em>Ruy Gomes</em> had with the king he was set 				out. But he also shot wide of the mark; for being departed from  				<em>Spain</em> with his fleet, he entered by  				<em>Marañon</em> or  				<em>Amazons</em> , where by the nations of the 				river and by the  				<em>Amazons</em> , he was utterly overthrown, and 				himself and all his army defeated; only seven escaped, and of those but two 				returned. <span class="numbering-line">20.</span><br />
After him came  				<em>Pedro Hernandez de Serpa</em> , and landed at  				<em>Cumaná</em> , in the  				<em>West Indies</em> , taking his journey by land 				towards  				<em>Orenoque</em> , which may be some 120 leagues; 				but yere he came to the borders of the said river, he was set upon by a nation 				of the  				<em>Indians</em> , called  				<em>Wikiri</em> , and overthrown in such sort, 				that of 300 soldiers, horsemen, many  				<em>Indians</em> , and negroes, there returned but 				eighteen. Others affirm that he was defeated in the very entrance of  				<em>Guiana</em> , at the first civil town of the 				empire called  				<em>Macureguarai</em> . Captain  				<em>Preston</em> , in taking  				<em>Santiago de Leon</em> (which was by him and 				his companies very resolutely performed, being a great town, and far within the 				land) held a gentleman prisoner, who died in his ship, that was one of the 				company of  				<em>Hernandez de Serpa</em> , and saved among 				those that escaped; who witnessed what opinion is held among the Spaniards 				thereabouts of the great riches of  				<em>Guiana</em> , and  				<em>El Dorado</em> , the city of  				<em>Inga</em> . Another Spaniard was brought 				aboard me by Captain  				<em>Preston</em> , who told me in the hearing of 				himself and divers other gentlemen, that he met with  				<em>Berreo</em> &#8217;s campmaster at  				<em>Caracas</em> , when he came from the borders 				of  				<em>Guiana</em> , and that he saw with him forty 				of most pure plates of gold, curiously wrought, and swords of  				<em>Guiana</em> decked and inlaid with gold, 				feathers garnished with gold, and divers rarities, which he carried to the 				Spanish king.<span class="numbering-line">21.</span><br />
After  				<em>Hernandez de Serpa</em> , it was undertaken by 				the <em>Adelantado</em>,  				<em>Don Gonzalez Ximenes de Quesada</em> , who was 				one of the chiefest in the conquest of  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> , whose daughter and heir  				<em>Don Antonio de Berrero</em> married.  				<em>Gonzalez</em> sought the passage also by the 				river called  				<em>Papamene</em> , which riseth by  				<em>Quito</em> , in  				<em>Peru</em> , and runneth south-east 100 				leagues, and then falleth into  				<em>Amazons</em> . But he also, failing the 				entrance, returned with the loss of much labour and cost. I took one Captain  				<em>George</em> , a Spaniard, that followed  				<em>Gonzalez</em> in this enterprise.  				<em>Gonzalez</em> gave his daughter to  				<em>Berreo</em> , taking his oath and honour to 				follow the enterprise to the last of his substance and life. Who since, as he 				hath sworn to me, hath spent 300,000 ducats in the same, and yet never could 				enter so far into the land as myself with that poor troop, or rather a handful 				of men, being in all about 100 gentlemen, soldiers, rowers, boat-keepers, boys, 				and of all sorts; neither could any of the forepassed undertakers, nor  				<em>Berreo</em> himself, discover the country, 				till now late y by conference with an ancient king, called  				<em>Carapana</em> , he got the true light thereof. 				For  				<em>Berreo</em> came about 1,500 miles yere he 				understood aught, or could find any passage or entrance into any part thereof; 				yet he had experience of all these fore-named, and divers others, and was 				persuaded of their errors and mistakings.  				<em>Berreo</em> sought it by the river  				<em>Cassanar</em> , which falleth into a great 				river called  				<em>Pato</em> :  				<em>Pato</em> falleth into  				<em>Meta</em> , and  				<em>Meta</em> into  				<em>Baraquan</em> , which is also called  				<em>Orenoque</em> . He took his journey from  				<em>Nuevo Reyno de Granada</em> , where he dwelt, 				having the inheritance of  				<em>Gonzalez Ximenes</em> in those parts; he was 				followed with 700 horse, he drove with him 1,000 head of cattle, he had also 				many women,  				<em>Indians</em> , and slaves. How all these 				rivers cross and encounter, how the country lieth and is bordered, the passage 				of  				<em>Ximenes</em> and  				<em>Berreo</em> , mine own discovery, and the way 				that I entered, with all the rest of the nations and rivers, your lordship 				shall receive in a large chart or map, which I have not yet finished, and which 				I shall most humbly pray your lordship to secrete, and not to suffer it to pass 				your own hands; for by a draught thereof all may be prevented by other nations; 				for I know it is this very year sought by the French, although by the way that 				they now take, I fear it not much. It was also told me yere I departed  				<em>England</em> , that  				<em>Villiers</em> , the Admiral, was in 				preparation for the planting of  				<em>Amazons</em> , to which river the French have 				made divers voyages, and returned much gold and other rarities. I spake with a 				captain of a French ship that came from thence, his ship riding in  				<em>Falmouth</em> the same year that my ships 				came first from Virginia; there was another this year in  				<em>Helford</em> , that also came from thence, and 				had been fourteen months at an anchor in  				<em>Amazons</em> ; which were both very rich. <span class="numbering-line">22.</span><br />
Although, as I am persuaded,  				<em>Guiana</em> cannot be entered that way, yet 				no doubt the trade of gold from thence passeth by branches of rivers into the 				river of  				<em>Amazons</em> , and so it doth on every hand 				far from the country itself; for those  				<em>Indians</em> of  				<em>Trinidad</em> have plates of gold from  				<em>Guiana</em> , and those  				<em>Cannibals</em> of  				<em>Dominica</em> which dwell in the islands by 				which our ships pass yearly to the  				<em>West Indies</em> , also the  				<em>Indians</em> of  				<em>Paria</em> , those  				<em>Indians</em> called  				<em>Tucaris</em> ,  				<em>Chochi</em> ,  				<em>Apotomios</em> ,  				<em>Cumaná</em> gotos, and all those other 				nations inhabiting near about the mountains that run from  				<em>Paria</em> thorough the province of  				<em>Venezuela</em> , and in  				<em>Maracapana</em> , and the  				<em>Cannibals</em> of  				<em>Guanipa</em> , the  				<em>Indians</em> called  				<em>Assawai</em> ,  				<em>Coaca</em> ,  				<em>Ajai</em> , and the rest (all which shall be 				described in my description as they are situate) have plates of gold of  				<em>Guiana</em> . And upon the river of  				<em>Amazons</em> ,  				Thevet writeth that the people wear  				croissants of gold, for of that form the 				 				<em>Guianians</em> most commonly make them; so as 				from  				<em>Dominica</em> to  				<em>Amazons</em> , which is above 250 leagues, all 				the chief  				<em>Indians</em> in all parts wear of those 				plates of  				<em>Guiana</em> . Undoubtedly those that trade 				[with]  				<em>Amazons</em> return much gold, which (as is 				aforesaid) cometh by trade from  				<em>Guiana</em> , by some branch of a river that 				falleth from the country into  				<em>Amazons</em> , and either it is by the river 				which passeth by the nations called  				Tisnados , or by  				Caripuna .<span class="numbering-line">23.</span><br />
I made enquiry amongst the most ancient and best travelled 				of the  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> , and I had knowledge of all 				the rivers between  				<em>Orenoque</em> and  				<em>Amazons</em> , and was very desirous to 				understand the truth of those warlike women, because of some it is believed, of 				others not. And though I digress from my purpose, yet I will set down that 				which hath been delivered me for truth of those women, and I spake with a 				cacique, or lord of people, that told me he 				had been in the river, and beyond it also. The nations of these women are on 				the south side of the river in the provinces of  				<em>Topago</em> , and their chiefest strengths and 				retracts are in the islands situate on the south side of the entrance, some 60 				leagues within the mouth of the said river. The memories of the like women are 				very ancient as well in  				<em>Africa</em> as in  				<em>Asia</em> . In  				<em>Africa</em> those that had  				<em>Medusa</em> for queen; others in  				<em>Scythia</em> , near the rivers of  				<em>Tanais </em> and  				<em>Thermodon</em> . We find, also, that  				<em>Lampedo</em> and  				<em>Marthesia</em> were queens of the  				<em>Amazons</em> . In many histories they are 				verified to have been, and in divers ages and provinces; but they which are not 				far from  				<em>Guiana</em> do accompany with men but once in 				a year, and for the time of one month, which I gather by their relation, to be 				in April; and that time all kings of the borders assemble, and queens of the  				<em>Amazons</em> ; and after the queens have 				chosen, the rest cast lots for their valentines. This one month they feast, 				dance, and drink of their wines in abundance; and the moon being done they all 				depart to their own provinces. They are said to be very cruel and bloodthirsty, 				especially to such as offer to invade their territories. These  				<em>Amazons</em> have likewise great store of 				these plates of gold, which they recover by exchange chiefly for a kind of 				green stones, which the Spaniards call <em>piedras 				hijadas</em>, and we use for spleen-stones; and for the disease of the 				stone we also esteem them. Of these I saw divers in  				<em>Guiana</em> ; and commonly every king or 				caciquehath one, which their wives for the 				most part wear, and they esteem them as great jewels. <span class="numbering-line">24.</span><br />
But to return to the enterprise of  				<em>Berreo</em> , who, as I have said, departed 				from  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> with 700 horse, besides the 				provisions above rehearsed. He descended by the river called  				<em>Cassanar</em> , which riseth in  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> out of the mountains by the 				city of  				<em>Tunja</em> , from which mountain also 				springeth  				<em>Pato</em> ; both which fall into the great 				river of  				<em>Meta</em> , and  				<em>Meta</em> riseth from a mountain joining to 				Pamplona, in the same  				<em>Nuevo Reyno de Granada</em> . These, as also  				<em>Guaiare</em> , which issueth out of the 				mountains by  				<em>Timana</em> , fall all into  				<em>Baraquan</em> , and are but of his heads; for 				at their coming together they lose their names, and  				<em>Baraquan</em> farther down is also rebaptized 				by the name of  				<em>Orenoque</em> . On the other side of the city 				and hills of  				<em>Timana</em> riseth  				<em>Rio Grande</em> , which falleth into the sea 				by  				<em>Santa Marta</em> . By  				<em>Cassanar</em> first, and so into  				<em>Meta</em> ,  				<em>Berreo</em> passed, keeping his horsemen on 				the banks, where the country served them for to march; and where otherwise, he 				was driven to embark them in boats which he builded for the purpose, and so 				came with the current down the river of  				<em>Meta</em> , and so into  				<em>Baraquan</em> . After he entered that great 				and mighty river, he began daily to lose of his companies both men and horse; 				for it is in many places violently swift, and hath forcible eddies, many sands, 				and divers islands sharp pointed with rocks. But after one whole year, 				journeying for the most part by river, and the rest by land, he grew daily to 				fewer numbers; from both by sickness, and by encountering with the people of 				those regions thorough which he travelled, his companies were much wasted, 				especially by divers encounters with the  				<em>Amapaians</em> . And in all this time he never 				could learn of any passage into  				<em>Guiana</em> , nor any news or fame thereof, 				until he came to a further border of the said  				<em>Amapaia</em> , eight days&#8217; journey from the 				river  				<em>Caroli</em> , which was the furthest river 				that he entered. Among those of  				<em>Amapaia</em> ,  				<em>Guiana</em> was famous; but few of these 				people accosted  				<em>Berreo</em> , or would trade with him the 				first three months of the six which he sojourned there. This  				<em>Amapaia</em> is also marvellous rich in gold, 				as both  				<em>Berreo</em> confessed and those of  				<em>Guiana</em> with whom I had most conference; 				and is situate upon  				<em>Orenoque</em> also. In this country  				<em>Berreo</em> lost sixty of his best soldiers, 				and most of all his horse that remained in his former year&#8217;s travel. But in the 				end, after divers encounters with those nations, they grew to peace, and they 				presented  				<em>Berreo</em> with ten images of fine gold 				among divers other plates and  				<em>croissants</em> , which, as he sware to me, 				and divers other gentlemen, were so curiously wrought, as he had not seen the 				like either in  				<em>Italy</em> ,  				<em>Spain</em> , or the  				<em>Low Countries</em> ; and he was resolved that 				when they came to the hands of the Spanish king, to whom he had sent them by 				his camp-master, they would appear very admirable, especially being wrought by 				such a nation as had no iron instruments at all, nor any of those helps which 				our goldsmiths have to work withal. The particular name of the people in  				<em>Amapaia</em> which gave him these pieces, are 				called  				<em>Anebas</em> , and the river of  				<em>Orenoque</em> at that place is about twelve 				English miles broad, which may be from his outfall into the sea 700 or 800 				miles. <span class="numbering-line">25.</span><br />
This province of  				<em>Amapaia</em> is a very low and a marish 				ground near the river; and by reason of the red water which issueth out in 				small branches thorough the fenny and boggy ground, there breed divers 				poisonful worms and serpents. And the Spaniards not suspecting, nor in any sort 				foreknowing the danger, were infected with a grievous kind of flux by drinking 				thereof, and even the very horses poisoned therewith; insomuch as at the end of 				the six months that they abode there, of all their troops there were not left 				above 120 soldiers, and neither horse nor cattle. For  				<em>Berreo</em> hoped to have found  				<em>Guiana</em> be 1,000 miles nearer than it 				fell out to be in the end; by means whereof they sustained much want, and much 				hunger, oppressed with grievous diseases, and all the miseries that could be 				imagined, I demanded of those in  				<em>Guiana</em> that had travelled  				<em>Amapaia</em> , how they lived with that tawny 				or red water when they travelled thither; and they told me that after the sun 				was near the middle of the sky, they used to fill their pots and pitchers with 				that water, but either before that time or towards the setting of the sun it 				was dangerous to drink of, and in the night strong poison. I learned also of 				divers other rivers of that nature among them, which were also, while the sun 				was in the meridian, very safe to drink, and in the morning, evening, and 				night, wonderful dangerous and infective. From this province  				<em>Berreo</em> hasted away as soon as the spring 				and beginning of summer appeared, and sought his entrance on the borders of  				<em>Orenoque</em> on the south side; but there 				ran a ledge of so high and impassable mountains, as he was not able by any 				means to march over them, continuing from the east sea into which  				<em>Orenoque</em> falleth, even to  				<em>Quito</em> in  				<em>Peru</em> . Neither had he means to carry 				victual or munition over those craggy, high, and fast hills, being all woody, 				and those so thick and spiny, and so full or prickles, thorns, and briars, as 				it is impossible to creep thorough them. He had also neither friendship among 				the people, nor any interpreter to persuade or treat with them; and more, to 				his disadvantage, the caciquesand kings of  				<em>Amapaia</em> had given knowledge of his 				purpose to the  				<em>Guianians</em> , and that he sought to sack 				and conquer the empire, for the hope of their so great abundance and quantities 				of gold. He passed by the mouths of many great rivers which fell into  				<em>Orenoque</em> both from the north and south, 				which I forbear to name, for tediousness, and because they are more pleasing in 				describing than reading. <span class="numbering-line">26.</span><br />
<em>Berreo</em> affirmed that there fell an 				hundred rivers into  				<em>Orenoque</em> from the north and south: 				whereof the least was as big as  				<em>Rio Grande</em> , that passed between  				<em>Popayan</em> and  				<em>Nuevo Reyno de Granada</em> ,  				<em>Rio Grande</em> being esteemed one of the 				renowned rivers in all the  				<em>West Indies</em> , and numbered among the 				great rivers of the world. But he knew not the names of any of these, but  				<em>Caroli</em> only; neither from what nations 				they descended, neither to what provinces they led, for he had no means to 				discourse with the inhabitants at any time; neither was he curious in these 				things, being utterly unlearned, and not knowing the east from the west. But of 				all these I got some knowledge, and of many more, partly by mine own travel, 				and the rest by conference; of some one I learned one, of others the rest, 				having with me an Indian that spake many languages, and that of  				<em>Guiana</em> naturally. I sought out all the 				aged men, and such as were greatest travellers. And by the one and the other I 				came to understand the situations, the rivers, the kingdoms from the east sea 				to the borders of  				<em>Peru</em> , and from  				<em>Orenoque</em> southward as far as  				<em>Amazons</em> or  				<em>Marañon</em> , and the regions of  				<em>Marinatambal</em> , and of all the kings of 				provinces, and captains of towns and villages, how they stood in terms of peace 				or war, and which were friends or enemies the one with the other; without which 				there can be neither entrance nor conquest in those parts, nor elsewhere. For 				by the dissension between  				<em>Guascar</em> and  				<em>Atabalipa</em> ,  				<em>Pizarro</em> conquered  				<em>Peru</em> , and by the hatred that the  				<em>Tlaxcallians</em> bare to  				<em>Mutezuma</em> ,  				<em>Cortes</em> was victorious over  				<em>Mexico</em> ; without which both the one and 				the other had failed of their enterprise, and of the great honour and riches 				which they attained unto. <span class="numbering-line">27.</span><br />
Now  				<em>Berreo</em> began to grow into despair, and 				looked for no other success than his predecessor in this enterprise; until such 				time as he arrived at the province of  				<em>Emeria</em> towards the east sea and mouth of 				the river, where he found a nation of people very favourable, and the country 				full of all manner of victual. The king of this land is called  				<em>Carapana</em> , a man very wise, subtle, and 				of great experience, being little less than an hundred years old. In his youth 				he was sent by his father into the island of  				<em>Trinidad</em> , by reason of civil war among 				themselves, and was bred at a village in that island, called  				<em>Parico</em> . At that place in his youth he 				had seen many Christians, both French and Spanish, and went divers times with 				the  				<em>Indians</em> of  				<em>Trinidad</em> to  				<em>Margarita</em> and  				<em>Cumaná</em> , in the  				<em>West Indies</em> , for both those places have 				ever been relieved with victual from  				<em>Trinidad</em> : by reason whereof he grew of 				more understanding, and noted the difference of the nations, comparing the 				strength and arms of his country with those of the Christians, and ever after 				temporised so as whosoever else did amiss, or was wasted by contention,  				<em>Carapana</em> kept himself and his country in 				quiet and plenty. He also held peace with the  				<em>Caribs</em> or  				<em>Cannibals</em> , his neighbours, and had free 				trade with all nations, whosoever else had war. <span class="numbering-line">28.</span><br />
<em>Berreo</em> sojourned and rested his weak 				troop in the town of  				<em>Carapana</em> six weeks, and from him learned 				the way and passage to  				<em>Guiana</em> , and the riches and magnificence 				thereof. But being then utterly unable to proceed, he determined to try his 				fortune another year, when he had renewed his provisions, and regathered more 				force, which he hoped for as well out of  				<em>Spain</em> as from  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> , where he had left his son  				<em>Don Antonio Ximenes</em> to second him upon 				the first notice given of his entrance; and so for the present embarked himself 				in  				<em>canoas</em> , and by the branches of  				<em>Orenoque</em> arrived at  				<em>Trinidad</em> , having from  				<em>Carapana</em> sufficient pilots to conduct 				him. From  				<em>Trinidad</em> he coasted  				<em>Paria</em> , and so recovered  				<em>Margarita</em> ; and having made relation to  				<em>Don Juan Sarmiento</em> , the Governor, of his 				proceeding, and persuaded him of the riches of  				<em>Guiana</em> , he obtained from thence fifty 				soldiers, promising presently to return to  				<em>Carapana</em> , and so into  				<em>Guiana</em> . But  				<em>Berreo</em> meant nothing less at that time; 				for he wanted many provisions necessary for such an enterprise, and therefore 				departed from  				<em>Margarita</em> , seated himself in  				<em>Trinidad</em> , and from thence sent his 				camp-master and his sergeant-major back to the borders to discover the nearest 				passage into the empire, as also to treat with the borderers, and to draw them 				to his party and love; without which, he knew he could neither pass safely, nor 				in any sort be relieved with victual or aught else.  				<em>Carapana</em> directed his company to a king 				called  				<em>Morequito</em> , assuring them that no man 				could deliver so much  				<em>Guiana</em> as  				<em>Morequito</em> could, and that his dwelling 				was but five days&#8217; journey from  				<em>Macureguarai</em> , the first civil town of  				<em>Guiana</em> .<span class="numbering-line">29.</span><br />
Now your lordship shall understand that this  				<em>Morequito</em> , one of the greatest lords or 				kings of the borders of  				<em>Guiana</em> , had two or three years before 				been at  				<em>Cumaná</em> and at  				<em>Margarita</em> , in the  				<em>West Indies</em> , with great store of plates 				of gold, which he carried to exchange for such other things as he wanted in his 				own country, and was daily feasted, and presented by the governors of those 				places, and held amongst them some two months. In which time one  				<em>Vides</em> , Governor of  				<em>Cumaná</em> , won him to be his 				conductor into  				<em>Guiana</em> , being allured by those  				<em>croissants</em> and images of gold which he 				brought with him to trade, as also by the ancient fame and magnificence of  				<em>El Dorado</em> ; whereupon  				<em>Vides</em> sent into  				<em>Spain</em> for a patent to discover and 				conquer  				<em>Guiana</em> , not knowing of the precedence of 				 				<em>Berreo</em> &#8217;s patent; which, as  				<em>Berreo</em> affirmeth, was signed before that 				of Vidas. So as when  				<em>Vides</em> understood of  				<em>Berreo</em> and that he had made entrance 				into that territory, and foregone his desire and hope, it was verily thought 				that  				<em>Vides</em> practised with  				<em>Morequito</em> to hinder and disturb  				<em>Berreo</em> in all he could, and not to 				suffer him to enter through his seignory, nor any of his companies; neither to 				victual, nor guide them in any sort. For  				<em>Vides</em> , Governor of  				<em>Cumaná</em> , and  				<em>Berreo</em> , were become mortal enemies, as 				well for that  				<em>Berreo</em> had gotten  				<em>Trinidad</em> into his patent with  				<em>Guiana</em> , as also in that he was by  				<em>Berreo</em> prevented in the journey of  				<em>Guiana</em> itself. Howsoever it was, I know 				not, but  				<em>Morequito</em> for a time dissembled his 				disposition, suffered ten Spaniards and a friar, which  				<em>Berreo</em> has sent to discover  				<em>Manoa</em> , to travel through his country, 				gave them a guide for  				<em>Macureguarai</em> , the first town of civil 				and apparelled people, from whence they had other guides to bring them to  				<em>Manoa</em> , the great city of  				<em>Inga</em> ; and being furnished with those 				things which they had learned of  				<em>Carapana</em> were of most price in  				<em>Guiana</em> , went onward, and in eleven days 				arrived at  				<em>Manoa</em> , as  				<em>Berreo</em> affirmeth for certain; although I 				could not be assured thereof by the lord which now governeth the province of  				<em>Morequito</em> , for he told me that they got 				all the gold they had in other towns on this side  				<em>Manoa</em> , there being many very great and 				rich, and (as he said) built like the towns of Christians, with many rooms. 				<span class="numbering-line">30.</span><br />
When these ten Spaniards were returned, and ready to put 				out of the border of  				<em>Aromaia</em> , the people of  				<em>Morequito</em> set upon them, and slew them 				all but one that swam the river, and took from them to the value of 40,000 				pesos of gold; and one of them only lived to bring the news to  				<em>Berreo</em> , that both his nine soldiers and 				holy father were benighted in the said province. I myself spake with the 				captains of  				<em>Morequito</em> that slew them, and was at the 				place where it was executed.  				<em>Berreo</em> , enraged herewithal, sent all the 				strength he could make into  				<em>Aromaia</em> , to be revenged of him, his 				people, and country. But  				<em>Morequito</em> , suspecting the same, fled 				over  				<em>Orenoque</em> , and thorough the territories 				of the  				<em>Saima</em> and  				<em>Wikiri</em> recovered  				<em>Cumaná</em> , where he thought himself 				very safe, with  				<em>Vides</em> the governor. But  				<em>Berreo</em> sending for him in the king&#8217;s 				name, and his messengers finding him in the house of one  				<em>Fajardo</em> , on the sudden, yere he was 				suspected, so as he could not then be conveyed away,  				<em>Vides</em> durst not deny him, as well to 				avoid the suspicion of the practice, as also for that an holy father was slain 				by him and his people.  				<em>Morequito</em> offered  				<em>Fajardo</em> the weight of three quintals in 				gold, to let him escape; but the poor  				<em>Guianian</em> , betrayed on all sides, was 				delivered to the camp-master of  				<em>Berreo</em> , and was presently executed.<span class="numbering-line">31.</span><br />
After the death of this  				<em>Morequito</em> , the soldiers of  				<em>Berreo</em> spoiled his territory and took 				divers prisoners. Among others they took the uncle of  				<em>Morequito</em> , called  				<em>Topiawari</em> , who is now king of  				<em>Aromaia</em> , whose son I brought with me 				into  				<em>England</em> , and is a man of great 				understanding and policy; he is above an hundred years old, and yet is of a 				very able body. The Spaniards led him in a chain seventeen days, and made him 				their guide from place to place between his country and  				<em>Emeria</em> , the province of  				<em>Carapana</em> aforesaid, and he was at last 				redeemed for an hundred plates of gold, and divers stones called 				<em>piedras hijadas</em>, or spleen-stones. Now  				<em>Berreo</em> for executing of  				<em>Morequito</em> , and other cruelties, spoils, 				and slaughters done in  				<em>Aromaia</em> , hath lost the love of the  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> , and of all the borderers, 				and dare not send any of his soldiers any further into the land than to  				<em>Carapana</em> , which he called the port of  				<em>Guiana</em> ; but from thence by the help of  				<em>Carapana</em> he had trade further into the 				country, and always appointed ten Spaniards to reside in  				<em>Carapana</em> &#8217;s town, by whose favour, and by 				being conducted by his people, those ten searched the country thereabouts, as 				well for mines as for other trades and commodities.<span class="numbering-line">32.</span><br />
They also have gotten a nephew of  				<em>Morequito</em> , whom they have christened and 				named  				<em>Don Juan</em> , of whom they have great hope, 				endeavouring by all means to establish him in the said province. Among many 				other trades, those Spaniards used  				<em>canoas</em> to pass to the rivers of  				<em>Barema</em> ,  				<em>Pawroma,</em> and  				<em>Dissequebe</em> , which are on the south side 				of the mouth of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , and there buy women and 				children from the  				<em>Cannibals</em> , which are of that barbarous 				nature, as they will for three or four hatchets sell the sons and daughters of 				their own brethren and sisters, and for somewhat more even their own daughters. 				Hereof the Spaniards make great profit; for buying a maid of twelve or thirteen 				years for three or four hatchets, they sell them again at  				<em>Margarita</em> in the  				<em>West Indies</em> for fifty and an hundred  				<em>pesos</em> , which is so many crowns.<span class="numbering-line">33.</span><br />
The master of my ship,  				<em>John Douglas</em> , took one of the  				<em>canoas</em> which came laden from thence with 				people to be sold, and the most of them escaped; yet of those he brought, there 				was one as well favoured and as well shaped as ever I saw any in  				<em>England</em> ; and afterwards I saw many of 				them, which but for their tawny colour may be compared to any in  				<em>Europe</em> . They also trade in those rivers 				for bread of  				<em>cassavi</em> , of which they buy an hundred 				pound weight for a knife, and sell it at  				<em>Margarita</em> for ten pesos. They also 				recover great store of cotton, Brazil wood, and those beds which they call  				<em>hamacas</em> or Brazil beds, wherein in hot 				countries all the Spaniards use to lie commonly, and in no other, neither did 				we ourselves while we were there. By means of which trades, for ransom of 				divers of the  				<em>Guianians</em> , and for exchange of hatchets 				and knives,  				<em>Berreo</em> recovered some store of gold 				plates, eagles of gold, and images of men and divers birds, and dispatched his 				camp-master for  				<em>Spain</em> , with all that he had gathered, 				therewith to levy soldiers, and by the show thereof to draw others to the love 				of the enterprise. And having sent divers images as well of men as beasts, 				birds, and fishes, so curiously wrought in gold, he doubted not but to persuade 				the king to yield to him some further help, especially for that this land hath 				never been sacked, the mines never wrought, and in the  				<em>Indies</em> their works were well spent, and 				the gold drawn out with great labour and charge. He also despatched messengers 				to his son in  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> to levy all the forces he 				could, and to come down the river  				<em>Orenoque</em> to  				<em>Emeria</em> , the province of  				<em>Carapana</em> , to meet him; he had also sent 				to  				<em>Santiago de Leon</em> on the coast of the  				<em>Caracas</em> , to buy horses and mules.<span class="numbering-line">34.</span><br />
After I had thus learned of his proceedings past and 				purposed, I told him that I had resolved to see  				<em>Guiana</em> , and that it was the end of my 				journey, and the cause of my coming to  				<em>Trinidad</em> , as it was indeed, and for that 				purpose I sent  				<em>Jacob</em>  				<em>Whiddon</em> the year before to get 				intelligence: with whom  				<em>Berreo</em> himself had speech at that time, 				and remembered how inquisitive  				<em>Jacob </em>  				<em>Whiddon</em> was of his proceedings, and of 				the country of  				<em>Guiana</em> .  				<em>Berreo</em> was stricken into a great 				melancholy and sadness, and used all the arguments he could to dissuade me; and 				also assured the gentlemen of my company that it would be labour lost, and that 				they should suffer many miseries if they proceeded. And first he delivered that 				I could not enter any of the rivers with any bark or pinnace, or hardly with 				any ship&#8217;s boat, it was so low, sandy, and full of flats, and that his 				companies were daily grounded in their canoes, which drew but twelve inches 				water. He further said that none of the country would come to speak with us, 				but would all fly; and if we followed them to their dwellings, they would burn 				their own towns. And besides that, the way was long, the winter at hand, and 				that the rivers beginning once to swell, it was impossible to stem the current; 				and that we could not in those small boats by any means carry victuals for half 				the time, and that (which indeed most discouraged my company) the kings and 				lords of all the borders of  				<em>Guiana</em> had decreed that none of them 				should trade with any Christians for gold, because the same would be their own 				overthrow, and that for the love of gold the Christians meant to conquer and 				dispossess them of all together.<span class="numbering-line">35.</span><br />
Many and the most of these I found to be true; but yet I 				resolving to make trial of whatsoever happened, directed Captain  				<em>George Gifford</em> , my Vice-Admiral, to take 				the  				<em>Lion&#8217;s Whelp</em> , and Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> his bark, [and] to turn to the 				eastward, against the mouth of a river called  				<em>Capuri</em> , whose entrance I had before sent 				Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> and  				<em>John Douglas</em> the master to discover. Who 				found some nine foot water or better upon the flood, and five at low water: to 				whom I had given instructions that they should anchor at the edge of the shoal, 				and upon the best of the flood to thrust over, which shoal  				<em>John Douglas</em> buoyed and beckoned for 				them before. But they laboured in vain; for neither could they turn it up 				altogether so far to the east, neither did the flood continue so long, but the 				water fell yere they could have passed the sands. As we after found by a second 				experience: so as now we must either give over our enterprise, or leaving our 				ships at adventure 400 mile behind us, must run up in our ship&#8217;s boats, one 				barge, and two wherries. But being doubtful how to carry victuals for so long a 				time in such baubles, or any strength of men, especially for that  				<em>Berreo</em> assured us that his son must be 				by that time come down with many soldiers, I sent away one  				<em>King</em> , master of the  				<em>Lion&#8217;s Whelp</em> , with his ship-boat, to try 				another branch of the river in the bottom of the Bay of Guanipa, which was 				called  				<em>Amana</em> , to prove if there were water to 				be found for either of the small ships to enter. But when he came to the mouht 				of  				<em>Amana</em> , he found it as the rest, but 				stayed not to discover it thoroughly, because he was assured by an Indian, his 				guide, that the  				<em>Cannibals</em> of  				<em>Guanipa</em> would assail them with many  				<em>canoas</em> , and that they shot poisoned 				arrows; so as if he hasted not back, they should all be lost.<span class="numbering-line">36.</span><br />
In the meantime, fearing the worst, I caused all the 				carpenters we had to cut down a  				<em>galego</em> boat, which we meant to cast off, 				and to fit her with banks to row on, and in all things to prepare her the best 				they could, so as she might be brought to draw but five foot: for so much we 				had on the bar of  				<em>Capuri </em> at low water. And doubting of  				<em>King</em> &#8217;s return, I sent  				<em>John Douglas</em> again in my long barge, as 				well to relieve him, as also to make a perfect search in the bottom of the bay; 				for it hath been held for infallible, that whatsoever ship or boat shall fall 				therein can never disemboque again, by reason of the violent current which 				setteth into the said bay, as also for that the breeze and easterly wind 				bloweth directly into the same. Of which opinion I have heard  				<em>John Hampton</em> , of  				<em>Plymouth</em> , one of the greatest experience 				of England, and divers other besides that have traded to  				<em>Trinidad</em> .<span class="numbering-line">37.</span><br />
I sent with  				<em>John Douglas</em> an old 				caciqueof  				<em>Trinidad</em> for a pilot, who told us that 				we could not return again by the bay or gulf, but that he knew a by-branch 				which ran within the land to the eastward, and he thought by it we might fall 				into  				<em>Capuri</em> , and so return in four days. John 				Douglas searched those rivers, and found four goodly entrances, whereof the 				least was as big as the  				<em>Thames</em> at  				<em>Woolwich</em> , but in the bay thitherward it 				was shoal and but six foot water; so as we were now without hope of any ship or 				bark to pass over, and therefore resolved to go on with the boats, and the 				bottom of the  				<em>galego</em> , in which we thrust 60 men. In 				the  				<em>Lion&#8217;s Whelp</em> &#8217;s boat and wherry we 				carried twenty, Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> in his wherry carried ten 				more, and in my barge other ten, which made up a hundred; we had no other means 				but to carry victual for a month in the same, and also to lodge therein as we 				could, and to boil and dress our meat. Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> had with him Master  				<em>Edward Porter</em> , Captain  				<em>Eynos</em> , and eight more in his wherry, 				with all their victual, weapons, and provisions. Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> had with him my cousin  				<em>Butshead Gorges</em> , and eight more. In the 				galley, of gentlemen and officers myself had Captain  				<em>Thyn</em> , my cousin  				<em>John Greenvile</em> , my nephew  				<em>John Gilbert</em> , Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> , Captain  				<em>Keymis</em> ,  				<em>Edward Hancock</em> ,  				<em>Captain Clarke</em> , Lieutenant  				<em>Hughes</em> ,  				<em>Thomas Upton</em> ,  				<em>Captain Facy</em> ,  				<em>Jerome Ferrar</em> ,  				<em>Anthony Wells</em> ,  				<em>William Connock</em> ,,and above fifty more. 				We could not learn of  				<em>Berreo</em> any other way to enter but in 				branches so far to windward as it was impossible for us to recover; for we had 				as much sea to cross over in our wherries, as between Dover and Calice, and in 				a great bollow, the wind and current being both very strong. So as we were 				driven to go in those small boats directly before the wind into the bottom of 				the Bay of  				<em>Guanipa</em> , and from thence to enter the 				mouth of some one of those rivers which  				<em>John Douglas</em> had last discovered; and 				had with us for pilot an Indian of  				<em>Barema</em> , a river to the south of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , between that and  				<em>Amazons</em> , whose  				<em>canoas</em> we had formerly taken as he was 				going from the said  				<em>Barema</em> , laden with cassavi bread to sell 				at  				<em>Margarita</em> . This  				<em>Arwacan</em> promised to bring me into the 				great river of  				<em>Orenoque</em> ; but indeed of that which he 				entered he was utterly ignorant, for he had not seen it in twelve years before, 				at which time he was very young, and of no judgment. And if God had not sent us 				another help, we might have wandered a whole year in that labyrinth of rivers, 				yere we had found any way, either out or in, especially after we were past 				ebbing and flowing, which was in four days. For I know all the earth doth not 				yield the like confluence of streams and branches, the one crossing the other 				so many times, and all so fair and large, and so like one to another, as no man 				can tell which to take: and if we went by the sun or compass, hoping thereby to 				go directly one way or other, yet that way we were also carried in a circle 				amongst multitudes of islands, and every island so bordered with high trees as 				no man could see any further than the breadth of the river, or length of the 				breach. But this it chanced, that entering into a river (which because it had 				no name, we called the River of the Red Cross, ourselves being the first 				Christians that ever came therein), the 22. of May, as we were rowing up the 				same, we espied a small  				<em>canoa</em> with three  				<em>Indians</em> , which by the swiftness of my 				barge, rowing with eight oars, I overtook yere they could cross the river. The 				rest of the people on the banks, shadowed under the thick wood, gazed on with a 				doubtful conceit what might befall those three which we had taken. But when 				they perceived that we offered them no violence, neither entered their  				<em>canoa</em> with any of ours, nor took out of 				the  				<em>canoa</em> any of theirs, they then began to 				show themselves on the bank&#8217;s side, and offered to traffic with us for such 				things as they had. And as we drew near, they all stayed; and we came with our 				barge to the mouth of a little creek which came from their town into the great 				river. <span class="numbering-line">38.</span><br />
As we abode here awhile, our Indian pilot, called  				<em>Ferdinando</em> , would needs go ashore to 				their village to fetch some fruits and to drink of their artificial wines, and 				also to see the place and know the lord of it against another time, and took 				with him a brother of his which he had with him in the journey. When they came 				to the village of these people the lord of the island offered to lay hands on 				them, purposing to have slain them both; yielding for reason that this Indian 				of ours had brought a strange nation into their territory to spoil and destroy 				them. But the pilot being quick and of a disposed body, slipt their fingers and 				ran into the woods, and his brother, being the better footman of the two, 				recovered the creek&#8217;s mouth, where we stayed in our barge, crying out that his 				brother was slain. With that we set hands on one of them that was next us, a 				very old man, and brought him into the barge, assuring him that if we had not 				our pilot again we would presently cut off his head. This old man, being 				resolved that he should pay the loss of the other, cried out to those in the 				woods to save  				<em> 				  <em>Ferdinando</em> </em> , our pilot; but they 				followed him notwithstanding, and hunted after him upon the foot with their 				deer-dogs, and with so main a cry that all the woods echoed with the shout they 				made. But at the last this poor chased Indian recovered the river side and got 				upon a tree, and, as we were coasting, leaped down and swam to the barge half 				dead with fear. But our good hap was that we kept the other old Indian, which 				we handfasted to redeem our pilot withal; for, being natural of those rivers, 				we assured ourselves that he knew the way better than any stranger could. And, 				indeed, but for this chance, I think we had never found the way either to  				<em>Guiana</em> or back to our ships; for  				<em>Ferdinando</em> after a few days knew nothing 				at all, nor which way to turn; yea, and many times the old man himself was in 				great doubt which river to take. Those people which dwell in these broken 				islands and drowned lands are generally called  				<em>Tivitivas</em> . There are of them two sorts; 				the one called  				<em>Ciawani</em> , and the other  				<em>Waraweete</em> .<span class="numbering-line">39.</span><br />
The great river of  				<em>Orenoque</em> or  				<em>Baraquan</em> hath nine branches which fall 				out on the north side of his own main mouth. On the south side it hath seven 				other fallings into the sea, so it disemboqueth by sixteen arms in all, between 				islands and broken ground; but the islands are very great, many of them as big 				as the  				<em>Isle of Wight</em> , and bigger, and many 				less. From the first branch on the north to the last of the south it is at 				least 100 leagues, so as the river&#8217;s mouth is 300 miles wide at his entrance 				into the sea, which I take to be far bigger than that of  				<em>Amazons</em> . All those that inhabit in the 				mouth of this river upon the several north branches are these  				<em>Tivitivas</em> , of which there are two chief 				lords which have continual wars one with the other. The islands which lie on 				the right hand are called  				<em>Pallamos</em> , and the land on the left,  				<em>Hororotomaka</em> ; and the river by which  				<em>John Douglas</em> returned within the land 				from  				<em>Amana</em> to  				<em>Capuri</em> they call  				<em>Macuri</em> . <span class="numbering-line">40.</span><br />
These  				<em>Tivitivas</em> are a very goodly people and 				very valiant, and have the most manly speech and most deliberate that ever I 				heard of what nation soever. In the summer they have houses on the ground, as 				in other places; in the winter they dwell upon the trees, where they build very 				artificial towns and villages, as it is written in the Spanish story of the  				<em>West Indies</em> that those people do in the 				low lands near the gulf of  				<em>Uraba</em> . For between May and September the 				river of  				<em>Orenoque</em> riseth thirty foot upright, and 				then are those islands overflown twenty foot high above the level of the 				ground, saving some few raised grounds in the middle of them; and for this 				cause they are enforced to live in this manner. They never eat of anything that 				is set or sown; and as at home they use neither planting nor other manurance, 				so when they come abroad they refuse to feed of aught but of that which nature 				without labour bringeth forth. They use the tops of palmitos for bread, and 				kill deer, fish, and porks for the rest of their sustenance. They have also 				many sorts of fruits that grow in the woods, and great variety of birds and 				fowls; and if to speak of them were not tedious and vulgar, surely we saw in 				those passages of very rare colours and forms not elsewhere to be found, for as 				much as I have either seen or read. <span class="numbering-line">41.</span><br />
Of these people those that dwell upon the branches of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , called  				<em>Capuri</em> , and  				<em>Macureo</em> , are for the most part 				carpenters of  				<em>canoas</em> ; for they make the most and 				fairest  				<em>canoas</em> ; and sell them into  				<em>Guiana</em> for gold and into  				<em>Trinidad</em> for tabacco, in the excessive 				taking whereof they exceed all nations. And notwithstanding the moistness of 				the air in which they live, the hardness of their diet, and the great labours 				they suffer to hunt, fish, and fowl for their living, in all my life, either in 				the  				<em>Indies</em> or in  				<em>Europe</em> , did I never behold a more goodly 				or better-favoured people or a more manly. They were wont to make war upon all 				nations, and especially on the  				Cannibals , so as none durst without a 				good strength trade by those rivers; but of late they are at peace with their 				neighbours, all holding the Spaniards for a common enemy. When their commanders 				die they use great lamentation; and when they think the flesh of their bodies 				is putrified and fallen from their bones, then they take up the carcase again 				and hang it in the cacique&#8217;s house that 				died, and deck his skull with feathers of all colours, and hang all his gold 				plates about the bones of this arms, thighs, and legs. Those nations which are 				called Arwacas, which dwell on the south of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , of which place and nation our 				Indian pilot was, are dispersed in many other places, and do use to beat the 				bones of their lords into powder, and their wives and friends drink it all in 				their several sorts of drinks. <span class="numbering-line">42.</span><br />
After we departed from the port of these  				<em>Ciawani</em> we passed up the river with the 				flood and anchored the ebb, and in this sort we went onward. The third day that 				we entered the river, our galley came on ground; and stuck so fast as we 				thought that even there our discovery had ended, and that we must have left 				four-score and ten of our men to have inhabited, like rooks upon trees, with 				those nations. But the next morning, after we had cast out all her ballast, 				with tugging and hauling to and fro we got her afloat and went on. At four 				days&#8217; end we fell into as goodly a river as ever I beheld, which was called the 				great  				<em>Amana</em> , which ran more directly without 				windings and turnings than the other. But soon after the flood of the sea left 				us; and, being enforced either by main strength to row against a violent 				current, or to return as wise as we went out, we had then no shift but to 				persuade the companies that it was but two or three days&#8217; work, and therefore 				desired them to take pains, every gentleman and others taking their turns to 				row, and to spell one the other at the hour&#8217;s end. Every day we passed by 				goodly branches of rivers, some falling from the west, others from the east, 				into  				<em>Amana</em> ; but those I leave to the 				description in the chart of discovery, where every one shall be named with his 				rising and descent. When three days more were overgone, our companies began to 				despair, the weather being extreme hot, the river bordered with very high trees 				that kept away the air, and the current against us every day stronger than 				other. But we evermore commanded our pilots to promise an end the next day, and 				used it so long as we were driven to assure them from four reaches of the river 				to three, and so to two, and so to the next reach. But so long we laboured that 				many days were spent, and we driven to draw ourselves to harder allowance, our 				bread even at the last, and no drink at all; and our men and ourselves so 				wearied and scorched, and doubtful withal whether we should ever perform it or 				no, the heat increasing as we drew towards the line; for we were now in five 				degrees. <span class="numbering-line">43.</span><br />
The further we went on, our victual decreasing and the air 				breeding great faintness, we grew weaker and weaker, when we had most need of 				strength and ability. For hourly the river ran more violently than other 				against us, and the barge, wherries, and ship&#8217;s boat of Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> and Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> had spent all their 				provisions; so as we were brought into despair and discomfort, had we not 				persuaded all the company that it was but only one day&#8217;s work more to attain 				the land where we should be relieved of all we wanted, and if we returned, that 				we were sure to starve by the way, and that the world would also laugh us to 				scorn. On the banks of these rivers were divers sorts of fruits good to eat, 				flowers and trees of such variety as were sufficient to make ten volumes of 				Herbals; we relieved ourselves many times with the fruits of the country, and 				sometimes with fowl and fish. We saw birds of all colours, some carnation, some 				crimson, orange-tawny, purple, watchet, and of all other sorts, both simple and 				mixed, and it was unto us a great good-passing of the time to behold them, 				besides the relief we found by killing some store of them with our 				fowling-pieces; without which, having little or no bread, and less drink, but 				only the thick and troubled water of the river, we had been in a very hard 				case.<span class="numbering-line">44.</span><br />
Our old pilot of the  				<em>Ciawani</em> , whom, as I said before, we took 				to redeem  				<em>Ferdinando</em> , told us, that if we would 				enter a branch of a river on the right hand with our barge and wherries, and 				leave the galley at anchor the while in the great river, he would bring us to a 				town of the  				<em>Arwacas</em> , where we should find store of 				bread, hens, fish, and of the country wine; and persuaded us, that departing 				from the galley at noon we might return yere night. I was very glad to hear 				this speech, and presently took my barge, with eight musketeers, Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> &#8217;s wherry, with himself and four 				musketeers, and Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> with his wherry, and as many; 				and so we entered the mouth of this river; and because we were persuaded that 				it was so near, we took no victual with us at all. When we had rowed three 				hours, we marvelled we saw no sign of any dwelling, and asked the pilot where 				the town was; he told us, a little further. After three hours more, the sun 				being almost set, we began to suspect that he led us that way to betray us; for 				he confessed that those Spaniards which fled from  				<em>Trinidad</em> , and also those that remained 				with  				<em>Carapana</em> in  				<em> 				  <em>Emeria</em> </em> , were joined together in 				some village upon that river. But when it grew towards night, and we demanded 				where the place was, he told us but four reaches more. When we had rowed four 				and four, we saw no sign; and our poor watermen, even heart-broken and tired, 				were ready to give up the ghost; for we had now come from the galley near forty 				miles.<span class="numbering-line">45.</span><br />
At the last we determined to hang the pilot; and if we had 				well known the way back again by night, he had surely gone. But our own 				necessities pleaded sufficiently for his safety; for it was a dark as pitch, 				and the river began so to narrow itself, and the trees to hang over from side 				to side, as we were driven with arming swords to cut a passage thorough those 				branches that covered the water. We were very desirous to find this town hoping 				of a feast, because we made but a short breakfast aboard the galley in the 				morning, and it was now eight o&#8217;clock at night, and our stomachs began to gnaw 				apace; but whether it was best to return or go on, we began to doubt, 				suspecting treason in the pilot more and more; but the poor old Indian ever 				assured us that it was but a little further, but this one turning and that 				turning; and at the last about one o&#8217;clock after midnight we saw a light, and 				rowing towards it we heard the dogs of the village. When we landed we found few 				people; for the lord of that place was gone with divers  				<em>canoas</em> above 400 miles off, upon a 				journey towards the head of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , to trade for gold, and to buy 				women of the  				<em>Cannibals</em> , who afterwards unfortunately 				passed by us as we rode at an anchor in the port of  				<em>Morequito</em> in the dark of the night, and 				yet came so near us as his  				<em>canoas</em> grated against our barges; he 				left one of his company at the port of  				<em>Morequito</em> , by whom we understood that he 				had brought thirty young women, divers plates of gold, and had great store of 				fine pieces of cotton cloth, and cotton beds. In his house we had good store of 				bread, fish, hens, and Indian drink, and so rested that night; and in the 				morning, after we had traded with such of his people as came down, we returned 				towards our galley, and brought with us some quantity of bread, fish, and 				hens.<span class="numbering-line">46.</span><br />
On both sides of this river we passed the most beautiful 				country that ever mine eyes beheld; and whereas all that we had seen before was 				nothing but woods, prickles, bushes, and thorns, here we beheld plains of 				twenty miles in length, the grass short and green, and in divers parts groves 				of trees by themselves, as if they had been by all the art and labour in the 				world so made of purpose; and still as we rowed, the deer came down feeding by 				the water&#8217;s side as if they had been used to a keeper&#8217;s call. Upon this river 				there were great store of fowl, and of many sorts; we saw in it divers sorts of 				strange fishes, and of marvellous bigness; but for  				<em>lagartos</em> it exceeded, for there were 				thousands of those ugly serpents; and the people call it, for the abundance of 				them, the River of  				<em>Lagartos</em> , in their language. I had a 				negro, a very proper young fellow, who leaping out of the galley to swim in the 				mouth of this river, was in all our sights taken and devoured with one of those 				 				<em>lagartos</em> . In the meanwhile our companies 				in the galley thought we had been all lost, for we promised to return before 				night; and sent the  				<em>Lion&#8217;s Whelp</em> &#8217;s ship&#8217;s boat with Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> to follow us up the river. But 				the next day, after we had rowed up and down some fourscore miles, we returned, 				and went on our way up the great river; and when we were even at the last cast 				for want of victuals, Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> being before the galley and the 				rest of the boats, seeking out some place to land upon the banks to make fire, 				espied four  				<em>canoas</em> coming down the river; and with 				no small joy caused his men to try the uttermost of their strengths, and after 				a while two of the four gave over and ran themselves ashore, every man betaking 				himself to the fastness of the woods. The two other lesser got away, while he 				landed to lay hold on these; and so turned into some by-creek, we knew not 				whither. Those  				<em>canoas</em> that were taken were loaded with 				bread, and were bound for  				<em>Margarita</em> in the  				<em>West Indies</em> , which those  				<em>Indians</em> , called  				<em>Arwacas</em> , proposed to carry thither for 				exchange; but in the lesser there were three Spaniards, who having heard of the 				defeat of their Governor in  				<em>Trinidad</em> , and that we purposed to enter  				<em>Guiana</em> , came away in those  				<em>canoas</em> ; one of them was a  				<em>cavallero</em> , as the captain of the  				<em>Arwacas</em> after told us, another a soldier 				and the third a refiner.<span class="numbering-line">47.</span><br />
In the meantime, nothing on the earth could have been more 				welcome to us, next unto gold, than the great store of very excellent bread 				which we found in these  				<em>canoas</em> ; for now our men cried,  				<em>Let us go on, we care not how far</em>. 				After that Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> had brought the two  				<em>canoas</em> to the galley, I took my barge 				and went to the bank&#8217;s side with a dozen shot, where the  				<em>canoas</em> first ran themselves ashore, and 				landed there, sending out Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> and Captain  				<em>Thyn</em> on one hand and Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> on the other, to follow those 				that were fled into the woods. And as I was creeping thorough the bushes, I saw 				an Indian basket hidden, which was the refiner&#8217;s basket; for I found in it his 				quicksilver, saltpetre, and divers things for the trial of  				<em>Meta</em> ls, and also the dust of such ore as 				he had refined; but in those  				<em>canoas</em> which escaped there was a good 				quantity of ore and gold. I then landed more men, and offered five hundred 				pound to what soldier soever could take one of those three Spaniards that we 				thought were landed. But our labours were in vain in that behalf, for they put 				themselves into one of the small  				<em>canoas</em> , and so, while the greater  				<em>canoas</em> were in taking, they escaped. But 				seeking after the Spaniards we found the  				<em>Arwacas</em> hidden in the woods, which were 				pilots for the Spaniards, and rowed their  				<em>canoas</em> . Of which I kept the chiefest for 				a pilot, and carried him with me to  				<em>Guiana</em> ; by whom I understood where and 				in what countries the Spaniards had laboured for gold, though I made not the 				same known to all. For when the springs began to break, and the rivers to raise 				themselves so suddenly as by no means we could abide the digging of any mine, 				especially for that the richest are defended with rocks of hard stones, which 				we call the <em>white spar</em>, and that it required 				both time, men, and instruments fit for such a work, I thought it best not to 				hover thereabouts, lest if the same had been perceived by the company, there 				would have been by this time many barks and ships set out, and perchance other 				nations would also have gotten of ours for pilots. So as both ourselves might 				have been prevented, and all our care taken for good usage of the people been 				utterly lost, by those that only respect present profit; and such violence or 				insolence offered as the nations which are borderers would have changed the 				desire of our love and defence into hatred and violence. And for any longer 				stay to have brought a more quantity, which I hear hath been often objected, 				whosoever had seen or proved the fury of that river after it began to arise, 				and had been a month and odd days, as we were, from hearing aught from our 				ships, leaving them meanly manned 400 miles off, would perchance have turned 				somewhat sooner than we did, if all the mountains had been gold, or rich 				stones. And to say the truth, all the branches and small rivers which fell into 				 				<em>Orenoque</em> were raised with such speed, as 				if we waded them over the shoes in the morning outward, we were covered to the 				shoulders homeward the very same day; and to stay to dig our gold with our 				nails, had been <em>opus laboris</em>but not 				<em>ingenii</em>. Such a quantity as would have served 				our turns we could not have had, but a discovery of the mines to our infinite 				disadvantage we had made, and that could have been the best profit of farther 				search or stay; for those mines are not easily broken, nor opened in haste, and 				I could have returned a good quantity of gold ready cast if I had not shot at 				another mark than present profit.<span class="numbering-line">48.</span><br />
This  				<em>Arwacan</em> pilot, with the rest, feared 				that we would have eaten them, or otherwise have put them to some cruel death: 				for the Spaniards, to the end that none of the people in the passage towards  				<em>Guiana</em> , or in  				<em>Guiana</em> itself, might come to speech with 				us, persuaded all the nations that we were men-eaters and  				<em>Cannibals</em> . But when the poor men and 				women had seen us, and that we gave them meat, and to every one something or 				other which was rare and strange to them, they began to conceive the deceit and 				purpose of the Spaniards, who indeed, as they confessed took from them both 				their wives and daughters daily . . . But I protest before the Majesty of the 				living God, that I neither know nor believe, that any of our company, one or 				other, did offer insult to any of their women, and yet we saw many hundreds, 				and had many in our power, and of those very young and excellently favoured, 				which came among us without deceit, stark naked. Nothing got us more love 				amongst them than this usage; for I suffered not any man to take from any of 				the nations so much as a  				<em>pina</em> or a  				<em>potato</em> root without giving them 				contentment, nor any man so much as to offer to touch any of their wives or 				daughters; which course, so contrary to the Spaniards, who tyrannize over them 				in all things, drew them to admire her Majesty, whose commandment I told them 				it was, and also wonderfully to honour our nation. But I confess it was a very 				impatient work to keep the meaner sort from spoil and stealing when we came to 				their houses; which because in all I could not prevent, I caused my Indian 				interpreter at every place when we departed, to know of the loss or wrong done, 				and if aught were stolen or taken by violence, either the same was restored, 				and the party punished in their sight, or else was paid for to their uttermost 				demand. They also much wondered at us, after they heard that we had slain the 				Spaniards at  				<em>Trinidad</em> , for they were before resolved 				that no nation of Christians durst abide their presence; and they wondered more 				when I had made them know of the great overthrow that her Majesty&#8217;s army and 				fleet had given them of late years in their own countries.<span class="numbering-line">49.</span><br />
After we had taken in this supply of bread, with divers 				baskets of roots, which were excellent meat, I gave one of the  				<em>canoas</em> to the  				<em>Arwacas</em> , which belonged to the Spaniards 				that were escaped; and when I had dismissed all but the captain, who by the 				Spaniards was christened  				<em>Martin</em> , I sent back in the same  				<em>canoa</em> the old  				<em>Ciawani</em> , and  				<em>Ferdinando</em> , my first pilot, and gave 				them both such things as they desired, with sufficient victual to carry them 				back, and by them wrote a letter to the ships, which they promised to deliver, 				and performed it; and then I went on, with my new hired pilot,  				<em>Martin</em> the  				<em>Arwacan</em> . But the next or second day 				after, we came aground again with our galley, and were like to cast her away, 				with all our victual and provision, and so lay on the sand one whole night, and 				were far more in despair at this time to free her than before, because we had 				no tide of flood to help us, and therefore feared that all our hopes would have 				ended in mishaps. But we fastened an anchor upon the land, and with main 				strength drew her off; and so the fifteenth day we discovered afar off the 				mountains of  				<em>Guiana</em> , to our great joy, and towards 				the evening had a slent of a northerly wind that blew very strong, which 				brought us in sight of the great river  				<em>Orenoque</em> ; out of which this river 				descended wherein we were. We descried afar off three other  				<em>canoas</em> as far as we could discern them, 				after whom we hastened with ourbarge and wherries, but two of them passed out 				of sight, and the third entered up the great river, on the right hand to the 				westward, and there stayed out of sight, thinking that we meant to take the way 				eastward towards the province of  				<em>Carapana</em> ; for that way the Spaniards 				keep, not daring to go upwards to  				<em>Guiana</em> , the people in those parts being 				all their enemies, and those in the  				<em>canoas</em> thought us to have been those 				Spaniards that were fled from  				<em>Trinidad</em> , and escaped killing. And when 				we came so far down as the opening of that branch into which they slipped, 				being near them with our barge and wherries, we made after them, and yere they 				could land came within call, and by our interpreter told them what we were, 				wherewith they came back willingly aboard us; and of such fish and 				<em>tortugas</em>&#8216; eggs as they had gathered they gave 				us, and promised in the morning to bring the lord of that part with them, and 				to do us all other services they could. That night we came to an anchor at the 				parting of the three goodly rivers (the one was the river of  				<em>Amana</em> , by which we came from the north, 				and ran athwart towards the south, the other two were of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , which crossed from the west 				and ran to the sea towards the east) and landed upon a fair sand, where we 				found thousands of tortugas&#8217; eggs, which are very wholesome meat, and greatly 				restoring; so as our men were now well filled and highly contented both with 				the fare, and nearness of the land of  				<em>Guiana</em> , which appeared in sight.<span class="numbering-line">50.</span><br />
In the morning there came down, according to promise, the 				lord of that border, called  				<em>Toparimaca</em> , with some thirty or forty 				followers, and brought us divers sorts of fruits, and of his wine, bread, fish, 				and flesh, whom we also feasted as we could; at least we drank good Spanish 				wine, whereof we had a small quantity in bottles, which above all things they 				love. I conferred with this  				<em>Toparimaca</em> of the next way to  				<em>Guiana</em> , who conducted our galley and 				boats to his own port, and carried us from thence some mile and a-half to his 				town; where some of our captains garoused of his wine till they were reasonable 				pleasant, for it is very strong with pepper, and the juice of divers herbs and 				fruits digested and purged. They keep it in great earthen pots of ten or twelve 				gallons, very clean and sweet, and are themselves at their meetings and feasts 				the greatest carousers and drunkards of the world. When we came to his town we 				found two cacique, whereof one was a 				stranger that had been up the river in trade, and his boats, people, and wife 				encamped at the port where we anchored; and the other was of that country, a 				follower of  				<em>Toparimaca</em> . They lay each of them in a 				cotton <em>hamaca</em>, which we call  				<em>Brazil</em> beds, and two women attending 				them with six cups, and a little ladle to fill them out of an earthen pitcher 				of wine; and so they drank each of them three of those cups at a time one to 				the other, and in this sort they drink drunk at their feasts and meetings.<span class="numbering-line">51.</span><br />
That caciquethat was a 				stranger had his wife staying at the port where we anchored, and in all my life 				I have seldom seen a better favoured woman. She was of good stature, with black 				eyes, fat of body, of an excellent countenance, her hair almost as long as 				herself, tied up again in pretty knots; and it seemed she stood not in that awe 				of her husband as the rest, for she spake and discoursed, and drank among the 				gentlemen and captains, and was very pleasant, knowing her own comeliness, and 				taking great pride therein. I have seen a lady in  				<em>England</em> so like to her, as but for the 				difference of colour, I would have sworn might have been the same.<span class="numbering-line">52.</span><br />
The seat of this town of  				<em>Toparimaca</em> was very pleasant, standing 				on a little hill, in an excellent prospect, with goodly gardens a mile compass 				round about it, and two very fair and large ponds of excellent fish adjoining. 				This town is called  				Arowocai ; the people are of the 				nation called  				Nepoios , and are followers of  				<em>Carapana</em> . In that place I saw very aged 				people, that we might perceive all their sinews and veins without any flesh, 				and but even as a case covered only with skin. The lord of this place gave me 				an old man for pilot, who was of great experience and travel, and knew the 				river most perfectly both by day and night. And it shall be requisite for any 				man that passeth it to have such a pilot; for it is four, five, and six miles 				over in many places, and twenty miles in other places, with wonderful eddies 				and strong currents, many great islands, and divers shoals, and many dangerous 				rocks; and besides upon any increase of wind so great a billow, as we were 				sometimes in great peril of drowning in the galley, for the small boats durst 				not come from the shore but when it was very fair.<span class="numbering-line">53.</span><br />
The next day we hasted thence, and having an easterly wind 				to help us, we spared our arms from rowing; for after we entered  				<em>Orenoque</em> , the river lieth for the most 				part east and west, even from the sea unto  				<em>Quito</em> , in  				<em>Peru</em> . This river is navigable with barks 				little less than 1000 miles; and from the place where we entered it may be 				sailed up in small pinnaces to many of the best parts of  				<em>Nuevo Reyno de Granada</em> and of  				<em>Popayan</em> . And from no place may the 				cities of these parts of the  				<em>Indies</em> be so easily taken and invaded as 				from hence. All that day we sailed up a branch of that river, having on the 				left hand a great island, which they call Assapana, which may contain some 				five-and-twenty miles in length, and six miles in breadth, the great body of 				the river running on the other side of this island. Beyond that middle branch 				there is also another island in the river, called Iwana, which is twice as big 				as the Isle of  				<em>Wight</em> ; and beyond it, and between it and 				the main of  				<em>Guiana</em> , runneth a third branch of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , called  				<em>Arraroopana</em> . All three are goodly 				branches, and all navigable for great ships. I judge the river in this place to 				be at least thirty miles broad, reckoning the islands which divide the branches 				in it, for afterwards I sought also both the other branches. <span class="numbering-line">54.</span><br />
After we reached to the head of the island called  				<em>Assapana</em> , a little to the westward on 				the right hand there opened a river which came from the north, called Europa, 				and fell into the great river; and beyond it on the same side we anchored for 				that night by another island, six miles long and two miles broad, which they 				call  				<em>Ocaywita</em> . From hence, in the morning, we 				landed two  				<em>Guianians</em> , which we found in the town of 				 				<em>Toparimaca</em> , that came with us; who went 				to give notice of our coming to the lord of that country, called  				<em>Putyma</em> , a follower of  				<em>Topiawari</em> , chief lord of  				<em>Aromaia</em> , who succeeded  				<em>Morequito</em> , whom (as you have heard 				before)  				<em>Berreo</em> put to death. But his town being 				far within the land, he came not unto us that day; so as we anchored again that 				night near the banks of another land, of bigness much like the other, which 				they call  				<em>Putapayma</em> , over against which island, on 				the main land, was a very high mountain called  				<em>Oecope</em> . We coveted to anchor rather by 				these islands in the river than by the main, because of the 				<em>tortugas</em>&#8216; eggs, which our people found on them 				in great abundance; and also because the ground served better for us to cast 				uur nets for fish, the main banks being for the most part stony and high and 				the rocks of a blue,  				<em>Meta</em> lline colour, like unto the best 				steel ore, which I assuredly take it to be. Of the same blue stone are also 				divers great mountains which border this river in many places. <span class="numbering-line">55.</span><br />
The next morning, towards nine of the clock, we weighed 				anchor; and the breeze increasing, we sailed always west up the river, and, 				after a while, opening the land on the right side, the country appeared to be 				champaign and the banks shewed very perfect red. I therefore sent two of the 				little barges with Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> , and with him Captain  				<em>Thyn</em> , Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> , my cousin  				<em>Greenvile</em> , my nephew  				<em>John Gilbert</em> , Captain  				<em>Eynos</em> , Master  				<em>Edward Porter</em> , and my cousin  				<em>Butshead Gorges</em> , with some few soldiers, 				to march over the banks of that red land and to discover what manner of country 				it was on the other side; who at their return found it all a plain level as far 				as they went or could discern from the highest tree they could get upon. And my 				old pilot, a man of great travel, brother to the cacique  				<em>Toparimaca</em> , told me that those were 				called the plains of the  				<em>Sayma</em> , and that the same level reached 				to  				<em>Cumaná</em> and  				<em>Caracas</em> , in the  				<em>West Indies</em> , which are a hundred and 				twenty leagues to the north, and that there inhabited four principal nations. 				The first were the  				<em>Sayma</em> , the next  				<em>Assawai</em> , the third and greatest the  				<em>Wikiri</em> , by whom  				<em>Pedro Hernandez de Serpa</em> , before 				mentioned, was overthrown as he passed with 300 horse from  				<em>Cumaná</em> towards  				<em>Orenoque</em> in his enterprise of  				<em>Guiana</em> . The fourth are called  				<em>Aroras</em> , and are as black as negroes, but 				have smooth hair; and these are very valiant, or rather desperate, people, and 				have the most strong poison on their arrows, and most dangerous, of all 				nations, of which I will speak somewhat, being a digression not unnecessary. 				<span class="numbering-line">56.</span><br />
There was nothing whereof I was more curious than to find 				out the true remedies of these poisoned arrows. For besides the mortality of 				the wound they make, the party shot endureth the most insufferable torment in 				the world, and abideth a most ugly and lamentable death, sometimes dying stark 				mad, sometimes their bowels breaking out of their bellies; which are presently 				discoloured as black as pitch, and so unsavory as no man can endure to cure or 				to attend them. And it is more strange to know that in all this time there was 				never Spaniard, either by gift or torment, that could attain to the true 				knowledge of the cure, although they have martyred and put to invented torture 				I know not how many of them. But everyone of these  				<em>Indians</em> know it not, no, not one among 				thousands, but their soothsayers and priests, who do conceal it, and only teach 				it but from the father to the son.<span class="numbering-line">57.</span><br />
Those medicines which are vulgar, and serve for the 				ordinary poison, are made of the juice of a root called  				<em>tupara</em> ; the same also quencheth 				marvellously the heat of burning fevers, and healeth inward wounds and broken 				veins that bleed within the body. But I was more beholding to the  				<em>Guianians</em> than any other; for  				<em>Antonio de Berreo</em> told me that he could 				never attain to the knowledge thereof, and yet they taught me the best way of 				healing as well thereof as of all other poisons. Some of the Spaniards have 				been cured in ordinary wounds of the common poisoned arrows with the juice of 				garlic. But this is a general rule for all men that shall hereafter travel the  				<em>Indies</em> where poisoned arrows are used, 				that they must abstain from drink. For if they take any liquor into their body, 				as they shall be marvellously provoked thereunto by drought, I say, if they 				drink before the wound be dressed, or soon upon it, there is no way with them 				but present death.<span class="numbering-line">58.</span><br />
And so I will return again to our journey, which for this 				third day we finished, and cast anchor again near the continent on the left 				hand between two mountains, the one called  				<em>Aroami</em> and the other  				<em>Aio</em> . I made no stay here but till 				midnight; for I feared hourly lest any rain should fall, and then it had been 				impossible to have gone any further up, notwithstanding that there is every day 				a very strong breeze and easterly wind. I deferred the search of the country on 				 				<em>Guiana</em> side till my return down the 				river.<span class="numbering-line">59.</span><br />
The next day we sailed by a great island in the middle of 				the river, called  				<em>Manoripano</em> ; and, as we walked awhile on 				the island, while the galley got ahead of us, there came for us from the main a 				small  				<em>canoa</em> with seven or eight  				<em>Guianians</em> , to invite us to anchor at 				their port, but I deferred till my return. It was that caciqueto whom those  				<em>Nepoios</em> went, which came with us from 				the town of  				<em>Toparimaca</em> . And so the fifth day we 				reached as high up as the province of  				<em>Aromaia</em> , the country of  				<em>Morequito</em> , whom  				<em>Berreo</em> executed, and anchored to the 				west of an island called  				<em>Murrecotima</em> , ten miles long and five 				broad. And that night the cacique  				<em>Aramiary</em> , to whose town we made our long 				and hungry voyage out of the river of  				<em>Amana</em> , passed by us.<span class="numbering-line">60.</span><br />
The next day we arrived at the port of  				<em>Morequito</em> , and anchored there, sending 				away one of our pilots to seek the king of  				<em>Aromaia</em> , uncle to  				<em>Morequito</em> , slain by  				<em>Berreo</em> as aforesaid. The next day 				following, before noon, he came to us on foot from his house, which was 				fourteen English miles, himself being a hundred and ten years old, and returned 				on foot the same day; and with him many of the borderers, with many women and 				children, that came to wonder at our nation and to bring us down victual, which 				they did in great plenty, as venison, pork, hens, chickens, fowl, fish, with 				divers sorts of excellent fruits and roots, and great abundance of 				pinas, the princess of fruits that grow 				under the sun, especially those of  				<em>Guiana</em> . They brought us, also, store of 				bread and of their wine, and a sort of paraquitos no bigger than wrens, and of 				all other sorts both small and great. One of them gave me a beast called by the 				Spaniards armadillo, which they call 				cassacam, which seemeth to be all barred 				over with small plates somewhat like to a  				<em>rhinoceros</em> , with a white horn growing in 				his hinder parts as big as a great hunting-horn, which they use to wind instead 				of a trumpet.  				<em>Monardus </em> writeth that a little of the 				powder of that horn put into the ear cureth deafness.<span class="numbering-line">61.</span><br />
After this old king had rested awhile in a little tent that 				I caused to be set up, I began by my interpreter to discourse with him of the 				death of  				<em>Morequito</em> his predecessor, and afterward 				of the Spaniards; and yere I went any farther I made him know the cause of my 				coming thither, whose servant I was, and that the Queen&#8217;s pleasure was I should 				undertake the voyage for their defence, and to deliver them from the tyranny of 				the Spaniards, dilating at large, as I had done before to those of  				<em>Trinidad</em> , her Majesty&#8217;s greatness, her 				justice, her charity to all oppressed nations, with as many of the rest of her 				beauties and virtues as either I could express or they conceive. All which 				being with great admiration attentively heard and marvellously admired, I began 				to sound the old man as touching  				<em>Guiana</em> and the state thereof, what sort 				of commonwealth it was, how governed, of what strength and policy, how far it 				extended, and what nations were friends or enemies adjoining, and finally of 				the distance, and way to enter the same. He told me that himself and his 				people, with all those down the river towards the sea, as far as  				<em>Emeria</em> , the province of  				<em>Carapana</em> , were of  				<em>Guiana</em> , but that they called themselves  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> , and that all the nations 				between the river and those mountains in sight, called  				<em>Wacarima</em> , were of the same cast and 				appellation; and that on the other side of those mountains of  				<em>Wacarima</em> there was a large plain (which 				after I discovered in my return) called the valley of Amariocapana. In all that 				valley the people were also of the ancient  				<em>Guianians</em> . <span class="numbering-line">62.</span><br />
I asked what nations those were which inhabited on the 				further side of those mountains, beyond the valley of  				<em>Amariocapana</em> . He answered with a great 				sigh (as a man which had inward feeling of the loss of his country and liberty, 				especially for that his eldest son was slain in a battle on that side of the 				mountains, whom he most entirely loved) that he remembered in his father&#8217;s 				lifetime, when he was very old and himself a young man, that there came down 				into that large valley of  				<em>Guiana</em> a nation from so far off as the 				sun slept (for such were his own words), with so great a multitude as they 				could not be numbered nor resisted, and that they wore large coats, and hats of 				crimson colour, which colour he expressed by shewing a piece of red wood 				wherewith my tent was supported, and that they were called  				<em>Orejones</em> and  				<em>Epuremei</em> ; that those had slain and 				rooted out so many of the ancient people as there were leaves in the wood upon 				all the trees, and had now made themselves lords of all, even to that mountain 				foot called  				<em>Curaa</em> , saving only of two nations, the 				one called  				<em>Iwarawaqueri</em> and the other  				<em>Cassipagotos</em> ; and that in the last 				battle fought between the  				<em>Epuremei</em> and the  				<em>Iwarawaqueri</em> his eldest son was chosen 				to carry to the aid of the Iwarawaqueri a great troop of the  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> , and was there slain with 				all his people and friends, and that he had now remaining but one son; and 				farther told me that those  				<em>Epuremei</em> had built a great town called  				<em>Macureguarai</em> at the said mountain foot, 				at the beginning of the great plains of  				<em>Guiana</em> , which have no end; and that 				their houses have many rooms, one over the other, and that therein the great 				king of the  				<em>Orejones</em> and  				<em>Epuremei</em> kept three thousand men to 				defend the borders against them, and withal daily to invade and slay them; but 				that of late years, since the Christians offered to invade his territories and 				those frontiers, they were all at peace, and traded one with another, saving 				only the  				<em>Iwarawaqueri</em> and those other nations 				upon the head of the river of  				<em>Caroli</em> called  				<em>Cassipagotos</em> , which we afterwards 				discovered, each one holding the Spaniard for a common enemy. <span class="numbering-line">63.</span><br />
After he had answered thus far, he desired leave to depart, 				saying that he had far to go, that he was old and weak, and was every day 				called for by death, which was also his own phrase. I desired him to rest with 				us that night, but I could not entreat him; but he told me that at my return 				from the country above he would again come to us, and in the meantime provide 				for us the best he could, of all that his country yielded. The same night he 				returned to  				<em>Orocotona</em> , his own town; so as he went 				that day eight-and-twenty miles, the weather being very hot, the country being 				situate between four and five degrees of the equinoctial. This  				<em>Topiawari</em> is held for the proudest and 				wisest of all the  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> , and so he behaved himself 				towards me in all his answers, at my return, as I marvelled to find a man of 				that gravity and judgment and of so good discourse, that had no help of 				learning nor breed.<span class="numbering-line">64.</span><br />
The next morning we also left the port, and sailed westward 				up to the river, to view the famous river called  				<em>Caroli</em> , as well because it was 				marvellous of itself, as also for that I understood it led to the strongest 				nations of all the frontiers, that were enemies to the  				<em>Epuremei</em> , which are subjects to  				<em>Inga</em> , emperor of  				<em>Guiana</em> and  				<em>Manoa</em> . And that night we anchored at 				another island called Caiama, of some five or six miles in length; and the next 				day arrived at the mouth of  				<em>Caroli</em> . When we were short of it as low 				or further down as the port of  				<em>Morequito</em> , we heard the great roar and 				fall of the river. But when we came to enter with our barge and wherries, 				thinking to have gone up some forty miles to the nations of the  				<em>Cassipagotos</em> , we were not able with a 				barge of eight oars to row one stone&#8217;s cast in an hour; and yet the river is as 				broad as the Thames at Woolwich, and we tried both sides, and the middle, and 				every part of the river. So as we encamped upon the banks adjoining, and sent 				off our  				<em>Orenoquepone</em> which came with us from  				<em>Morequito</em> to give knowledge to the 				nations upon the river of our being there, and that we desired to see the lords 				of  				<em>Canuria</em> , which dwelt within the province 				upon that river, making them know that we were enemies to the Spaniards; for it 				was on this river side that  				<em>Morequito</em> slew the friar, and those nine 				Spaniards which came from  				<em>Manoa</em> , the city of  				<em>Inga</em> , and took from them 14,000 pesos of 				gold. So as the next day there came down a lord or cacique, called  				<em>Wanuretona</em> , with many people with him, 				and brought all store of provisions to entertain us, as the rest had done. And 				as I had before made my coming known to  				<em>Topiawari</em> , so did I acquaint this 				caciquetherewith, and how I was sent by her 				Majesty for the purpose aforesaid, and gathered also what I could of him 				touching the estate of  				<em>Guiana</em> . And I found that those also of  				<em>Caroli</em> were not only enemies to the 				Spaniards, but most of all to the  				<em>Epuremei</em> , which abound in gold. And by 				this  				<em>Wanuretona</em> I had knowledge that on the 				head of this river were three mighty nations, which were seated on a great 				lake, from whence this river descended, and were called  				<em>Cassipagotos</em> ,  				<em>Eparegotos</em> , and  				<em>Arawagotos</em> ; and that all those either 				against the Spaniards or the  				<em>Epuremei</em> would join with us, and that if 				we entered the land over the mountains of Curaa we should satisfy ourselves 				with gold and all other good things. He told us farther of a nation called  				<em>Iwarawaqueri</em> , before spoken of, that 				held daily war with the  				<em>Epuremei</em> that inhabited  				<em>Macureguarai</em> , and first civil town of  				<em>Guiana</em> , of the subjects of  				<em>Inga</em> , the emperor.<span class="numbering-line">65.</span><br />
Upon this river one Captain  				<em>George</em> , that I took with  				<em>Berreo</em> , told me that there was a great 				silver mine, and that it was near the banks of the said river. But by this time 				as well  				<em>Orenoque</em> ,  				<em>Caroli</em> , as all the rest of the rivers 				were risen four or five feet in height, so as it was not possible by the 				strength of any men, or with any boat whatsoever, to row into the river against 				the stream. I therefore sent Captain  				<em>Thyn</em> , Captain  				<em>Greenvile</em> , my nephew  				<em>John Gilbert</em> , my cousin  				<em>Butshead Gorges</em> , Captain Clarke, and 				some thirty shot more to coast the river by land, and to go to a town some 				twenty miles over the valley called  				<em>Amnatapoi</em> ; and they found guides there 				to go farther towards the mountain foot to another great town called 				Capurepana, belonging to a caciquecalled 				Haharacoa, that was a nephew to old Topiawari, king of  				<em>Aromaia</em> , our chiefest friend, because 				this town and province of  				<em>Capurepana</em> adjoined to  				<em>Macureguarai</em> , which was a frontier town 				of the empire. And the meanwhile myself with Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> , Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> , Edward  				<em>Hancock</em> , and some half-a-dozen shot 				marched overland to view the strange overfalls of the river of  				<em>Caroli</em> , which roared so far off; and 				also to see the plains adjoining, and the rest of the province of  				<em>Canuri</em> . I sent also Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> ,  				<em>William Connock</em> , and some eight shot 				with them, to see if they could find any mineral stone alongst the river&#8217;s 				side. When we were come to the tops of the first hills of the plains adjoining 				to the river, we beheld that wonderful breach of waters which ran down  				<em>Caroli</em> ; and might from that mountain see 				the river how it ran in three parts, above twenty miles off, and there appeared 				some ten or twelve overfalls in sight, every one as high over the other as a 				church tower, which fell with that fury, that the rebound of water made it seem 				as if it had been all covered over with a great shower of rain; and in some 				places we took it at the first for a smoke that had risen over some great town. 				For mine own part I was well persuaded from thence to have returned, being a 				very ill footman; but the rest were all so desirous to go near the said strange 				thunder of waters, as they drew me on by little and little, till we came into 				the next valley, where we might better discern the same. I never saw a more 				beautiful country, nor more lively prospects; hills so raised here and there 				over the valley ; the river winding into divers branches; the plains adjoining 				without bush or stubble, all fair green grass; the ground of hard sand, easy to 				march on, either for horse or foot; the deer crossing in every path; the birds 				towards the evening singing on every tree with a thousand several tunes; cranes 				and herons of white, crimson, and carnation, perching in the river&#8217;s side; the 				air fresh with a gentle easterly wind; and every stone that we stooped to take 				up promised either gold or silver by his complexion. Your Lordship shall see of 				many sorts, and I hope some of them cannot be bettered under the sun; and yet 				we had no means but with our daggers and fingers to tear them out here and 				there, the rocks being most hard of that mineral spar aforesaid, which is like 				a flint, and is altogether as hard or harder, and besides the veins lie a 				fathom or two deep in the rocks. But we wanted all things requisite save only 				our desires and good will to have performed more if it had pleased God. To be 				short, when both our companies returned, each of them brought also several 				sorts of stones that appeared very fair, but were such as they found loose on 				the ground, and were for the most part but coloured, and had not any gold fixed 				in them. Yet such as had no judgment or experience kept all that glistered, and 				would not be persuaded but it was rich because of the lustre; and brought of 				those, and of  				<em>marcasite</em> withal, from  				<em>Trinidad</em> , and have delivered of those 				stones to be tried in many places, and have thereby bred an opinion that all 				the rest is of the same. Yet some of these stones I shewed afterward to a 				Spaniard of the  				<em>Caracas</em> , who told me that it was  				<em>El Madre del Oro</em> , that is, the mother of 				gold, and that the mine was farther in the ground. <span class="numbering-line">66.</span><br />
But it shall be found a weak policy in me, either to betray 				myself or my country with imaginations; neither am I so far in love with that 				lodging, watching, care, peril, diseases, ill savours, bad fare, and many other 				mischiefs that accompany these voyages, as to woo myself again into any of 				them, were I not assured that the sun covereth not so much riches in any part 				of the earth. Captain  				<em>Whiddon</em> , and our chirurgeon,  				<em>Nicholas Millechamp</em> , brought me a kind 				of stones like sapphires; what they may prove I know not. I shewed them to some 				of the  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> , and they promised to bring 				me to a mountain that had of them very large pieces growing diamond-wise; 				whether it be crystal of the mountain,  				<em>Bristol</em> diamond, or sapphire, I do not 				yet know, but I hope the best; sure I am that the place is as likely as those 				from whence all the rich stones are brought, and in the same height or very 				near.<span class="numbering-line">67.</span><br />
On the left hand of this river  				<em>Caroli</em> are seated those nations which I 				called  				<em>Iwarawaqueri</em> before remembered, which 				are enemies to the  				<em>Epuremei</em> ; and on the head of it, 				adjoining to the great lake  				<em>Cassipa</em> , are situated those other 				nations which also resist  				<em>Inga</em> , and the  				<em>Epuremei</em> , called  				<em>Cassipagotos</em> ,  				<em>Eparegotos</em> , and  				<em>Arawagotos</em> . I farther understood that 				this lake of  				<em>Cassipa</em> is so large, as it is above one 				day&#8217;s journey for one of their  				<em>canoas</em> , to cross, which may be some 				forty miles; and that thereinto fall divers rivers, and that great store of 				grains of gold are found in the summer time when the lake falleth by the banks, 				in those branches. <span class="numbering-line">68.</span><br />
There is also another goodly river beyond  				<em>Caroli</em> which is called Arui, which also 				runneth thorough the lake Cassipa, and falleth into  				<em>Orenoque</em> farther west, making all that 				land between  				<em>Caroli</em> and Arui an island; which is 				likewise a most beautiful country. Next unto  				<em>Arui</em> there are two rivers  				<em>Atoica</em> and  				<em>Caura</em> , and on that branch which is 				called Caura are a nation of people whose heads appear not above their 				shoulders; which though it may be thought a mere fable, yet for mine own part I 				am resolved it is true, because every child in the provinces of  				<em>Aromaia</em> and Canuri affirm the same. They 				are called Ewaipanoma; they are reported to have their eyes in their shoulders, 				and their mouths in the middle of their breasts, and that a long train of hair 				groweth backward between their shoulders. The son of Topiawari, which I brought 				with me into  				<em>England</em> , told me that they were the most 				mighty men of all the land, and use bows, arrows, and clubs thrice as big as 				any of  				<em>Guiana</em> , or of the  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> ; and that one of the  				<em>Iwarawaqueri</em> took a prisoner of them the 				year before our arrival there, and brought him into the borders of  				<em>Aromaia</em> , his father&#8217;s country. And 				farther, when I seemed to doubt of it, he told me that it was no wonder among 				them; but that they were as great a nation and as common as any other in all 				the provinces, and had of late years slain many hundreds of his father&#8217;s 				people, and of other nations their neighbours. But it was not my chance to hear 				of them till I was come away; and if I had but spoken one word of it while I 				was there I might have brought one of them with me to put the matter out of 				doubt. Such a nation was written of by  				<em>Mandeville</em> , whose reports were holden 				for fables many years; and yet since the  				<em>East Indies</em> were discovered, we find his 				relations true of such things as heretofore were held incredible. Whether it be 				true or no, the matter is not great, neither can there be any profit in the 				imagination; for mine own part I saw them not, but I am resolved that so many 				people did not all combine or forethink to make the report. <span class="numbering-line">69.</span><br />
When I came to  				<em>Cumaná</em> in the  				<em>West Indies</em> afterwards by chance I spake 				with a Spaniard dwelling not far from thence, a man of great travel. And after 				he knew that I had been in  				<em>Guiana</em> , and so far directly west as  				<em>Caroli</em> , the first question he asked me 				was, whether I had seen any of the  				<em>Ewaipanoma</em> , which are those without 				heads. Who being esteemed a most honest man of his word, and in all things 				else, told me that he had seen many of them; I may not name him, because it may 				be for his disadvantage, but he is well known to  				<em>Monsieur Moucheron</em> &#8217;s son of  				<em>London</em> , and to  				<em>Peter Moucheron</em> , merchant, of the 				Flemish ship that was there in trade; who also heard, what he avowed to be 				true, of those people. <span class="numbering-line">70.</span><br />
The fourth river to the west of  				<em>Caroli</em> is  				<em>Casnero</em> : which falleth into the  				<em>Orenoque</em> on this side of  				<em>Amapaia</em> . And that river is greater than  				<em>Danubius</em> , or any of  				<em>Europe</em> : it riseth on the south of  				<em>Guiana</em> from the mountains which divide  				<em>Guiana</em> from  				<em>Amazons</em> , and I think it to be navigable 				many hundred miles. But we had no time, means, nor season of the year, to 				search those rivers, for the causes aforesaid, the winter being come upon us; 				although the winter and summer as touching cold and heat differ not, neither do 				the trees ever sensibly lose their leaves, but have always fruit either ripe or 				green, and most of them both blossoms, leaves, ripe fruit, and green, at one 				time: but their winter only consisteth of terrible rains, and overflowing of 				the rivers, with many great storms and gusts, thunder and lightnings, of which 				we had our fill ere we returned.<span class="numbering-line">71.</span><br />
On the north side, the first river that falleth into the  				<em>Orenoque</em> is  				<em>Cari</em> . Beyond it, on the same side is the 				river of  				<em>Limo</em> . Between these two is a great 				nation of  				<em>Cannibals</em> , and their chief town beareth 				the name of the river, and is called  				<em>Acamacari</em> . At this town is a continual 				market of women for three or four hatchets apiece; they are bought by the  				<em>Arwacas</em> , and by them sold into the  				<em>West Indies</em> . To the west of  				<em>Limo</em> is the river  				<em>Pao</em> , beyond it  				<em>Caturi</em> , beyond that  				<em>Voari</em> , and  				<em>Capuri</em> , which falleth out of the great 				river of  				<em>Meta</em> , by which  				<em>Berreo</em> descended from  				<em>Nuevo Reyno de Granada</em> . To the westward 				of  				<em>Capuri</em> is the province of  				<em>Amapaia</em> , where  				<em>Berreo</em> wintered and had so many of his 				people poisoned with the tawny water of the marshes of the  				<em>Anebas</em> . Above  				<em>Amapaia</em> , toward  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> , fall in  				<em>Meto</em> ,  				<em>Pato</em> and  				<em>Cassanar</em> . To the west of those, towards 				the provinces of the  				<em>Ashaguas</em> and  				<em>Catetios</em> , are the rivers of Beta,  				<em>Dawney</em> , and  				<em>Ubarro</em> ; and toward the frontier of  				<em>Peru</em> are the provinces of  				<em>Thomebamba</em> , and  				<em>Caxamalca</em> . Adjoining to  				<em>Quito</em> in the north side of  				<em>Peru</em> are the rivers of  				<em>Guiacar</em> and Goauar; and on the other 				side of the said mountains the river of  				<em>Papamene</em> which descendeth into  				<em>Marañon</em> or  				<em>Amazons</em> , passing through the province  				<em>Motilones</em> , where  				<em>Don Pedro de Orsúa</em> , who was slain 				by the traitor  				<em>Aguirre</em> before rehearsed, built his 				brigandines, when he sought  				<em>Guiana</em> by the way of  				<em>Amazons</em> . <span class="numbering-line">72.</span><br />
Between  				<em>Dawney</em> and  				<em>Beta</em> lieth a famous island in  				<em>Orenoque</em> (now called  				<em>Baraquan</em> , for above  				<em>Meta</em> it is not known by the name of  				<em>Orenoque</em> ) which is called  				<em>Athule</em> ; beyond which ships of burden 				cannot pass by reason of a most forcible overfall, and current of water; but in 				the eddy all smaller vessels may be drawn even to  				<em>Peru</em> itself. But to speak of more of 				these rivers without the description were but tedious, and therefore I will 				leave the rest to the description. This river of  				<em>Orenoque</em> is navigable for ships little 				less than 1,000 miles, and for lesser vessels near 2,000. By it, as aforesaid,  				<em>Peru</em> ,  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> and  				<em>Popayan</em> may be invaded: it also leadeth 				to the great empire of  				<em>Inga</em> , and to the provinces of  				<em>Amapaia</em> and  				<em>Anebas</em> , which abound in gold. His 				branches of  				<em>Casnero</em> ,  				<em>Manta</em> ,  				<em>Caura</em> descend from the middle land and 				valley which lieth between the easter province of  				<em>Peru</em> and  				<em>Guiana</em> ; and it falls into the sea 				between  				<em>Marañon</em> and  				<em>Trinidad</em> in two degrees and a half. All 				of which your honours shall better perceive in the general description of  				<em>Guiana</em> ,  				<em>Peru</em> ,  				<em>Nuevo Reyno</em> , the kingdom of  				<em>Popayan</em> , and  				<em>Rodas</em> , with the province of  				<em>Venezuela</em> , to the bay of  				<em>Uraba</em> , behind  				<em>Cartagena</em> , westward, and to  				<em>Amazons</em> southward. While we lay at 				anchor on the coast of  				<em>Canuri</em> , and had taken knowledge of all 				the nations upon the head and branches of this river, and had found out so many 				several people, which were enemies to the  				<em>Epuremei</em> and the new conquerors, I 				thought it time lost to linger any longer in that place, especially for that 				the fury of  				<em>Orenoque</em> began daily to threaten us with 				dangers in our return. For no half day passed but the river began to rage and 				overflow very fearfully, and the rains came down in terrible showers, and gusts 				in great abundance; and withal our men began to cry out for want of shift, for 				no man had place to bestow any other apparel than that which he ware on his 				back, and that was throughly washed on his body for the most part ten times in 				one day; and we had now been well-near a month every day passing to the 				westward farther and farther from our ships. We therefore turned towards the 				east, and spent the rest of the time in discovering the river towards the sea, 				which we had not viewed, and which was most material.<span class="numbering-line">73.</span><br />
The next day following we left the mouth of  				<em>Caroli</em> , and arrived again at the port of 				 				<em>Morequito</em> where we were before; for 				passing down the stream we went without labour, and against the wind, little 				less than a hundred miles a day. As soon as I came to anchor, I sent away one 				for old  				<em>Topiawari</em> , with whom I much desired to 				have further conference, and also to deal with him for some one of his country 				to bring with us into  				<em>England</em> , as well to learn the language, 				as to confer withal by the way, the time being now spent of any longer stay 				there. Within three hours after my messenger came to him, he arrived also, and 				with him such a rabble of all sorts of people, and every one loaden with 				somewhat, as if it had been a great market or fair in England; and our hungry 				companies clustered thick and threefold among their baskets, every one laying 				hand on what he liked. After he had rested awhile in my tent, I shut out all 				but ourselves and my interpreter, and told him that I knew that both the  				<em>Epuremei</em> and the Spaniards were enemies 				to him, his country and nations: that the one had conquered  				<em>Guiana</em> already, and the other sought to 				regain the same from them both; and therefore I desired him to instruct me what 				he could, both of the passage into the golden parts of  				<em>Guiana</em> , and to the civil towns and 				apparelled people of  				<em>Inga</em> . He gave me an answer to this 				effect: first, that he could not perceive that I meant to go onward towards the 				city of  				<em>Manoa</em> , for neither the time of the year 				served, neither could he perceive any sufficient numbers for such an 				enterprise. And if I did, I was sure with all my company to be buried there, 				for the emperor was of that strength, as that many times so many men more were 				too few. Besides, he gave me this good counsel and advised me to hold it in 				mind (as for himself, he knew he could not live till my return), that I should 				not offer by any means hereafter to invade the strong parts of  				<em>Guiana</em> without the help of all those 				nations which were also their enemies; for that it was impossible without 				those, either to be conducted, to be victualled, or to have aught carried with 				us, our people not being able to endure the march in so great heat and travail, 				unless the borderers gave them help, to cart with them both their meat and 				furniture. For he remembered that in the plains of  				<em>Macureguarai</em> three hundred Spaniards 				were overthrown, who were tired out, and had none of the borderers to their 				friends; but meeting their enemies as they passed the frontier, were environed 				on all sides, and the people setting the long dry grass on fire, smothered 				them, so as they had no breath to fight, nor could discern their enemies for 				the great smoke. He told me further that four days&#8217; journey from his town was  				<em>Macureguarai</em> , and that those were the 				next and nearest of the subjects of  				<em>Inga</em> , and of the  				<em>Epuremei</em> , and the first town of 				apparelled and rich people; and that all those plates of gold which were 				scattered among the borderers and carried to other nations far and near, came 				from the said  				<em>Macureguarai</em> and were there made, but 				that those of the land within were far finer, and were fashioned after the 				images of men, beasts, birds, and fishes. I asked him whether he thought that 				those companies that I had there with me were sufficient to take that town or 				no; he told me that he thought they were. I then asked him whether he would 				assist me with guides, and some companies of his people to join with us; he 				answered that he would go himself with all the borderers, if the rivers did 				remain fordable, upon this condition, that I would leave with him till my 				return again fifty soldiers, which he undertook to victual. I answered that I 				had not above fifty good men in all there; the rest were labourers and rowers, 				and that I had no provision to leave with them of powder, shot, apparel, or 				aught else, and that without those things necessary for their defence, they 				should be in danger of the Spaniards in my absence, who I knew would use the 				same measures towards mine that I offered them at  				<em>Trinidad</em> . And although upon the motion 				Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> , Captain  				<em>Greenvile</em> , my nephew  				<em>John Gilbert</em> and divers others were 				desirous to stay, yet I was resolved that they must needs have perished. For  				<em>Berreo</em> expected daily a supply out of  				<em>Spain</em> , and looked also hourly for his 				son to come down from  				<em>Nuevo Reyno de Granada</em> , with many horse 				and foot, and had also in  				<em>Valencia</em> , in the  				<em>Caracas</em> , two hundred horse ready to 				march; and I could not have spared above forty, and had not any store at all of 				powder, lead, or match to have left with them, nor any other provision, either 				spade, pickaxe, or aught else to have fortified withal. <span class="numbering-line">74.</span><br />
When I had given him reason that I could not at this time 				leave him such a company, he then desired me to forbear him and his country for 				that time; for he assured me that I should be no sooner three days from the 				coast but those  				<em>Epuremei</em> would invade him, and destroy 				all the remain of his people and friends, if he should any way either guide us 				or assist us against them. He further alleged that the Spaniards sought his 				death; and as they had already murdered his nephew  				<em>Morequito</em> , lord of that province, so 				they had him seventeen days in a chain before he was king of the country, and 				led him like a dog from place to place until he had paid an hundred plates of 				gold and divers chains of spleen-stones for his ransom. And now, since he 				became owner of that province, that they had many times laid wait to take him, 				and that they would be now more vehement when they should understand of his 				conference with the English.  				<em>And because</em>, said he,  				<em>they would the better displant me, if they 				  cannot lay hands on me, they have gotten a nephew of mine called  				  Eparacano , whom they have christened  				  Don Juan , and his son  				  Don Pedro , whom they have also 				  apparelled and armed, by whom they seek to make a party against me in mine own 				  country. He also hath taken to wife one  				  Louiana , of a strong family, which are 				  borderers and neighbours; and myself now being old and in the hands of death am 				  not able to travel nor to shift as when I was of younger years</em>. He 				therefore prayed us to defer it till the next year, when he would undertake to 				draw in all the borderers to serve us, and then, also, it would be more 				seasonable to travel; for at this time of the year we should not be able to 				pass any river, the waters were and would be so grown are our return. <span class="numbering-line">75.</span><br />
He farther told me that I could not desire so much to 				invade  				<em>Macureguarai</em> and the rest of  				<em>Guiana</em> but that the borderers would be 				more vehement than I. For he yielded for a chief cause that in the wars with 				the  				<em>Epuremei</em> they were spoiled of their 				women, and that their wives and daughters were taken from them; so as for their 				own parts they desired nothing of the gold or treasure for their labours, but 				only to recover women from the  				<em>Epuremei</em> . For he farther complained very 				sadly, as it had been a matter of great consequence, that whereas they were 				wont to have ten or twelve wives, they were now enforced to content themselves 				with three or four, and that the lords of the  				<em>Epuremei</em> had fifty or a hundred. And in 				truth they war more for women than either for gold or dominion. For the lords 				of countries desire many children of their own bodies to increase their races 				and kindreds, for in those consist their greatest trust and strength. Divers of 				his followers afterwards desired me to make haste again, that they might sack 				the  				<em>Epuremei</em> , and I asked them, of what? 				They answered,  				<em>Of their women for us, and their gold for 				  you</em>. For the hope of those many of women they more desire the war than 				either for gold or for the recovery of their ancient territories. For what 				between the subjects of  				<em>Inga</em> and the Spaniards, those frontiers 				are grown thin of people; and also great numbers are fled to other nations 				farther off for fear of the Spaniards. <span class="numbering-line">76.</span><br />
After I received this answer of the old man, we fell into 				consideration whether it had been of better advice to have entered  				<em>Macureguarai</em> , and to have begun a war 				upon  				<em>Inga</em> at this time, yea, or no, if the 				time of the year and all things else had sorted. For mine own part, as we were 				not able to march it for the rivers, neither had any such strength as was 				requisite, and durst not abide the coming of the winter, or to tarry any longer 				from our ships, I thought it were evil counsel to have attempted it at that 				time, although the desire for gold will answer many objections. But it would 				have been, in mine opinion, an utter overthrow to the enterprise, if the same 				should be hereafter by her Majesty attempted. For then, whereas now they have 				heard we were enemies to the Spaniards and were sent by her Majesty to relieve 				them, they would as good cheap have joined with the Spaniards at our return, as 				to have yielded unto us, when they had proved that we came both for one errand, 				and that both sought but to sack and spoil them. But as yet our desire gold, or 				our purpose of invasion, is not known to them of the empire. And it is likely 				that if her Majesty undertake the enterprise they will rather submit themselves 				to her obedience than to the Spaniards, of whose cruelty both themselves and 				the borderers have already tasted. And therefore, till I had known her 				Majesty&#8217;s pleasure, I would rather have lost the sack of one or two towns, 				although they might have been very profitable, than to have defaced or 				endangered the future hope of so many millions, and the great good and rich 				trade which  				<em>England</em> may be possessed of thereby. I 				am assured now that they will all die, even to the last man, against the 				Spaniards in hope of our succour and return. Whereas, otherwise, if I had 				either laid hands on the borderers or ransomed the lords, as  				<em>Berreo</em> did, or invaded the subjects of  				<em>Inga</em> , I know all had been lost for 				hereafter. <span class="numbering-line">77.</span><br />
After that I had resolved  				<em>Topiawari</em> , lord of  				<em>Aromaia</em> , that I could not at this time 				leave with him the companies he desired, and that I was contented to forbear 				the enterprise against the  				<em>Epuremei</em> till the next year, he freely 				gave me his only son to take with me into  				<em>England</em> ; and hoped that though he 				himself had but a short time to live, yet that by our means his son should be 				established after his death. And I left with him one  				<em>Francis Sparrow</em> , a servant of Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> , who was desirous to tarry, and 				could describe a country with his pen, and a boy of mine called  				<em>Hugh Goodwin</em> , to learn the language. I 				after asked the manner how the  				<em>Epuremei</em> wrought those plates of gold, 				and how they could melt it out of the stone. He told me that the most of the 				gold which they made in plates and images was not severed from the stone, but 				that on the lake of  				<em>Manoa</em> , and in a multitude of other 				rivers, they gathered it in grains of perfect gold and in pieces as big as 				small stones, and they put it to a part of copper, otherwise they could not 				work it; and that they used a great earthen pot with holes round about it, and 				when they had mingled the gold and copper together they fastened canes to the 				holes, and so with the breath of men they increased the fire till the  				<em>Meta</em> l ran, and then they cast it into 				moulds of stone and clay, and so make those plates and images. I have sent your 				honours of two sorts such as I could by chance recover, more to shew the manner 				of them than for the value. For I did not in any sort make my desire of gold 				known, because I had neither time nor power to have a great quantity. I gave 				among them many more pieces of gold than I received, of the new money of twenty 				shillings with her Majesty&#8217;s picture, to wear, with promise that they would 				become her servants thenceforth. <span class="numbering-line">78.</span><br />
I have also sent your honours of the ore, whereof I know 				some is as rich as the earth yieldeth any, of which I know there is sufficient, 				if nothing else were to be hoped for. But besides that we were not able to 				tarry and search the hills, so we had neither pioneers, bars, sledges, nor 				wedges of iron to break the ground, without which there is no working in mines. 				But we saw all the hills with stones of the colour of gold and silver, and we 				tried them to be no  				<em>marcasite</em> , and therefore such as the 				Spaniards call <em>El madre del oro</em>or &#8216;the mother 				of gold,&#8217; which is an undoubted assurance of the general abundance; and myself 				saw the outside of many mines of the spar, which I know to be the same that all 				covet in this world, and of those more than I will speak of.<span class="numbering-line">79.</span><br />
Having learned what I could in Canuri and  				<em>Aromaia</em> , and received a faithful promise 				of the principallest of those provinces to become servants to her Majesty, and 				to resist the Spaniards if they made any attempt in our absence, and that they 				would draw in the nations about the lake of  				<em>Cassipa </em> and those of  				<em>Iwarawaqueri</em> , I then parted from old  				<em>Topiawari</em> , and received his son for a 				pledge between us, and left with him two of ours as aforesaid. To  				<em>Francis Sparrow</em> I gave instructions to 				travel to  				<em>Macureguarai</em> with such merchandises as I 				left with them, thereby to learn the place, and if it were possible, to go on 				to the great city of  				<em>Manoa</em> . Which being done, we weighed 				anchor and coasted the river on  				<em>Guiana</em> side, because we came upon the 				north side, by the lawns of the  				<em>Saima</em> and  				<em>Wikiri</em> . <span class="numbering-line">80.</span><br />
There came with us from  				<em>Aromaia</em> a caciquecalled  				<em>Putijma</em> , that commanded the province of  				<em>Warapana</em> , which  				<em>Putijma</em> slew the nine Spaniards upon  				<em>Caroli</em> before spoken of; who desired us 				to rest in the port of his country, promising to bring us unto a mountain 				adjoining to his town that had stones of the colour of gold, which he 				performed. And after we had rested there one night I went myself in the morning 				with most of the gentlemen of my company over-land towards the said mountain, 				marching by a river&#8217;s side called Mana, leaving on the right hand a town called 				 				<em>Tuteritona</em> , standing in the province of  				<em>Tarracoa</em> , of which  				<em>Wariaaremagoto</em> is principal. Beyond it 				lieth another town towards the south, in the valley of  				<em>Amariocapana</em> , which beareth the name of 				the said valley; whose plains stretch themselves some sixty miles in length, 				east and west, as fair ground and as beautiful fields as any man hath ever 				seen, with divers copses scattered here and there by the river&#8217;s side, and all 				as full of deer as any forest or park in  				<em>England</em> , and in every lake and river the 				like abundance of fish and fowl; of which  				<em>Irraparragota</em> is lord. <span class="numbering-line">81.</span><br />
From the river of  				<em>Mana</em> we crossed another river in the 				said beautiful valley called  				<em>Oiana</em> , and rested ourselves by a clear 				lake which lay in the middle of the said  				<em>Oiana</em> ; and one of our guides kindling us 				fire with two sticks, we stayed awhile to dry our shirts, which with the heat 				hung very wet and heavy on our shoulders. Afterwards we sought the ford to pass 				over towards the mountain called  				<em>Iconuri</em> , where  				<em>Putijma</em> foretold us of the mine. In this 				lake we saw one of the great fishes, as big as a wine pipe, which they call  				<em>manati</em> , being most excellent and 				wholesome meat. But after I perceived that to pass the said river would require 				half-a-day&#8217;s march more, I was not able myself to endure it, and therefore I 				sent Captain  				<em>Keymis</em> with six shot to go on, and gave 				him order not to return to the port of  				<em>Putijma</em> , which is called  				<em>Chiparepare</em> , but to take leisure, and to 				march down the said valley as far as a river called  				<em>Cumaca</em> , where I promised to meet him 				again,  				<em>Putijma</em> himself promising also to be his 				guide. And as they marched, they left the towns of  				<em>Emperapana</em> and  				<em>Capurepana</em> on the right hand, and 				marched from  				<em>Putijma</em> &#8217;s house, down the said valley of 				 				<em>Amariocapana</em> ; and we returning the same 				day to the river&#8217;s side, saw by the way many rocks like unto gold ore, and on 				the left hand a round mountain which consisted of mineral stone. <span class="numbering-line">82.</span><br />
From hence we rowed down the stream, coasting the province 				of  				<em>Parino</em> . As for the branches of rivers 				which I overpass in this discourse, those shall be better expressed in the 				description, with the mountains of  				<em>Aio</em> ,  				<em>Ara</em> , and the rest, which are situate in 				the provinces of  				<em>Parino</em> and  				<em>Carricurrina</em> . When we were come as far 				down as the land called  				<em>Ariacoa</em> , where  				<em>Orenoque</em> divideth itself into three 				great branches, each of them being most goodly rivers, I sent away Captain  				 				  <em>Henry Thyn</em>  , and Captain  				<em>Greenvile</em> with the galley, the nearest 				way, and took with me Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> , Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> ,  				<em>Edward Porter</em> , and Captain  				<em>Eynos</em> with mine own barge and the two 				wherries, and went down that branch of  				<em>Orenoque</em> which is called  				<em>Cararoopana</em> , which leadeth towards  				<em>Emeria</em> , the province of  				<em>Carapana</em> , and towards the east sea, as 				well to find out Captain  				<em>Keymis</em> , whom I had sent overland, as 				also to acquaint myself with  				<em>Carapana</em> , who is one of the greatest of 				all the lords of the  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> . And when I came to the 				river of  				<em>Cumaca</em> , to which  				<em>Putijma</em> promised to conduct Captain  				<em>Keymis</em> , I left Captain  				<em>Eynos</em> and Master  				<em>Porter</em> in the said river to expect his 				coming, and the rest of us rowed down the stream towards  				<em>Emeria</em> . <span class="numbering-line">83.</span><br />
In this branch called  				<em>Cararoopana</em> were also many goodly 				islands, some of six miles long, some of ten, and some of twenty. When it grew 				towards sunset, we entered a branch of a river that fell into  				<em>Orenoque</em> , called  				<em>Winicapora</em> ; where I was informed of the 				mountain of crystal, to which in truth for the length of the way, and the evil 				season of the year, I was not able to march, nor abide any longer upon the 				journey. We saw it afar off; and it appeared like a white church-tower of an 				exceeding height. There falleth over it a mighty river which toucheth no part 				of the side of the mountain, but rusheth over the top of it, and falleth to the 				ground with so terrible a noise and clamour, as if a thousand great bells were 				knocked one against another. I think there is not in the world so strange an 				overfall, nor so wonderful to behold.  				<em>Berreo</em> told me that there were diamonds 				and other precious stones on it, and that they shined very far off; but what it 				hath I know not, neither durst he or any of his men ascend to the top of the 				said mountain, those people adjoining being his enemies, as they were, and the 				way to it so impassable.<span class="numbering-line">84.</span><br />
Upon this river of  				<em>Winicapora</em> we rested a while, and from 				thence marched into the country to a town called after the name of the river, 				whereof the captain was one  				<em>Timitwara</em> , who also offered to conduct 				me to the top of the said mountain called Wacarima. But when we came in first to the house of 				the said  				<em>Timitwara</em> , being upon one of their said 				feast days, we found them all as drunk as beggars, and the pots walking from 				one to another without rest. We that were weary and hot with marching were glad 				of the plenty, though a small quantity satisfied us, their drink being very 				strong and heady, and so rested ourselves awhile. After we had fed, we drew 				ourselves back to our boats upon the river, and there came to us all the lords 				of the country, with all such kind of victual as the place yielded, and with 				their delicate wine of pinas, and with abundance of hens and other provisions, 				and of those stones which we call spleen-stones. We understood by these 				chieftains of  				<em>Winicapora</em> that their lord,  				<em>Carapana</em> , was departed from  				<em>Emeria</em> , which was now in sight, and that 				he was fled to  				<em>Cairamo</em> , adjoining to the mountains of  				<em>Guiana</em> , over the valley called  				<em>Amariocapana</em> , being persuaded by those 				ten Spaniards which lay at his house that we would destroy him and his country. 				But after these caciquesof  				<em>Winicapora</em> and  				<em>Saporatona</em> his followers perceived our 				purpose, and saw that we came as enemies to the Spaniards only, and had not so 				much as harmed any of those nations, no, though we found them to be of the 				Spaniards&#8217; own servants, they assured us that  				<em>Carapana</em> would be as ready to serve us 				as any of the lords of the provinces which we had passed; and that he durst do 				no other till this day but entertain the Spaniards, his country lying so 				directly in their way, and next of all other to any entrance that should be 				made in  				<em>Guiana</em> on that side. And they further 				assured us, that it was not for fear of our coming that he was removed, but to 				be acquitted of the Spaniards or any other that should come hereafter. For the 				province of Cairoma is situate at the mountain foot, which divideth the plains 				of  				<em>Guiana</em> from the countries of the  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> ; by means whereof if any 				should come in our absence into his towns, he would slip over the mountains 				into the plains of  				<em>Guiana</em> among the  				<em> 				  <em>Epuremei</em> </em> , where the Spaniards 				durst not follow him without great force. But in mine opinion, or rather I 				assure myself, that  				<em>Carapana</em> being a notable wise and subtle 				fellow, a man of one hundred years of age and therefore of great experience, is 				removed to look on, and if he find that we return strong he will be ours; if 				not, he will excuse his departure to the Spaniards, and say it was for fear of 				our coming. <span class="numbering-line">85.</span><br />
We therefore thought it bootless to row so far down the 				stream, or to seek any farther of this old fox; and therefore from the river of 				Waricapana, which lieth at the entrance of  				<em>Emeria</em> , we returned again, and left to 				the eastward those four rivers which fall from the mountains of  				<em>Emeria</em> into  				<em>Orenoque</em> , which are Waracayari, Coirama, 				Akaniri, and Iparoma. Below those four are also these branches and mouths of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , which fall into the east sea, 				whereof the first is Araturi, the next Amacura, the third Barima, the fourth 				Wana, the fifth Morooca, the sixth Paroma, the last Wijmi. Beyond them there 				fall out of the land between  				<em>Orenoque</em> and  				<em>Amazons</em> fourteen rivers, which I forbear 				to name, inhabited by the  				<em>Arwacas</em> and  				<em>Cannibals</em> .<span class="numbering-line">86.</span><br />
It is now time to return towards the north, and we found it 				a wearisome way back from the borders of  				<em>Emeria</em> , to recover up again to the head 				of the river Carerupana, by which we descended, and where we parted from the 				galley, which I directed to take the next way to the port of  				<em>Toparimaca</em> , by which we entered first. 				<span class="numbering-line">87.</span><br />
All the night it was stormy and dark, and full of thunder 				and great showers, so as we were driven to keep close by the banks in our small 				boats, being all heartily afraid both of the billow and terrible current of the 				river. By the next morning we recovered the mouth of the river of Cumaca, where 				we left Captain Eynos and Edward Porter to attend the coming of Captain  				<em>Keymis</em> overland; but when we entered the 				same, they had heard no news of his arrival, which bred in us a great doubt 				what might become of him. I rowed up a league or two farther into the river, 				shooting off pieces all the way, that he might know of our being there; and the 				next morning we heard them answer us also with a piece. We took them aboard us, 				and took our leave of  				<em>Putijma</em> , their guide, who of all others 				most lamented our departure, and offered to send his son with us into  				<em>England</em> , if we could have stayed till he 				had sent back to his town. But our hearts were cold to behold the great rage 				and increase of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , and therefore [we] departed, 				and turned toward the west, till we had recovered the parting of the three 				branches aforesaid, that we might put down the stream after the galley. <span class="numbering-line">88.</span><br />
The next day we landed on the island of Assapano, which 				divideth the river from that branch by which we sent down to  				<em>Emeria</em> , and there feasted ourselves with 				that beast which is called armadillo, presented unto us before at Winicapora. 				And the day following, we recovered the galley at anchor at the port of  				<em>Toparimaca</em> , and the same evening 				departed with very foul weather, and terrible thunder and showers, for the 				winter was come on very far. The best was, we went no less than 100 miles a day 				down the river; but by the way we entered it was impossible to return, for that 				the river of  				<em>Amana</em> , being in the bottom of the bay of 				Guanipa, cannot be sailed back by any means, both the breeze and current of the 				sea were so forcible. And therefore we followed a branch of  				<em>Orenoque</em> called  				<em>Capuri</em> , which entered into the sea 				eastward of our ships, to the end we might bear with them before the wind; and 				it was not without need, for we had by that way as much to cross of the main 				sea, after we came to the river&#8217;s mouth, as between Gravelin and Dover, in such 				boats as your honour hath heard. <span class="numbering-line">89.</span><br />
To speak of what passed homeward were tedious, either to 				describe or name any of the rivers, islands, or villages of the Tivitivas, 				which dwell on trees; we will leave all those to the general map. And to be 				short, when we were arrived at the sea-side, then grew our greatest doubt, and 				the bitterest of all our journey forepassed; for I protest before God, that we 				were in a most desperate estate. For the same night which we anchored in the 				mouth of the river of  				<em>Capuri</em> , where it falleth into the sea, 				there arose a mighty storm, and the river&#8217;s mouth was at least a league broad, 				so as we ran before night close under the land with our small boats, and 				brought the galley as near as we could. But she had as much ado to live as 				could be, and there wanted little of her sinking, and all those in her; for 				mine own part, I confess I was very doubtful which way to take, either to go 				over in the pestered galley, there being but six foot water over the sands for 				two leagues together, and that also in the channel, and she drew five; or to 				adventure in so great a billow, and in so doubtful weather, to cross the seas 				in my barge. The longer we tarried the worse it was, and therefore I took 				Captain  				<em>Gifford</em> , Captain  				<em>Caulfield</em> , and my cousin  				<em>Greenvile</em> into my barge; and after it 				cleared up about midnight we put ourselves to God&#8217;s keeping, and thrust out 				into the sea, leaving the galley at anchor, who durst not adventure but by 				daylight. And so, being all very sober and melancholy, one faintly cheering 				another to shew courage, it pleased God that the next day about nine o&#8217;clock, 				we descried the island of  				<em>Trinidad</em> ; and steering for the nearest 				part of it, we kept the shore till we came to  				<em>Curiapan</em> , where we found our ships at 				anchor, than which there was never to us a more joyful sight. <span class="numbering-line">90.</span><br />
Now that it hath pleased God to send us safe to our ships, 				it is time to leave  				<em>Guiana</em> to the sun, whom they worship, 				and steer away towards the north. I will, therefore, in a few words finish the 				discovery thereof. Of the several nations which we found upon this discovery I 				will once again make repetition, and how they are affected. At our first 				entrance into  				<em>Amana</em> , which is one of the outlets of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , we left on the right hand of 				us in the bottom of the bay, lying directly against  				<em>Trinidad</em> , a nation of inhuman  				<em>Cannibals</em> , which inhabit the rivers of  				<em>Guanipa</em> and  				<em>Berbeese</em> . In the same bay there is also 				a third river, which is called  				<em>Areo</em> , which riseth on  				<em>Paria</em> side towards  				<em>Cumaná</em> , and that river is 				inhabited with the  				<em>Wikiri</em> , whose chief town upon the said 				river is  				<em>Sayma</em> . In this bay there are no more 				rivers but these three before rehearsed and the four branches of  				<em>Amana</em> , all which in the winter thrust so 				great abundance of water into the sea, as the same is taken up fresh two or 				three leagues from the land. In the passages towards  				<em>Guiana</em> , that is, in all those lands 				which the eight branches of  				<em>Orenoque</em> fashion into islands, there are 				but one sort of people, called  				<em>Tivitivas</em> , but of two castes, as they 				term them, the one called  				<em>Ciawani</em> , the other  				<em>Waraweeti</em> , and those war one with 				another. <span class="numbering-line">91.</span><br />
On the hithermost part of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , as at  				<em>Toparimaca</em> and  				<em>Winicapora</em> , those are of a nation called 				Nepoios, and are the followers of  				<em>Carapana</em> , lord of  				<em>Emeria</em> . Between Winicapora and the port 				of  				<em>Morequito</em> , which standeth in  				<em>Aromaia</em> , and all those in the valley of  				<em>Amariocapana</em> are called  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> , and did obey  				<em>Morequito</em> and are now followers of  				<em>Topiawari</em> . Upon the river of  				<em>Caroli</em> are the  				<em>Canuri</em> , which are governed by a woman 				who is inheritrix of that province; who came far off to see our nation, and 				asked me divers questions of her Majesty, being much delighted with the 				discourse of her Majesty&#8217;s greatness, and wondering at such reports as we truly 				made of her Highness&#8217; many virtues. And upon the head of  				<em>Caroli</em> and on the lake of  				<em>Cassipa</em> are the three strong nations of 				the  				<em>Cassipagotos</em> . Right south into the land 				are the  				<em>Capurepani</em> and  				<em>Emparepani</em> , and beyond those, adjoining 				to  				<em>Macureguarai</em> , the first city of  				<em>Inga</em> , are the Iwarawakeri. All these are 				professed enemies to the Spaniards, and to the rich  				<em>Epuremei</em> also. To the west of  				<em>Caroli</em> are divers nations of  				<em>Cannibals</em> and of those Ewaipanoma 				without heads. Directly west are the  				<em>Amapaias</em> and  				<em>Anebas</em> , which are also marvellous rich 				in gold. The rest towards  				<em>Peru</em> we will omit. On the north of  				<em>Orenoque</em> , between it and the  				<em>West Indies</em> , are the  				<em>Wikiri</em> ,  				<em>Saymi</em> , and the rest before spoken of, 				all mortal enemies to the Spaniards. On the south side of the main mouth of  				<em>Orenoque</em> are the  				<em>Arwacas</em> ; and beyond them, the  				<em>Cannibals</em> ; and to the south of them, the 				 				<em>Amazons</em> . <span class="numbering-line">92.</span><br />
To make mention of the several beasts, birds, fishes, 				fruits, flowers, gums, sweet woods, and of their several religions and customs, 				would for the first require as many volumes as those of  				<em>Gesnerus</em> , and for the next another 				bundle of Decades. The religion of the  				<em>Epuremei</em> is the same which the  				<em>Inga</em> s, emperors of  				<em>Peru</em> , used, which may be read in  				<em>Cieza</em> and other Spanish stories; how 				they believe the immortality of the soul, worship the sun, and bury with them 				alive their best beloved wives and treasure, as they likewise do in  				<em>Pegu</em> in the  				<em>East Indies</em> , and other places. The  				<em>Orenoqueponi</em> bury not their wives with 				them, but their jewels, hoping to enjoy them again. The  				<em>Arwacas</em> dry the bones of their lords, 				and their wives and friends drink them in powder. In the graves of the  				<em>Peruvians</em> the Spaniards found their 				greatest abundance of treasure. The like, also, is to be found among these 				people in every province. They have all many wives, and the lords five-fold to 				the common sort. Their wives never eat with their husbands, nor among the men, 				but serve their husbands at meals and afterwards feed by themselves. Those that 				are past their younger years make all their bread and drink, and work their 				cotton-beds, and do all else of service and labour; for the men do nothing but 				hunt, fish, play, and drink, when they are out of the wars.<span class="numbering-line">93.</span><br />
I will enter no further into discourse of their manners, 				laws, and customs. And because I have not myself seen the cities of  				<em>Inga</em> I cannot avow on my credit what I 				have heard, although it be very likely that the emperor  				<em>Inga</em> hath built and erected as 				magnificent palaces in  				<em>Guiana</em> as his ancestors did in  				<em>Peru</em> ; which were for their riches and 				rareness most marvellous, and exceeding all in  				<em>Europe</em> , and, I think, of the world,  				<em>China</em> excepted, which also the 				Spaniards, which I had, assured me to be true, as also the nations of the 				borderers, who, being but savages to those of the inland, do cause much 				treasure to be buried with them. For I was informed of one of the 				caciquesof the valley of  				<em>Amariocapana</em> which had buried with him a 				little before our arrival a chair of gold most curiously wrought, which was 				made either in  				<em>Macureguarai</em> adjoining or in  				<em>Manoa</em> . But if we should have grieved 				them in their religion at the first, before they had been taught better, and 				have digged up their graves, we had lost them all. And therefore I held my 				first resolution, that her Majesty should either accept or refuse the 				enterprise ere anything should be done that might in any sort hinder the same. 				And if  				<em>Peru</em> had so many heaps of gold, whereof 				those  				<em>Inga</em> s were princes, and that they 				delighted so much therein, no doubt but this which now liveth and reigneth in  				<em>Manoa</em> hath the same humour, and, I am 				assured, hath more abundance of gold within his territory than all  				<em>Peru</em> and the  				<em>West Indies</em> .<span class="numbering-line">94.</span><br />
For the rest, which myself have seen, I will promise these 				things that follow, which I know to be true. Those that are desirous to 				discover and to see many nations may be satisfied within this river, which 				bringeth forth so many arms and branches leading to several countries and 				provinces, above 2,000 miles east and west and 800 miles south and north, and 				of these the most either rich in gold or in other merchandises. The common 				soldier shall here fight for gold, and pay himself, instead of pence, with 				plates of half-a-foot broad, whereas he breaketh his bones in other wars for 				provant and penury. Those commanders and chieftains that shoot at honour and 				abundance shall find there more rich and beautiful cities, more temples adorned 				with golden images, more sepulchres filled with treasure, than either  				<em>Cortes</em> found in  				<em>Mexico</em> or  				<em>Pizarro</em> in  				<em>Peru</em> . And the shining glory of this 				conquest will eclipse all those so far-extended beams of the Spanish nation. 				There is no country which yieldeth more pleasure to the inhabitants, either for 				those common delights of hunting, hawking, fishing, fowling, and the rest, than 				 				<em>Guiana</em> doth; it hath so many plains, 				clear rivers, and abundance of pheasants, partridges, quails, rails, cranes, 				herons, and all other fowl; deer of all sorts, porks, hares, lions, tigers, 				leopards, and divers other sorts of beasts, either for chase or food. It hath a 				kind of beast called camaor 				anta, as big as an English beef, and in great plenty. To 				speak of the several sorts of every kind I fear would be troublesome to the 				reader, and therefore I will omit them, and conclude that both for health, good 				air, pleasure, and riches, I am resolved it cannot be equalled by any region 				either in the east or west. Moreover the country is so healthful, as of an 				hundred persons and more, which lay without shift most sluttishly, and were 				every day almost melted with heat in rowing and marching, and suddenly wet 				again with great showers, and did eat of all sorts of corrupt fruits, and made 				meals of fresh fish without seasoning, of  				<em>tortugas</em> , of  				<em>lagartos</em> or  				<em>crocodiles</em> , and of all sorts good and 				bad, without either order or measure, and besides lodged in the open air every 				night, we lost not any one, nor had one ill-disposed to my knowledge; nor found 				any calentura or other of those pestilent diseases which dwell in all hot 				regions, and so near the equinoctial line. <span class="numbering-line">95.</span><br />
Where there is store of gold it is in effect needless to 				remember other commodities for trade. But it hath, towards the south part of 				the river, great quantities of brazil-wood, and divers berries that dye a most 				perfect crimson and carnation; and for painting, all  				<em>France</em> ,  				<em>Italy</em> , or the  				<em>Eas Indies</em> yield none such. For the more 				the skin is washed, the fairer the colour appeareth, and with which even those 				brown and tawny women spot themselves and colour their cheeks. All places yield 				abundance of cotton, of silk, of  				<em>balsamum</em> , and of those kinds most 				excellent and never known in  				<em>Europe</em> ,of all sorts of gums, of Indian 				pepper; and what else the countries may afford within the land we know not, 				neither had we time to abide the trial and search. The soil besides is so 				excellent and so full of rivers, as it will carry sugar, ginger, and all those 				other commodities which the  				<em>West Indies</em> have. <span class="numbering-line">96.</span><br />
The navigation is short, for it may be sailed with an 				ordinary wind in six weeks, and in the like time back again; and by the way 				neither lee-shore, enemies&#8217; coast, rocks, nor sands. All which in the voyages 				to the  				<em>West Indies</em> and all other places we are 				subject unto; as the channel of  				<em>Bahama</em> , coming from the  				<em>West Indies</em> , cannot well be passed in 				the winter, and when it is at the best, it is a perilous and a fearful place; 				the rest of the  				<em>Indies</em> for calms and diseases very 				troublesome, and the sea about the  				<em>Bermudas</em> a hellish sea for thunder, 				lightning, and storms. <span class="numbering-line">97.</span><br />
This very year (1595) there were seventeen sail of Spanish 				ships lost in the channel of  				<em>Bahama</em> , and the great  				<em>Philip</em> , like to have sunk at the  				<em>Bermudas</em> , was put back to  				<em>St. Juan de Puerto Rico</em> ; and so it 				falleth out in that navigation every year for the most part. Which in this 				voyage are not to be feared; for the time of year to leave  				<em>England</em> is best in July, and the summer 				in  				<em>Guiana</em> is in October, November, 				December, January, February, and March, and then the ships may depart thence in 				April, and so return again into England in June. So as they shall never be 				subject to winter weather, either coming, going, or staying there: which, for 				my part, I take to be one of the greatest comforts and encouragements that can 				be thought on, having, as I have done, tasted in this voyage by the  				<em>West Indies</em> so many calms, so much heat, 				such outrageous gusts, such weather, and contrary winds.<span class="numbering-line">98.</span><br />
To conclude,  				<em>Guiana</em> is a country that hath yet her 				maidenhead, never sacked, turned, nor wrought; the face of the earth hath not 				been torn, nor the virtue and salt of the soil spent by manurance. The graves 				have not been opened for gold, the mines not broken with sledges, nor their 				images pulled down out of their temples. It hath never been entered by any army 				of strength, and never conquered or possessed by any Christian prince. It is 				besides so defensible, that if two forts be builded in one of the provinces 				which I have seen, the flood setteth in so near the bank, where the channel 				also lieth, that no ship can pass up but within a pike&#8217;s length of the 				artillery, first of the one, and afterwards of the other. Which two forts will 				be a sufficient guard both to the empire of  				<em>Inga</em> , and to an hundred other several 				kingdoms, lying within the said river, even to the city of  				<em>Quito</em> n  				<em>Peru</em> .<span class="numbering-line">99.</span><br />
There is therefore great difference between the easiness 				of the conquest of  				<em>Guiana</em> , and the defence of it being 				conquered, and the West or  				<em>East Indies</em> .  				<em>Guiana</em> hath but one entrance by the sea, 				if it hath that, for any vessels of burden. So as whosoever shall first possess 				it, it shall be found unaccessible for any enemy, except he come in wherries, 				barges, or  				<em>canoas</em> , or else in flat-bottomed boats; 				and if he do offer to enter it in that manner, the woods are so thick 200 miles 				together upon the rivers of such entrance, as a mouse cannot sit in a boat 				unhit from the bank. By land it is more impossible to approach; for it hath the 				strongest situation of any region under the sun, and it is so environed with 				impassable mountains on every side, as it is impossible to victual any company 				in the passage. Which hath been well proved by the Spanish nation, who since 				the conquest of  				<em>Peru</em> have never left five years free 				from attempting this empire, or discovering some way into it; and yet of 				three-and-twenty several gentlemen, knights, and noblemen, there was never any 				that knew which way to lead an army by land, or to conduct ships by sea, 				anything near the said country.  				<em>Orellana</em> , of whom the river of  				<em>Amazons</em> taketh name, was the first, and  				<em>Don Antonio de Berreo</em> , whom we 				displanted, the last: and I doubt much whether he himself or any of his yet 				know the best way into the said empire. It can therefore hardly be regained, if 				any strength be formerly set down, but in one or two places, and but two or 				three crumsters or galleys built and furnished upon the river within. The  				<em>West Indies</em> have many ports, watering 				places, and landings; and nearer than 300 miles to  				<em>Guiana</em> , no man can harbour a ship, 				except he know one only place, which is not learned in haste, and which I will 				undertake there is not any one of my companies that knoweth, whosoever 				hearkened most after it. <span class="numbering-line">100.</span><br />
Besides, by keeping one good fort, or building one town of 				strength, the whole empire is guarded; and whatsoever companies shall be 				afterwards planted within the land, although in twenty several provinces, those 				shall be able all to reunite themselves upon any occasion either by the way of 				one river, or be able to march by land without either wood, bog, or mountain. 				Whereas in the  				<em>West Indies</em> there are few towns or 				provinces that can succour or relieve one the other by land or sea. By land the 				countries are either desert, mountainous, or strong enemies. By sea, if any man 				invade to the eastward, those to the west cannot in many months turn against 				the breeze and eastern wind. Besides, the Spaniards are therein so dispersed as 				they are nowhere strong, but in  				<em>Nueva España</em> only; the sharp 				mountains, the thorns, and poisoned prickles, the sandy and deep ways in the 				valleys, the smothering heat and air, and want of water in other places are 				their only and best defence; which, because those nations that invade them are 				not victualled or provided to stay, neither have any place to friend adjoining, 				do serve them instead of good arms and great multitudes. <span class="numbering-line">101.</span><br />
The  				<em>West Indies</em> were first offered her 				Majesty&#8217;s grandfather by  				<em>Columbus</em> , a stranger, in whom there 				might be doubt of deceit; and besides it was then thought incredible that there 				were such and so many lands and regions never written of before. This Empire is 				made known to her Majesty by her own vassal, and by him that oweth to her more 				duty than an ordinary subject; so that it shall ill sort with the many graces 				and benefits which I have received to abuse her Highness, either with fables or 				imaginations. The country is already discovered, many nations won to her 				Majesty&#8217;s love and obedience, and those Spaniards which have latest and longest 				laboured about the conquest, beaten out, discouraged, and disgraced, which 				among these nations were thought invincible. Her Majesty may in this enterprise 				employ all those soldiers and gentlemen that are younger brethren, and all 				captains and chieftains that want employment, and the charge will be only the 				first setting out in victualling and arming them; for after the first or second 				year I doubt not but to see in  				<em>London</em> a Contractation-House of more 				receipt for  				<em>Guiana</em> than there is now in  				<em>Seville</em> for the  				<em>West Indies</em> . <span class="numbering-line">102.</span><br />
And I am resolved that if there were but a small army 				afoot in  				<em>Guiana</em> , marching towards  				<em>Manoa</em> , the chief city of  				<em>Inga</em> , he would yield to her Majesty by 				composition so many hundred thousand pounds yearly as should both defend all 				enemies abroad, and defray all expenses at home; and that he would besides pay 				a garrison of three or four thousand soldiers very royally to defend him 				against other nations. For he cannot but know how his predecessors, yea, how 				his own great uncles,  				<em>Guascar</em> and  				<em>Atabalipa</em> , sons to  				<em>Guiana</em> -Capac, emperor of  				<em>Peru</em> , were, while they contended for the 				empire, beaten out by the Spaniards, and that both of late years and ever since 				the said conquest, the Spaniards have sought the passages and entry of his 				country; and of their cruelties used to the borderers he cannot be ignorant. In 				which respects no doubt but he will be brought to tribute with great gladness; 				if not, he hath neither shot nor iron weapon in all his empire, and therefore 				may easily be conquered. <span class="numbering-line">103.</span><br />
And I further remember that  				<em>Berreo</em> confessed to me and others, which 				I protest before the Majesty of God to be true, that there was found among the 				prophecies in  				<em>Peru</em> , at such time as the empire was 				reduced to the Spanish obedience, in their chiefest temples, amongst divers 				others which foreshadowed the loss of the said empire, that from  				<em>Inglatierra</em> those  				<em>Inga</em> s should be again in time to come 				restored, and delivered from the servitude of the said conquerors. And I hope, 				as we with these few hands have displanted the first garrison, and driven them 				out of the said country, so her Majesty will give order for the rest, and 				either defend it, and hold it as tributary, or conquer and keep it as empress 				of the same. For whatsoever prince shall possess it, shall be greatest; and if 				the king of  				<em>Spain</em> enjoy it, he will become 				unresistible. Her Majesty hereby shall confirm and strengthen the opinions of 				all nations as touching her great and princely actions. And where the south 				border of  				<em>Guiana</em> reacheth to the dominion and 				empire of the  				<em>Amazons</em> , those women shall hereby hear 				the name of a virgin, which is not only able to defend her own territories and 				her neighbours, but also to invade and conquer so great empires and so far 				removed. <span class="numbering-line">104.</span><br />
To speak more at this time I fear would be but 				troublesome: I trust in God, this being true, will suffice, and that he which 				is King of all Kings, and Lord of Lords, will put it into her heart which is 				Lady of Ladies to possess it. If not, I will judge those men worthy to be kings 				thereof, that by her grace and leave will undertake it of themselves.</p>
<h4></h4>
<img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/categories/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/" /> <img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/tags/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/" /> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/gocomments/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/comments/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/godelicious/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/delicious/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/gostumble/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/stumble/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/godigg/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/digg/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/goreddit/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/reddit/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/26/" /></a> <img alt="" border="0" src="http://stats.wordpress.com/b.gif?host=earlyamericas.wordpress.com&blog=1164232&post=26&subd=earlyamericas&ref=&feed=1" /></div>]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/sir-walter-raleigh-discovery-of-the-large-rich-and-beautiful-empire-of-guiana/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
	
		<media:content url="http://1.gravatar.com/avatar/b8b55d3867d1a7e554ea70a1decf2a93?s=96&#38;d=identicon&#38;r=G" medium="image">
			<media:title type="html">jimgroom</media:title>
		</media:content>
	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Juana de Asbaje, Selected Poems</title>
		<link>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/juana-de-asbaje-selected-poems/</link>
		<comments>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/juana-de-asbaje-selected-poems/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Thu, 27 Sep 2007 02:53:05 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>jimgroom</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Juana de Asbaje]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[New Spain]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Poems]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/juana-de-asbaje-selected-poems/</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[
Also know as Juana Inés de la Cruz, preliminary biographical information here.
Selected Poems
Caprice
An Electronic Edition
 			 Juana de Asbaje 			 1651-1695
 Original Source:  		  Hispanic Anthology: Poems Translated from the Spanish by English 			 and North American Poets. Ed. Thomas Walsh. New York: G. P. Putnam&#8217;s Son, 			 1920
Copyright 2003. This text is [...]<img alt="" border="0" src="http://stats.wordpress.com/b.gif?host=earlyamericas.wordpress.com&blog=1164232&post=24&subd=earlyamericas&ref=&feed=1" />]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class='snap_preview'><br /><h3></h3>
<p>Also know as Juana Inés de la Cruz, preliminary biographical information <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sor_Juana_In%C3%A9s_de_la_Cruz">here</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Selected Poems</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Caprice</em></strong><br />
<font size="-1">An Electronic Edition</font></p>
<h4> 			 Juana de Asbaje 			 1651-1695</h4>
<p><font size="-1"> Original Source:  		  Hispanic Anthology: Poems Translated from the Spanish by English 			 and North American Poets. Ed. Thomas Walsh. New York: G. P. Putnam&#8217;s Son, 			 1920</font></p>
<p><font size="-1">Copyright 2003. This text is freely available provided the text is 				distributed with the header information provided.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1"><a href="//"> Full Colophon Information</a></font></p>
<hr width="50%" /> 		Caprice  Who thankless flees me, I with love pursue, <span class="numbering-line">1.  </span><br />
Who loving follows me, I thankless flee;<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
To him who spurns my love I bend the knee, <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
His love who seeks me, cold I bid him rue;<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
I find as diamond him I yearning woo, <span class="numbering-line">5.  </span><br />
Myself a diamond when he yearns for me; <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Who slays my love I would victorious see, <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
While slaying him who wills me blisses true.<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
To favor this one is to lose desire, <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
To crave that one, my virgin pride to tame; <span class="numbering-line">10.  </span><br />
On either hand I face a prospect dire, <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Whatever path I tread, the goal the same: <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
To be adored by him of whom I tire, <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Or else by him who scorns me brought to shame. <span class="numbering-line">        </span>Trans. Peter H. Goldsmith</p>
<h3></h3>
<p><strong><em>Lost Love</em></strong><br />
<font size="-1">An Electronic Edition</font></p>
<h4> 			 Juana de Asbaje 			 1651-1695</h4>
<p><font size="-1"> Original Source:  		  Hispanic Anthology: Poems Translated from the Spanish by English 			 and North American Poets. Ed. Thomas Walsh. New York: G. P. Putnam&#8217;s Son, 			 1920</font></p>
<p><font size="-1">Copyright 2003. This text is freely available provided the text is 				distributed with the header information provided.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1"><a href="//"> Full Colophon Information</a></font></p>
<hr width="50%" /> 		The Lost Love  Ah! when shall I, my glory,<span class="numbering-line">1.  </span><br />
Discern thy light in radiance shining,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Thy presence illusory,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
To bring me sweet release from grief and pining?<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
When shall I see thine eyes, enchanting rapture,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
And yield thee mine, as tender capture?<span class="numbering-line">        </span>When will thy voice awaken<span class="numbering-line">1.  </span><br />
Mine ears with thrilling accents from their sadness,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
And I, enthralled, o&#8217;ertaken<span class="numbering-line">3.  </span><br />
By the floods of its ineffable gladness,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Be swept away in ecstasy, and after<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
The marvel wanes, hasten to thee with laughter?<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>When will thy light effulgent<span class="numbering-line">1.  </span><br />
Reclothe with roseate glamour all my being? <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
And when shall I, indulgent,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
The anguish of my sighs exhaled and fleeing,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
No more bemoan the pangs of my past sorrow?<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
When thou shalt come, and glorify the morrow!<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>Come then, my soul&#8217;s dear treasure, <span class="numbering-line">1.  </span><br />
Since fast through weariness my life is fading, <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
And absence without measure, <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Come then, lest, heeding not my soft persuading,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Thou wound my love; e&#8217;en yet, despite mine anger, <span class="numbering-line">5.  </span><br />
With tears of hope I will refresh my languor! <span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>Trans. Peter H. Goldsmith</p>
<h3><em>To her Portrait</em><br />
<font size="-1">An Electronic Edition</font></h3>
<h4> 			 Juana de Asbaje 			 1651-1695</h4>
<p><font size="-1"> Original Source:  		  Hispanic Anthology: Poems Translated from the Spanish by English 			 and North American Poets. Ed. Thomas Walsh. New York: G. P. Putnam&#8217;s Son, 			 1920</font></p>
<p><font size="-1">Copyright 2003. This text is freely available provided the text is 				distributed with the header information provided.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1"><a href="//"> Full Colophon Information</a></font></p>
<hr width="50%" />
<p align="left"><strong>To Her Portrait</strong></p>
<p>   This that you see, the false presentment planned<span class="numbering-line">1.  </span><br />
With finest art and all the colored shows<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
And reasonings of shade, doth but disclose<span class="numbering-line">3.  </span><br />
The poor deceits by earthly senses fanned!<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Here where in constant flattery expand<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Excuses for the stains that old age knows,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Pretexts against the years&#8217; advancing snows,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
The footprints of old seasons to withstand;<span class="numbering-line">8.  </span></p>
<p>&#8216;Tis but vain artifice of scheming minds;<span class="numbering-line">1.  </span><br />
&#8216;Tis but a flower fading on the winds;<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
&#8216;Tis but a useless protest against Fate;<span class="numbering-line">3.  </span><br />
&#8216;Tis but stupidity without a thought,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
A lifeless shadow, if we meditate;<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
&#8216;Tis death, tis dust, tis shadow, yea, &#8217;tis nought. <span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>(trans. Roderick Gill)</p>
<h3><em>Arraignment of Men</em><br />
<font size="-1">An Electronic Edition</font></h3>
<h4>  			 Juana de Asbaje  			 1651-1695</h4>
<p><font size="-1"> Original Source:   		  Hispanic Anthology: Poems Translated from the Spanish by English 			 and North American Poets. Ed. Thomas Walsh. New York: G. P. Putnam&#8217;s Son, 			 1920</font></p>
<p><font size="-1">Copyright 2003. This text is freely available provided the text is 				distributed with the header information provided.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1"><a href="//"> Full Colophon Information</a></font></p>
<hr width="50%" />  	 Arraignment of the Men  	   Males perverse, schooled to condemn<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Women by your witless laws,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Though forsooth you are prime cause<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Of that which you blame in them:<span class="numbering-line">        </span>If with unexampled care<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
You solicit their disdain,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Will your fair words ease their pain,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
When you ruthless set the snare?<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>Their resistance you impugn,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Then maintain with gravity<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
That it was mere levity<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Made you dare to importune.<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>What more elevating sight<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Than of man with logic crass,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Who with hot breath fogs the glass,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Then laments it is not bright!<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>Scorn and favor, favor, scorn,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
What you will, result the same,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Treat you ill, and earn your blame,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Love you well, be left forlorn.<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>Scant regard will she possess<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Who with caution wends her way,—<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Is held thankless for her “nay,”<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
And as wanton for her “yes.”<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>What must be the rare caprice<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Of the quarry you engage:<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
If she flees, she wakes your rage,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
If she yields, her charms surcease.<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>Who shall bear the heavier blame,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
When remorse the twain enthralls,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
She, who for the asking, falls,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
He who, asking, brings to shame?<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>Whose the guilt, where to begin,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Though both yield to passion&#8217;s sway,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
She who weakly sins for pay,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
He who, strong, yet pays for Sin?<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>Then why stare ye, if we prove<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
That the guilt lies at your gate?<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Either love those you create,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Or create those you can love.<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>To solicitation truce,—<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Then, sire, with some show of right<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
You may mock the hapless plight<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Or the creatures of your use!<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>—Peter H. Goldsmith (translator) <span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<h3><em>Stay shade of   my shy treasure</em><br />
<font size="-1">An Electronic Edition</font></h3>
<h4> Juana de Asbaje   1651-1695</h4>
<p><font size="-1"> Original Source: &#8220;Sor Juana Ines de la Cruz, &#8220;Sonnet&#8221; in Some Spanish-American Poets. Ed. Isaac Goldberg; trans. Alice Stone Blackwell. Philadelphia: Univ. of Pennsylvania Press, 1937.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1">Copyright 2002. This text is freely available provided the   text is distributed with the header information provided.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1"><a href="//"> Full Colophon Information</a></font></p>
<hr width="50%" /> STAY, shade of my shy treasure! STAY, shade of my shy treasure! Oh, remain, <span class="numbering-line">1.  </span><br />
Thou image of the charmer I love best<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
Fair dream, for which I die with joyful breast. <span class="numbering-line">3.  </span><br />
Illusion sweet, for which I live in pain!<span class="numbering-line">        </span>Thy winning graces all my heart enchain; <span class="numbering-line">5.  </span><br />
It follows as the steel the magnet&#8217;s test; <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
But wherefore gain my love and make me blest <span class="numbering-line">7.  </span><br />
If thou must mock me, fading soon again?<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>Yet canst thou never boast, with fullest pride, <span class="numbering-line">9.  </span><br />
Triumphant o&#8217;er me is thy tyranny;<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
For though thou from the Glose embrace dost glide <span class="numbering-line">11.  </span><br />
That held thy visionary form to me,<span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
No matter! In my arms thou wilt not bide, <span class="numbering-line">        </span><br />
But fancy builds a prison still for thee!<span class="numbering-line">        </span></p>
<p>trans. Alice Stone Blackwell</p>
<img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/categories/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/" /> <img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/tags/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/" /> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/gocomments/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/comments/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/godelicious/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/delicious/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/gostumble/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/stumble/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/godigg/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/digg/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/goreddit/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/reddit/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/24/" /></a> <img alt="" border="0" src="http://stats.wordpress.com/b.gif?host=earlyamericas.wordpress.com&blog=1164232&post=24&subd=earlyamericas&ref=&feed=1" /></div>]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/juana-de-asbaje-selected-poems/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
	
		<media:content url="http://1.gravatar.com/avatar/b8b55d3867d1a7e554ea70a1decf2a93?s=96&#38;d=identicon&#38;r=G" medium="image">
			<media:title type="html">jimgroom</media:title>
		</media:content>
	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Account of Cabeza de Vaca</title>
		<link>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/account-of-cabeza-de-vaca/</link>
		<comments>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/account-of-cabeza-de-vaca/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Thu, 27 Sep 2007 02:41:57 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>jimgroom</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Cabeza de Vaca]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Exploration & Contact to 1600]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[exploration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Spain]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/account-of-cabeza-de-vaca/</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Critical introduction by students with relevant resources, references, and links.
An Electronic Edition
 			 Álvar 				Núñez Cabeca de Vaca 			 1490-1556
 Original Source: The Journey of Álvar Núñez Cabeza de Vaca. Translated and edited by Fanny Bandelier. New York: A. S. Barnes &#38; Company, 1905.
This English translation from 1905 was copied from the  Early Americas [...]<img alt="" border="0" src="http://stats.wordpress.com/b.gif?host=earlyamericas.wordpress.com&blog=1164232&post=22&subd=earlyamericas&ref=&feed=1" />]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class='snap_preview'><br /><p><font size="-1">Critical introduction by students with relevant resources, references, and links.</font></p>
<h3><font size="-1">An Electronic Edition</font></h3>
<h4> 			 Álvar 				Núñez Cabeca de Vaca 			 1490-1556</h4>
<p><font size="-1"> Original Source: The Journey of Álvar Núñez Cabeza de Vaca. Translated and edited by Fanny Bandelier. New York: A. S. Barnes &amp; Company, 1905.<br />
This English translation from 1905 was copied from the  <a href="http://www.mith2.umd.edu/eada/" title="Early Americas Digital Archive">Early Americas Digital Archive</a>.  You can find this translation in its entirety <a href="http://www.mith2.umd.edu/eada/html/display.php?docs=cabeza_eng.xml&amp;action=show" title="Account of Cabeza de Vaca">here</a>.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1">You can also find the original work in Spanish on the Early Americas Digital Archive <a href="http://www.mith2.umd.edu/eada/html/display.php?docs=cabeza_sp.xml&amp;action=show">here</a>.<br />
</font><br />
<font size="-1"> Original Source: The Journey of Álvar Núñez Cabeza de Vaca. Translated and edited by Fanny Bandelier. New York: A. S. Barnes &amp; Company, 1905.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1">Copyright 2002. This text is freely available provided the text is 				distributed with the header information provided</font></p>
<p><font size="-1"><a href="//"> Full Colophon Information</a></font></p>
<hr width="50%" /><font size="+1"> 				<strong>The Account of Cabeza de Vaca</strong></font>ON the 27th day of the month of June, 1527, the Governor 				Panfilo de Narvaez departed from the port of San Lucar de Barrameda, with 				authority and orders from Your Majesty to conquer and govern the provinces that 				extend from the river of the Palms to the Cape of the Florida, these provinces 				being on the main land. The fleet he took along consisted of five vessels, in 				which went about 600 men. The officials he had with him (since they must be 				mentioned) were those here named: Cabeza de Vaca, treasurer and alguacil mayor; 				Alonso Enriquez, purser; Alonso de Solis, factor of Your Majesty and inspector. 				A friar of the order of Saint Francis, called Fray Juan Gutierrez, went as 				commissary, with four other monks of the order. We arrived at the Island of 				Santo Domingo, where we remained nearly forty-five days, supplying ourselves 				with necessary things, especially horses. Here more than 140 men of our army 				forsook us, who wished to remain, on account of the proposals and promises made 				them by the people of the country. From there we started and arrived at 				Santiago (a port in the Island of Cuba) where, in the few days that we remained 				the Governor supplied himself again with people, arms and horses. It happened 				there that a gentleman called Vasco Porcallo, a resident of la Trinidad (which 				is on the same island ), offered to give the Governor certain stores he had at 				a distance of 100 leagues from the said harbor of Santiago. <span class="numbering-line">1.</span><br />
The Governor, with the whole fleet, sailed for that place, 				but midways, at a port named Cape Santa Cruz, he thought best to stop and send 				a single vessel to load and bring these stores. Therefore he ordered a certain 				Captain Pantoja to go thither with his craft and directed me to accompany him 				for the sake of control, while he remained with four ships, having purchased 				one on the Island of Santo Domingo. Arrived at the port of Trinidad with these 				two vessels, Captain Pantoja went with Vasco Porcallo to the town (which is one 				league from there) in order to take possession of the supplies. I remained on 				board with the pilots, who told us that we should leave as soon as possible, 				since the harbor was very unsafe and many vessels had been lost in it. Now, 				since what happened to us there was very remarkable, it appeared to me not 				unsuitable, for the aims and ends of this, my Narrative, to tell it here. <span class="numbering-line">2.</span><br />
The next morning the weather looked ominous. It began to 				rain, and the sea toughened so that, although I allowed the men to land, when 				they saw the weather and that the town was one league away, many came back to 				the ship so as not to be out in the wet and cold. At the same time there came a 				canoe from the town conveying a letter from a person residing there, begging me 				to come, and they would give me the stores and whatever else might be 				necessary. But I excused myself, stating that I could not leave the ships. <span class="numbering-line">3.</span><br />
At noon the canoe came again with another letter, repeating 				the request with much insistency, and there was also a horse for me to go on. I 				gave the same reply as the first time, saying that I could not leave the 				vessels. But the pilots and the people begged me so much to leave and hasten 				the transportation of the stores to the ships, in order to be able to sail 				soon, from a place where they were in great fear the ships would be lost in 				case they had to remain long. So I determined upon going, although before I 				went I left the pilots well instructed and with orders in case the south wind 				(which often wrecked the shipping) should rise, and they found themselves in 				great danger, to run the vessels ashore, when men and horses might be saved. So 				I left, wishing for some of them to accompany me, but they refused, alleging 				the hard rain, the cold and that the town was far away. <span class="numbering-line">4.</span><br />
On the next day, which was Sunday, they promised to come, 				God helping, to hear mass. One hour after my departure the sea became very 				rough and the north wind blew so fiercely that neither did the boats dare to 				land, nor could they beach the vessels, since the wind was blowing from the 				shore. They spent that day and Sunday greatly distressed by two contrary storms 				and much rain, until nightfall. Then the rain and storm increased in violence 				at the village, as well as on the sea, and all the houses and the churches fell 				down, and we had to go about, seven or eight men locking Arms at a time, to 				prevent the wind from carrying us off, and under the trees it was not less 				dangerous than among the houses, for as they also were blown down we were in 				danger of being killed beneath them. In this tempest and peril we wandered 				about all night, without finding any part or place where we might feel safe for 				half an hour. <span class="numbering-line">5.</span><br />
In this plight we heard, all night long and especially after 				midnight, a great uproar, the sound of many voices, the tinkling of little 				bells, also flutes and tambourines and other instruments, the most of which 				noise lasted until morning, when the storm ceased. Never has such a fearful 				thing been witnessed in those parts. I took testimony concerning it, and sent 				it, certified, to Your Majesty. On Monday morning we went down to the harbor, 				but did not find the vessels. We saw the buoys in the water, and from this knew 				that the ships were lost. So we followed the shore, looking for wreckage, and 				not finding any turned into the forest. Walking through it we saw, a fourth of 				a league from water, the little boat of one of the vessels on the top of trees, 				and ten leagues further, on the coast, were two men of my crew and certain 				covers of boxes. The bodies were so disfigured by striking against the rocks as 				to be unrecognizable. There were also found a cape and a tattered, nothing 				else. Sixty people and twenty horses perished on the ships. Those who went on 				land the day we arrived, some thirty men, were all who survived of the crews of 				both vessels. <span class="numbering-line">6.</span><br />
We remained thus for several days in great need and 				distress, for the food and stores at the village had been ruined also, as well 				as some cattle. The country was pitiable to look at. The trees had fallen and 				the woods were blighted, and there was neither foliage nor grass. In this 				condition we were until the 5th day of the month of November, when the 				Governor, with his four vessels, arrived. They also had weathered a great storm 				and had escaped by betaking themselves to a safe place in time. The people on 				board of the ships and those he found were so terrified by what had happened 				that they were afraid to set to sea again in winter and begged the Governor to 				remain there for that season, and he, seeing their good will and that of the 				inhabitants, wintered at that place. He put into my charge the vessels and 				their crews, and I was to go with them to the port of Xagua, twelve leagues 				distant, where I remained until the 20th day of February. <span class="numbering-line">7.</span><br />
At that time the Governor came with a brig he had bought at 				Trinidad, and with him a pilot called Miruelo. That man he had taken because he 				said he knew the way and had been on the river of the Palms and was a very good 				pilot for the whole northern coast. The Governor left, on the coast of Habana, 				another vessel that he had bought there, on which there remained, as captain, 				Alvaro de Cerda, with forty people and twelve horsemen. Two days after the 				Governor arrived he went aboard. The people he took along were 400 men and 				eighty horses, on four vessels and one brigantine. The pilot we had taken ran 				the vessels aground on the sands called &#8220;of Canarreo,&#8221; so that the next day we 				were stranded and remained stranded for fifteen days, the keels often touching 				bottom. Then a storm from the south drove so much water on the shoals that we 				could get off, though not without much danger. <span class="numbering-line">8.</span><br />
Departing from there and arrived at Guaniguanico, another 				tempest came up in which we nearly perished. At Cape Corrientes we had another, 				which lasted three days. Afterward we doubled the Cape of Sant Anton and sailed 				with contrary winds as far as twelve leagues off Habana, and when, on the 				following day, we attempted to enter, a southerly storm drove us away, so that 				we crossed to the coast of Florida, sighting land on Tuesday, the 12th day of 				the month of April. We coasted the way of Florida, and on Holy Thursday cast 				anchor at the mouth of a bay, at the head of which we saw certain houses and 				habitations of Indians. <span class="numbering-line">9.</span><br />
On that same day the clerk, Alonso Enriquez, left and went 				to an island in the bay and called the Indians, who came and were with him a 				good while, and by way of exchange they gave him fish and some venison. The day 				following (which was Good Friday) the Governor disembarked, with as many men as 				his little boats would hold, and as we arrived at the huts or houses of the 				Indians we had seen, we found them abandoned and deserted, the people having 				left that same night in their canoes. One of those houses was so large that it 				could hold more than 300 people. The others were smaller, and we found a golden 				rattle among the nets. The next day the Governor hoisted flags in behalf of 				Your Majesty and took possession of the country in Your Royal name, exhibited 				his credentials, and was acknowledged as Governor according to Your Majesty&#8217;s 				commands. We likewise presented our titles to him, and he complied as they 				required. He then ordered the remainder of the men to disembark, also the 				forty-two horses left (the others having perished on account of the great 				storms and the long time they had been on sea), and these few that remained 				were so thin and weak that they could be of little use for the time. The next 				day the Indians of that village came, and, although they spoke to us, as we had 				no interpreters we did not understand them; but they made many gestures and 				threats, and it seemed as if they beckoned to us to leave the country. 				Afterward, without offering any molestation, they went away. <span class="numbering-line">10.</span><br />
After another day the Governor resolved to penetrate inland 				to explore the country and see what it contained. We went with him; the 				commissary, the inspector and myself, with forty men, among them six horsemen, 				who seemed likely to be of but little use. We took the direction of the north, 				and at the hour of vespers reached a very large bay, which appeared to sweep 				far inland. After remaining there that night and the next day, we returned to 				the place where the vessels and the men were. The Governor ordered the 				brigantine to coast towards Florida in search of the port which Miruelo, the 				pilot, had said he knew, but he had missed it and did not know where we were, 				nor where the port was. So word was sent to the brigantine, in case it were not 				found to cross over to Habana in quest of the vessel of Alvaro de la Cerda, 				and, after taking in some supplies, to come after us again. <span class="numbering-line">11.</span><br />
After the brigantine left we again penetrated inland, the 				same persons as before, with some more men. We followed the shore of the bay, 				and, after a march of four leagues, captured four Indians, to whom we showed 				maize in order to find out if they knew it, for until then we had seen no trace 				of it. They told us that they would take us to a place where there was maize 				and they led us to their village, at the end of the bay nearby, and there they 				showed us some that was not yet fit to be gathered. There we found many boxes 				for merchandise from Castilla. In every one of them was a corpse covered with 				painted deer hides. The commissary thought this to be some idolatrous practice, 				so he burnt the boxes with the corpses. We also found pieces of linen and 				cloth, and feather head dresses that seemed to be from New Spain, and samples 				of gold. <span class="numbering-line">12.</span><br />
We inquired of the Indians (by signs) whence they had 				obtained these things and they gave us to understand that, very far from there, 				was a province called Apalachen in which there was much gold. They also 				signified to us that in that province we would find everything we held in 				esteem. They said that in Apalachen there was plenty. <span class="numbering-line">13.</span><br />
So, taking them as guides, we started, and after walking 				ten or twelve leagues, came to another village of fifteen houses, where there 				was a large cultivated patch of corn nearly ready for harvest, and also some 				that was already ripe. After staying there two days, we returned to the place 				where we had left the purser, the men and the vessels, and told the purser and 				pilots what we saw and the news the Indians had given us. <span class="numbering-line">14.</span><br />
The next day, which was the 1st of May, the Governor took 				aside the commissary, the purser, the inspector, myself, a sailor called 				Bartolomé Fernandez and a notary by the name of Jeronimo de Albaniz, and told 				us that he had in mind to penetrate inland, while the vessels should follow the 				coast as far as the harbor; since the pilots said and believed that, if they 				went in the direction of the Palms they would reach it soon. On this he asked 				us to give our opinions. <span class="numbering-line">15.</span><br />
I replied that it seemed to me in no manner advisable to 				forsake the ships until they were in a safe port, held and occupied by us. I 				told him to consider that the pilots were at a loss, disagreeing among 				themselves, undecided as to what course to pursue. Moreover, the horses would 				not be with us in case we needed them, and, furthermore, we had no interpreter 				to make ourselves understood by the natives; hence we could have no parley with 				them. Neither did we know what to expect from the land we were entering, having 				no knowledge of what it was, what it might contain and by what kind of people 				it was inhabited, nor in what part of it we were; finally, that we had not the 				supplies required for penetrating into an unknown country, for of the stores 				left in the ships not more than one pound of biscuit and one of bacon could be 				given as rations to each man for the journey, so that, in my opinion, we should 				re-embark and sail in quest of a land and harbor better adapted to settlement, 				since the country which we had seen was the most deserted and the poorest ever 				found in those parts. <span class="numbering-line">16.</span><br />
The commissary was of the contrary saying, that we should 				not embark, but follow the coast in search of a harbor, as the pilots asserted 				that the way to Panuco was not more than ten or fifteen leagues distant and 				that by following along the coast it was impossible to miss it, since the coast 				bent inland for twelve leagues. The first ones who came there should wait for 				the others. As to embarking, he said it would be to tempt God, after all the 				vicissitudes of storms, losses of men and vessels and hardships we had suffered 				since leaving Spain, and until we came to that place. So his advice would be to 				move along the coast as far as the harbor, while the vessels with the other men 				would follow to the same port. <span class="numbering-line">17.</span><br />
To all the others this seemed to be the best, except to the 				notary, who said that before leaving the ships they should be put into a harbor 				well known, safe and in a settled country, after which we might go inland and 				do as we liked. <span class="numbering-line">18.</span><br />
The Governor clung to his own idea and to the suggestions 				of the others. <span class="numbering-line">19.</span><br />
Seeing his determination, I required him, on the part of 				Your Majesty, not to forsake the vessels until they were in a secure port, and 				I asked the notary present to testify to what I said. The Governor replied that 				he approved the opinion of the other officials and of the commissary; that I 				had no authority for making such demands, and he asked the notary to give him a 				certified statement as to how, there not being in the country the means for 				supporting a settlement, nor any harbor for the ships, he broke up the village 				he had founded, and went in search of the port and of a better land. So he 				forthwith ordered the people who were to go with him to get ready, providing 				themselves with what was necessary for the journey. After this he turned to me, 				and told me in the presence of all who were there that, since I so much opposed 				the expedition into the interior and was afraid of it, I should take charge of 				the vessels and men remaining, and, in case I reached the port before him, I 				should settle there. This I declined. <span class="numbering-line">20.</span><br />
After the meeting was over he, on that same evening, saying 				that it seemed to him as if he could not trust anybody, sent me word that he 				begged me to take charge of that part of the expedition, and as, in spite of 				his insistency, I declined, he asked for the reasons of my refusal, I then told 				him that I refused to accept, because I felt sure he would never see the ships 				again, or be seen by their crews any more; that, seeing how utterly unprepared 				he was for moving inland, I preferred to share the risk with him and his 				people, and suffer what they would have to suffer, rather than take charge of 				the vessels and thus give occasion for saying that I opposed the journey and 				remained out of fear, which would place my honor in jeopardy. So that I would 				much rather expose of my life than, under these circumstances, my good name. 				<span class="numbering-line">21.</span><br />
Seeing that he could not change my determination, he had 				others approach me about it with entreaties. But I gave the same answer to them 				as to him, and he finally provided for his lieutenant to take command of the 				vessels, an alcalde named Caravallo.<span class="numbering-line">22.</span><br />
On Saturday, the 1st of May, the day on which all this had 				happened, he ordered that they should give to each one of those who had to go 				with him, two pounds of ship-biscuit and one-half pound of bacon, and thus we 				set out upon our journey inland. The number of people we took along was three 				hundred, among them the commissary, Father Juan Xuarez, another friar called 				Father Juan de Palos and three priests, the officers, and forty horsemen. We 				marched for fifteen days, living on the supplies we had taken with us, without 				finding anything else to eat but palmettos like those of Andalusia. In all this 				time we did not meet a soul, nor did we see a house or village, and finally 				reached a river, which we crossed with much trouble, by swimming and on rafts. 				It took us a day to ford the river on account of the swiftness of its current. 				When we got across, there came towards us some two hundred Indians, more or 				less; the Governor went to meet them, and after he talked to them by signs they 				acted in such a manner that we were obliged to set upon them and seize five or 				six, who took us to their houses, about half a league from there, where we 				found a large quantity of corn ready for harvest. We gave infinite thanks to 				our Lord for having helped us in such great need, for, as we were not used to 				such exposures, we felt greatly exhausted, and were much weakened by hunger. 				<span class="numbering-line">23.</span><br />
On the third day that we were at this place the purser, the 				inspector, the commissary and myself jointly begged the Governor to send out in 				search of a harbor, as the Indians told us the sea was not very far away. He 				forbade us to speak of it, saying it was at a great distance, and I being the 				one who most insisted, he bade me to go on a journey of discovery and search of 				a port, and said I should go on foot with forty people. So the next day I 				started with the Captain Alonso del Castillo and forty men of his company. At 				noon we reached sandy patches that seemed to extend far inland. For about one 				and a half leagues we walked, with the water up to the knee, and stepping on 				shells that cut our feet badly. All this gave us much trouble, until we reached 				the river which we had crossed first, and which emptied through the same inlet, 				and then, as we were too ill-provided for crossing it, we turned back to camp 				and told the Governor what we had found and how it was necessary to ford the 				river again at our first crossing in order to explore the inlet thoroughly and 				find out if there was a harbor. <span class="numbering-line">24.</span><br />
The next day he sent a captain called Valenzuela with sixty 				footmen and six horsemen to cross the river and follow its course to the sea in 				search of a port. After two days he came back, reporting that he had discovered 				the inlet, which was a shallow bay, with water to the knees, but it had there 				no harbor. He saw five or six canoes crossing from one side to the other, with 				Indians who wore many feather bushes. <span class="numbering-line">25.</span><br />
Hearing this, we left the next day, always in quest of the 				province called Apalachen by the Indians, taking as guides those whom we had 				captured, and marched until the 17th of June without finding an Indian who 				would dare to wait for us. Finally there came to us a chief, whom an Indian 				carried on his shoulders. He wore a painted deerskin, and many people followed 				him, and he was preceded by many players on flutes made of reeds. He came the 				place where the Governor was and stayed an hour. We gave him to understand by 				signs that our aim was to reach Apalachen, but from his gestures it seemed to 				us that he was an enemy of the Apalachen people and that he would go and help 				us against them. We gave him beads and little bells and other trinkets, while 				he presented the Governor with the hide he wore. Then he turned back and we 				followed him. <span class="numbering-line">26.</span><br />
That night we reached a broad and deep river, the current 				of which was very strong and as we did not dare to cross it, we built a canoe 				out of rafts and were a whole day in getting across. If the Indians had wished 				to oppose us, they could have easily impeded our passage, for even with their 				help we had much trouble. One horseman, whose name was Juan Velazquez, a native 				of Cuellar, not willing to wait, rode into the stream, and the strong current 				swept him from the horse and he took hold of the reins, and was drowned with 				the animal. The Indians of that chief (whose name was Dulchanchellin) 				discovered the horse and told us that we would find him lower down the stream. 				So they went after the man, and his death caused us much grief, since until 				then we had not lost anybody. The horse made a supper for many on that night. 				Beyond there, and on the following day, we reached the chief&#8217;s village, whither 				he sent us corn. <span class="numbering-line">27.</span><br />
That same night, as they went for water, an arrow was shot 				at one of the Christians, but God willed that he was not hurt. The day after we 				left this place, without any of the natives having appeared, because all had 				fled, but further on some Indians were seen who showed signs of hostility, and 				although we called them they would neither come back nor wait, but withdrew and 				followed in our rear. The Governor placed a few horsemen in ambush near the 				trail, who as they (the Indians) passed, surprised them and took three or four 				Indians, whom we kept as guides thereafter. These led us into a country 				difficult to traverse and strange to look at, for it had very great forests, 				the trees being wonderfully tall and so many of them fallen that they 				obstructed our way so that we had to make long detours and with great trouble. 				Of the trees standing many were rent from top to bottom by thunderbolts, which 				strike very often in that country, where storms and tempests are always 				frequent. <span class="numbering-line">28.</span><br />
With such efforts we travelled until the day after St. 				John&#8217;s Day, when we came in sight of Apalachen, without having been noticed by 				the Indians of the land. We gave many thanks to God for being so near it, 				believing what we had been told about the country to be true, and that now our 				sufferings would come to an end after the long and weary march over bad trails. 				We had also suffered greatly from hunger, for, although we found corn 				occasionally, most of the time we marched seven or eight leagues without any. 				And many there were among us who besides suffering great fatigue and hunger, 				had their backs covered with wounds from the weight of the armor and other 				things they had to carry as occasion required. But to find ourselves at last 				where we wished to be and where we had been assured so much food and gold would 				be had, made us forget a great deal of our hardships and weariness. <span class="numbering-line">29.</span><br />
Once in sight of Apalachen, the Governor commanded me to 				enter the village with nine horsemen and fifty foot. So the inspector and I 				undertook this. Upon penetrating into the village we found only women and boys. 				The men were not there at the time, but soon, while we were walking about, they 				came and began to fight, shooting arrows at us. They killed the inspector&#8217;s 				horse, but finally fled and left us. We found there plenty of ripe maize ready 				to be gathered and much dry corn already housed. We also found many deer skins 				and among them mantles made of thread and of poor quality, with which the women 				cover parts of their bodies. They had many vessels for grinding maize. The 				village contained forty small and low houses, reared in sheltered places, out 				of fear of the great storms that continuously occur in the country. The 				buildings are of straw, and they are surrounded by dense timber, tall trees and 				numerous water-pools, where there were so many fallen trees and of such size as 				to greatly obstruct and impede circulation. <span class="numbering-line">30.</span><br />
The country between our landing place and the village and 				country of Apalachen is mostly level; the soil is sand and earth. All 				throughout it there are very large trees and open forests containing nut trees, 				laurels and others of the kind called resinous, cedar, juniper, wateroak, 				pines, oak and low palmetto, like those of Castilla. Everywhere there are many 				lagoons, large and small, some very difficult to cross, partly because they are 				so deep, partly because they are covered with fallen trees. Their bottom is 				sandy, and in the province of Apalachen the lagoons are much larger than those 				we found previously. There is much maize in this province and the houses are 				scattered all over the country as much as those of the Gelves. The animals we 				saw there were three kinds of deer, rabbits and hares, bears and lions and 				other wild beasts, among them one that carries its young in a pouch on its 				belly as long as the young are small, until they are able to look for their 				sustenance, and even then, when they are out after food and people come, the 				mother does not move until her little ones are in the pouch again. The country 				is very cold; it has good pasture for cattle; there are birds of many kinds in 				large numbers: geese, ducks, wild ducks, muscovy ducks, Ibis, small white 				herons (Egrets), herons and partridges. We saw many falcons, marsh-hawks, 				sparrow-hawks, pigeon-hawks and many other birds. Two hours after we arrived at 				Apalachen the Indians that had fled came back peaceably, begging us to give 				back to them their women and children, which we did. The Governor, however, 				kept with him one of their caciques, at which they became so angry as to attack 				us the following day. They did it so swiftly and with so much audacity as to 				set fire to the lodges we occupied, but when we sallied forth they fled to the 				lagoons nearby, on account of which and of the big corn patches, we could not 				do them any harm beyond killing one Indian. The day after, Indians from a 				village on the other side came and attacked us in the same manner, escaping in 				the same way, with the loss of a single man. <span class="numbering-line">31.</span><br />
We remained at this village for twenty-five days, making 				three excursions during the time. We found the country very thinly inhabited 				and difficult to march through, owing to bad places, timber and lagoons. We 				inquired of the cacique whom we had retained and of the other Indians with us 				(who were neighbors and enemies of them) about the condition and settlements of 				the land, the quality of its people, about supplies and everything else. They 				answered, each one for himself, that Apalachen was the largest town of all; 				that further in less people were met with, who were very much poorer than those 				here, and that the country was thinly settled, the inhabitants greatly 				scattered, and also that further inland big lakes, dense forests, great deserts 				and wastes were met with. <span class="numbering-line">32.</span><br />
Then we asked about the land to the south, its villages and 				resources. They said that in that direction and nine days&#8217; march towards the 				sea was a village called Aute, where the Indians had plenty of corn and also 				beans and melons, and that, being so near the sea, they obtained fish, and that 				those were their friends. Seeing how poor the country was, taking into account 				the unfavorable reports about its population and everything else, and that the 				Indians made constant war upon us, wounding men and horses whenever they went 				for water (which they could do from the lagoons where we could not reach them) 				by shooting arrows at us; that they had killed a chief of Tezcuco called Don 				Pedro, whom the commissary had taken along with him, we agreed to depart and go 				in search of the sea, and of the village of Aute, which they had mentioned. And 				so we left, arriving there five days after. The first day we travelled across 				lagoons and trails without seeing a single Indian. <span class="numbering-line">33.</span><br />
On the second day, however, we reached a lake very 				difficult to cross, the water reaching to the chest, and there were a great 				many fallen trees. Once in the middle of it, a number of Indians assailed us 				from behind trees that concealed them from our sight, while others were on 				fallen trees, and they began to shower arrows upon us, so that many men and 				horses were wounded, and before we could get out of the lagoon our guide was 				captured by them. After we had got out, they pressed us very hard, intending to 				cut us off, and it was useless to turn upon them, for they would hide in the 				lake and from there wound both men and horses. <span class="numbering-line">34.</span><br />
So the Governor ordered the horsemen to dismount and attack 				them on foot. The pursuer dismounted also, and our people attacked them. Again 				they fled to a lagoon, and we succeeded in holding the trail. In this fight 				some of our people were wounded, in spite of their good armor. There were men 				that day who swore they had seen two oak trees, each as thick as the calf of a 				leg, shot through and through by arrows, which is not surprising if we consider 				the force and dexterity with which they shoot. I myself saw an arrow that had 				penetrated the base of a poplar tree for half a foot in length. All the many 				Indians from Florida we saw were archers, and, being very tall and naked, at a 				distance they appear giants. <span class="numbering-line">35.</span><br />
Those people are wonderfully built, very gaunt and of great 				strength and agility. Their bows are as thick as an arm, from eleven to twelve 				spans long, shooting an arrow at 200 paces with unerring aim. From that 				crossing we went to another similar one, a league away, but while it was half a 				league in length it was also much more difficult. There we crossed without 				opposition, for the Indians, having spent all their arrows at the first place, 				had nothing wherewith they would dare attack us. The next day, while crossing a 				similar place, I saw the tracks of people who went ahead of us, and I notified 				the Governor, who was in the rear, so that, although the Indians turned upon 				us, as we were on our guard, they could do us no harm. Once on open ground they 				pursued us still. We attacked them twice, killing two, while they wounded me 				and two or three other Christians, and entered the forest again, where we could 				no longer injure them. <span class="numbering-line">36.</span><br />
In this manner we marched for eight days, without meeting 				any more natives, until one league from the site to which I said we were going. 				There, as we were marching along, Indians crept up unseen and fell upon our 				rear. A boy belonging to a nobleman, called Avellaneda, who was in the rear 				guard, gave the alarm. Avellaneda turned back to assist, and the Indians hit 				him with an arrow on the edge of the cuirass, piercing his neck nearly through 				and through, so that he died on the spot, and we carried him to Aute. It took 				us nine days from Apalachen to the place where we stopped. And then we found 				that all the people had left and the lodges were burnt. But there was plenty of 				maize, squash and beans, all nearly ripe and ready for harvest. We rested there 				for two days. <span class="numbering-line">37.</span><br />
After this the Governor entreated me to go in search of the 				sea, as the Indians said it was so near by, and we had, on this march, already 				suspected its proximity from a great river to which we had given the name of 				the Rio de la Magdalena. I left on the following day in search of it, 				accompanied by the commissary, the captain Castillo, Andres Dorantes, seven 				horsemen and fifty foot. We marched until sunset, reaching an inlet or arm of 				the sea, where we found plenty of oysters on which the people feasted, and we 				gave many thanks to God for bringing us there. <span class="numbering-line">38.</span><br />
The next day I sent twenty men to reconnoiter the coast and 				explore it, who returned on the day following at nightfall, saying that these 				inlets and bays were very large and went so far inland as greatly to impede our 				investigations, and that the coast was still at a great distance. Hearing this 				and considering how ill-prepared we were for the task, I returned to where the 				Governor was. We found him sick, together with many others. The night before, 				Indians had made an attack, putting them in great stress, owing to their 				enfeebled condition. The Indians had also killed one of their horses. I 				reported upon my journey and on the bad condition of the country. That day we 				remained there. <span class="numbering-line">39.</span><br />
On the next day we left Aute and marched (all day) to the 				spot I had visited on my last exploration. Our march was extremely difficult, 				for neither had we horses enough to carry the sick, nor did we know how to 				relieve them. They became worse every day, and our sufferings were afflicting. 				There it became manifest how few resources we had for going further, and even 				in case we had been provided we did not know where to go; our men were mostly 				sick and too much out of condition to be of any use whatever. I refrain from 				making a long story of it. Any one can imagine what might be experienced in a 				land so strange and so utterly without resources of any kind, either for stay 				or for an escape. Nevertheless, since the surest aid was God, Our Lord, and 				since we never doubted of it, something happened that put us in a worse plight 				yet. <span class="numbering-line">40.</span><br />
Most of the horsemen began to leave in secret, hoping thus 				to save themselves, forsaking the Governor and the sick, who were helpless. 				Still, as among them were many of good families and of rank, they would not 				suffer this to happen unbeknown to the Governor and Your Majesty&#8217;s officials, 				so that, when we remonstrated, showing at what an unseasonable time they were 				leaving their captain and the sick and, above all, forsaking Your Majesty&#8217;s 				service, they concluded to stay, and share the fate of all, without abandoning 				one another. The Governor thereupon called them to his presence all together, 				and each one in particular, asking their opinion about this dismal country, so 				as to be able to get out of it and seek relief, for in that land there was 				none.<span class="numbering-line">41.</span><br />
One-third of our people were dangerously ill, getting worse 				hourly, and we felt sure of meeting the same fate, with death as our only 				prospect, which in such a country was much worse yet. And considering these and 				many other inconveniences and that we had tried many expedients, we finally 				resorted to a very difficult one, which was to build some craft in which to 				leave the land. It seemed impossible, as none of us knew how to construct 				ships. We had no tools, no iron, no smithery, no oakum, no pitch, no tackling; 				finally, nothing of what was indispensable. Neither was there anybody to 				instruct us in shipbuilding, and, above all, there was nothing to eat, while 				the work was going on, for those who would have to perform the task. 				Considering all this, we agreed to think it over. Our parley ceased for that 				day, and everyone went off, leaving it to God, Our Lord, to put him on the 				right road according to His pleasure. <span class="numbering-line">42.</span><br />
The next day God provided that one of the men should come, 				saying that he would make wooden flues, and bellows of deerskin, and as we were 				in such a state that anything appearing like relief seemed acceptable, we told 				him to go to work, and agreed to make of our stirrups, spurs, cross-bows and 				other iron implements the nails, saws and hatchets and other tools we so 				greatly needed for our purpose. <span class="numbering-line">43.</span><br />
In order to obtain food while the work proposed was in 				progress we determined upon four successive raids into Aute, with all the 				horses and men that were fit for service, and that on every third day a horse 				should be killed and the meat distributed among those who worked at the barges 				and among the sick. The raids were executed with such people and horses as were 				able, and they brought as many as four hundred fanegas of maize, although not 				without armed opposition from the Indians. We gathered plenty of palmettos, 				using their fibre and husk, twisting and preparing it in place of oakum for the 				barges. The work on these was done by the only carpenter we had, and progressed 				so rapidly that, beginning on the fourth day of August, on the twentieth day of 				the month of September, five barges of twenty-two elbow lengths each were 				ready, caulked with palmetto oakum and tarred with pitch, which a Greek called 				Don Teodoro made from certain pines. Of the husk of palmettos, and of the tails 				and manes of the horses we made ropes and tackles, of our shirts sails, and of 				the junipers that grew there we made the oars, which we thought were necessary, 				and such was the stress in which our sins had placed us that only with very 				great trouble could we find stones for ballast and anchors of the barges, for 				we had not seen a stone in the whole country. We flayed the legs of the horses 				and tanned the skin to make leather pouches for carrying water. <span class="numbering-line">44.</span><br />
During that time some of the party went to the coves and 				inlets for sea-food, and the Indians surprised them twice, killing ten of our 				men in plain view of the camp, without our being able to prevent it. We found 				them shot through and through with arrows, for, although several wore good 				armor, it was not sufficient to protect them, since, as I said before, they 				shot their arrows with such force and precision. According to the sworn 				statements of our pilots, we had travelled from the bay, to which we gave the 				name of the Cross, to this place, two hundred and eighty leagues, more or less. 				<span class="numbering-line">45.</span><br />
In all these parts we saw no mountains nor heard of any, 				and before embarking we had lost over forty men through sickness and hunger, 				besides those killed by Indians. On the twenty-second day of the month of 				September we had eaten up all the horses but one. We embarked in the following 				order: In the barge of the Governor there were forty-nine men, and as many in 				the one entrusted to the purser and the commissary. The third barge he placed 				in charge of Captain Alonso del Castillo and of Andres Dorantes, with 				forty-eight men; in another he placed two captains, named Tellez and Penalosa, 				with forty-seven men. The last one he gave to the inspector and to me, with 				forty-nine men, and, after clothing and supplies were put on board, the sides 				of the barges only rose half a foot above the water. Besides, we were so 				crowded as to be unable to stir. So great is the power of need that it brought 				us to venture out into such a troublesome sea in this manner, and without any 				one among us having the least knowledge of the art of navigation. <span class="numbering-line">46.</span><br />
That bay from which we started is called the Bay of the 				Horses. We sailed seven days among those inlets, in the water waist deep, 				without signs of anything like the coast. At the end of this time we reached an 				island near the shore. My barge went ahead, and from it we saw five Indian 				canoes coming. The Indians abandoned them and left them in our hands, when they 				saw that we approached. The other barges went on and saw some lodges on the 				same island, where we found plenty of ruffs and their eggs, dried, and that was 				a very great relief in our needy condition. Having taken them, we went further, 				and two leagues beyond found a strait between the island and the coast, which 				strait we christened Sant Miguel, it being the day of that saint. Issuing from 				it we reached the coast, where by means of the five canoes I had taken from the 				Indians we mended somewhat the barges, making washboards and adding to them and 				raising the sides two hands above water. <span class="numbering-line">47.</span><br />
Then we set out to sea again, coasting towards the River of 				Palms. Every day our thirst and hunger increased because our supplies were 				giving out, as well as the water supply, for the pouches we had made from the 				legs of our horses soon became rotten and useless. From time to time we would 				enter some inlet or cove that reached very far inland, but we found them all 				shallow and dangerous, and so we navigated through them for thirty days, 				meeting sometimes Indians who fished and were poor and wretched people. <span class="numbering-line">48.</span><br />
At the end of these thirty days, and when we were in 				extreme need of water and hugging the coast, we heard one night a canoe 				approaching. When we saw it we stopped and waited, but it would not come to us, 				and, although we called out, it would neither turn back nor wait. It being 				night, we did not follow the canoe, but proceeded. At dawn we saw a small 				island, where we touched to search for water, but in vain, as there was none. 				While at anchor a great storm overtook us. We remained there six days without 				venturing to leave, and it being five days since we had drank anything our 				thirst was so great as to compel us to drink salt water, and several of us took 				such an excess of it that we lost suddenly five men. <span class="numbering-line">49.</span><br />
I tell this briefly, not thinking it necessary to relate in 				particular all the distress and hardships we bore. Moreover, if one takes into 				account the place we were in and the slight chances of relief he may imagine 				what we suffered. Seeing that our thirst was increasing and the water was 				killing us, while the storm did not abate, we agreed to trust to God, Our Lord, 				and rather risk the perils of the sea than wait there for certain death from 				thirst. So we left in the direction we had seen the canoe going on the night we 				came here. During this day we found ourselves often on the verge of drowning 				and so forlorn that there was none in our company who did not expect to die at 				any moment. <span class="numbering-line">50.</span><br />
It was Our Lord&#8217;s pleasure, who many a time shows His favor 				in the hour of greatest distress, that at sunset we turned a point of land and 				found there shelter and much improvement. Many canoes came and the Indians in 				them spoke to us, but turned back without waiting. They were tall and well 				built, and carried neither bows nor arrows. We followed them to their lodges, 				which were nearly along the inlet, and landed, and in front of the lodges we 				saw many jars with water, and great quantities of cooked fish. The Chief of 				that land offered all to the Governor and led him to his abode. The dwellings 				were of matting and seemed to be permanent. When we entered the home of the 				chief he gave us plenty of fish, while we gave him of our maize, which they ate 				in our presence, asking for more. So we gave more to them, and the Governor 				presented him with some trinkets. While with the cacique at his lodge, half an 				hour after sunset, the Indians suddenly fell upon us and upon our sick people 				on the beach. <span class="numbering-line">51.</span><br />
They also attacked the house of the cacique, where the 				Governor was, wounding him in the face with a stone. Those who were with him 				seized the cacique, but as his people were so near he escaped, leaving in our 				hands a robe of marten-ermine skin, which, I believe, are the finest in the 				world and give out an odor like amber and musk. A single one can be smelt so 				far off that it seems as if there were a great many. We saw more of that kind, 				but none like these. <span class="numbering-line">52.</span><br />
Those of us who were there, seeing the Governor hurt, 				placed him aboard the barge and provided that most of the men should follow him 				to the boats. Some fifty of us remained on land to face the Indians, who 				attacked thrice that night, and so furiously as to drive us back every time 				further than a stone&#8217;s throw. <span class="numbering-line">53.</span><br />
Not one of us escaped unhurt. I was wounded in the face, 				and if they had had more arrows ( for only a few were found) without any doubt 				they would have done us great harm. At the last onset the Captains Dorantes, 				Penalosa and Tellez, with fifteen men, placed themselves in ambush and attacked 				them from the rear, causing them to flee and leave us. The next morning I 				destroyed more than thirty of their canoes, which served to protect us against 				a northern wind then blowing, on account of which we had to stay there, in the 				severe cold, not venturing out to sea on account of the heavy storm. After this 				we again embarked and navigated for three days, having taken along but a small 				supply of water, the vessels we had for it being few. So we found ourselves in 				the same plight as before. <span class="numbering-line">54.</span><br />
Continuing onward, we entered a firth and there saw a canoe 				with Indians approaching. As we hailed them they came, and the Governor, whose 				barge they neared first, asked them for water. They offered to get some, 				provided we gave them something in which to carry it, and a Christian Greek, 				called Doroteo Teodoro (who has already been mentioned), said he would go with 				them. The Governor and others vainly tried to dissuade him, but he insisted 				upon going and went, taking along a negro, while the Indians left two of their 				number as hostages. At night the Indians returned and brought back our vessels, 				but without water; neither did the Christians return with them. Those that had 				remained as hostages, when their people spoke to them, attempted to throw 				themselves into the water. But our men in the barge held them back, and so the 				other Indians forsook their canoe, leaving us very despondent and sad for the 				loss of those two Christians. <span class="numbering-line">55.</span><br />
In the morning many canoes of Indians came, demanding their 				two companions, who had remained in the barge as hostages. The Governor 				answered that he would give them up, provided they returned the two Christians. 				With those people there came five or six chiefs, who seemed to us to be of 				better appearance, greater authority and manner of composure than any we had 				yet seen, although not as tall as those of whom we have before spoken. They 				wore the hair loose and very long, and were clothed in robes of marten, of the 				kind we had obtained previously, some of them done up in a very strange 				fashion, because they showed patterns of fawn-colored furs that looked very 				well. <span class="numbering-line">56.</span><br />
They entreated us to go with them, and said that they would 				give us the Christians, water and many other things, and more canoes kept 				coming towards us, trying to block the mouth of that inlet, and for this 				reason, as well as because the land appeared very dangerous to remain in, we 				took again to sea, where we stayed with them till noon. And as they would not 				return the Christians, and for that reason neither would we give up the 				Indians, they began to throw stones at us with slings, and darts, threatening 				to shoot arrows, although we did not see more than three or four bows. <span class="numbering-line">57.</span><br />
While thus engaged the wind freshened and they turned about 				and left us. We navigated that day until nightfall, when my bark, which was the 				foremost, discovered a promontory made by the coast. At the other end was a 				very large river, and at a small island on the point I anchored to wait for the 				other barges. <span class="numbering-line">58.</span><br />
The Governor did not want to touch, but entered a bay close 				by, where there were many small islands. There we got together and took fresh 				water out of the sea, because the river emptied into it like a torrent. <span class="numbering-line">59.</span><br />
For two days we had eaten the corn raw, and now, in order 				to toast it, we went ashore on that island, but not finding any firewood, 				agreed to go to the river, which was one league from there behind the point. 				However, the current was so strong that it in no way allowed us to land, but 				rather carried us away from the shore against all our efforts. The north wind 				that blew off shore freshened so much that it drove us back to the high sea, 				without our being able to do anything against it, and at about one-half league 				from shore we sounded and found no bottom even at thirty fathoms. Without being 				able to understand it, it was the current that disturbed our soundings. We 				navigated two days yet, trying hard to reach the shore. On the third day, a 				little before sunrise, we saw many columns of smoke rising on the coast. 				Working towards these, we found ourselves in three fathoms of water, but it 				being night did not dare to land because, as we had seen so much smoke, we 				believed that greater danger might be in wait for us there. We were unable to 				see, owing to the darkness, what we should do. So we determined to wait until 				morning. <span class="numbering-line">60.</span><br />
When it dawned the barges had been driven apart from each 				other. I found myself in thirty fathoms and, drifting along at the hour of 				vespers, I descried two barges, and as I approached saw that the first one was 				that of the Governor, who asked me what I thought we should do. I told him that 				we ought to rejoin the other barge, which was ahead of us, and in no manner 				forsake her, and the three together should continue our way whither God might 				take us. He replied it was impossible, since the barge was drifting far away 				into the sea, whereas he wanted to land, but that if I wished to follow I 				should put the people of my barge at the oars and work hard, as only by the 				strength of our arms the land could be reached. In this he had been advised by 				a captain he had along, whose name was Pantoja, who told him that if he did not 				land that day he would not in six days more, during which time we would of 				necessity starve. <span class="numbering-line">61.</span><br />
Seeing his determination, I took to my own oar and the 				other oarsmen in my craft did the same, and thus we rowed until nearly sunset. 				But as the Governor had with him the healthiest and strongest men, in no way 				could we follow or keep up with him. Seeing this, I asked him to give me a rope 				from his barge to be able to follow, but he answered that it was no small 				effort on their part alone to reach the shore on that night. I told him that 				since it was barely possible for us to follow and do what he had ordained, he 				should tell me what he commanded me to do. He answered that this was no time 				for orders; that each one should do the best he could to save himself; that he 				intended to do it that way, and with this he went on with his craft. <span class="numbering-line">62.</span><br />
As I could not follow him, I went after the other barge, 				which was out at sea and waited for me, and reaching it I found it was the one 				of the Captains Penalosa and Tellez. We travelled together for four days, our 				daily ration being half a handful of raw maize. At the end of these four days a 				storm overtook us, in which the other barge was lost. God&#8217;s great mercy 				preserved us from being drowned in that weather. <span class="numbering-line">63.</span><br />
It being winter and the cold very great, and as we had been 				suffering so many days from hunger and from the injuries we received from the 				waves, that the next day people began to break down, so that when the sun set 				all those aboard of my barge had fallen in a heap and were so near dying that 				few remained conscious, and not five men kept on their feet. <span class="numbering-line">64.</span><br />
When night came the skipper and I were the only ones able 				to manage the barge. Two hours after nightfall the skipper told me to steer the 				craft alone, since he felt that he would die that same night. Thereupon I stood 				at the helm, and after midnight went to see if the skipper was dead, but he 				said that, on the contrary, he felt better and would steer till daybreak. On 				that occasion I would have hailed death with delight rather than to see so many 				people around me in such a condition. After the skipper had taken the barge 				under his control I went to rest, very much without resting, for I thought of 				anything else but sleep. <span class="numbering-line">65.</span><br />
Near daybreak I fancied to hear the sound of breakers, for 				as the coast was low, their noise was greater. Surprised at it, I called to the 				skipper, who said he thought we were near the shore. Sounding, we found seven 				fathoms, and he was of the opinion that we should keep off shore till dawn. So 				I took the oar and rowed along the coast, from which we were one league away, 				and turned the stern to seaward. <span class="numbering-line">66.</span><br />
Close to shore a wave took us and hurled the barge a 				horse&#8217;s length out of water. With the violent shock nearly all the people who 				lay in the boat like dead came to themselves, and, seeing we were close to 				land, began to crawl out on all fours. As they took to some rocks, we built a 				fire and toasted some of our maize. We found rain water, and with the warmth of 				the fire people revived and began to cheer up. The day we arrived there was the 				sixth of the month of November. <span class="numbering-line">67.</span><br />
After the people had eaten I sent Lope de Oviedo, who was 				the strongest and heartiest of all, to go to some trees nearby and climb to the 				top of one, examine the surroundings and the country in which we were. He did 				so and found we were on an island, and that the ground was hollowed out, as if 				cattle had gone over it, from which it seemed to him that the land belonged to 				Christians, and so he told us. I sent him again to look and examine more 				closely if there were any worn trails, and not to go too far so as not to run 				into danger. He went, found a footpath, followed it for about one-half league, 				and saw several Indian huts which stood empty because the Indians had gone out 				into the field. <span class="numbering-line">68.</span><br />
He took away a cooking pot, a little dag and a few ruffs 				and turned back, but as he seemed to delay I sent two other Christians to look 				for him and find out what had happened. <span class="numbering-line">69.</span><br />
They met him nearby and saw that three Indians, with bows 				and arrows, were following and calling to him, while he did the same to them by 				signs. So he came to where we were, the Indians remaining behind, seated on the 				beach. Half an hour after a hundred Indian archers joined them, and our fright 				was such that, whether tall or little, it made them appear giants to us. They 				stood still close to the first ones, near where we were. <span class="numbering-line">70.</span><br />
We could not defend ourselves, as there were scarcely three 				of us who could stand on their feet. The inspector and I stepped forward and 				called them. They came, and we tried to quiet them the best we could and save 				ourselves, giving them beads and bells. Each one of them gave me an arrow in 				token of friendship, and by signs they gave us to understand that on the 				following morning they would come back with food, as then they had none. <span class="numbering-line">71.</span><br />
The next day, at sunrise, which was the hour the Indians 				had given us to understand, they came as promised and brought us plenty of fish 				and some roots which they eat that taste like nuts, some bigger, some smaller, 				most of which are taken out of the water with much trouble. <span class="numbering-line">72.</span><br />
In the evening they returned and brought us more fish and 				some of the same roots, and they brought their women and children to look at 				us. They thought themselves very rich with the little bells and beads we gave 				them, and thereafter visited us daily with the same things as before. As we saw 				ourselves provided with fish, roots, water and the other things we had asked 				for, we concluded to embark again and continue our voyage. <span class="numbering-line">73.</span><br />
We lifted the barge out of the sand into which it had sunk 				( for which purpose we all had to take off our clothes) and had great work to 				set her afloat, as our condition was such that much lighter things would have 				given us trouble. <span class="numbering-line">74.</span><br />
Then we embarked. Two crossbow shots from shore a wave 				swept over us, we all got wet, and being naked and the cold very great, the 				oars dropped out of our hands. The next wave overturned the barge. The 				inspector and two others clung to her to save themselves, but the contrary 				happened; they got underneath the barge and were drowned. <span class="numbering-line">75.</span><br />
The shore being very rough, the sea took the others and 				thrust them, half dead, on the beach of the same island again, less the three 				that had perished underneath the barge. <span class="numbering-line">76.</span><br />
The rest of us, as naked as we had been born, had lost 				everything, and while it was not worth much, to us it meant a great deal. It 				was in November, bitterly cold, and we in such a state that every bone could 				easily be counted, and we looked like death itself. Of myself I can say that 				since the month of May I had not tasted anything but toasted maize, and even 				sometimes had been obliged to eat it raw. Although the horses were killed 				during the time the barges were built, I never could eat of them, and not ten 				times did I taste fish. This I say in order to explain and that any one might 				guess how we were off. On top of all this, a north wind arose, so that we were 				nearer death than life. It pleased Our Lord that, searching for the remnants of 				our former fire, we found wood with which we built big fires and then with many 				tears begged Our Lord for mercy and forgiveness of our sins. Every one of us 				pitied not only himself, but all the others whom he saw in the same condition. 				<span class="numbering-line">77.</span><br />
At sunset the Indians, thinking we had not left, came to 				bring us food, but when they saw us in such a different attire from before and 				so strange-looking, they were so frightened as to turn back. I went to call 				them, and in great fear they came. I then gave them to understand by signs how 				we had lost a barge and three of our men had been drowned, while before them 				there lay two of our men dead, with the others about to go the same way. <span class="numbering-line">78.</span><br />
Upon seeing the disaster we had suffered, our misery and 				distress, the Indians sat down with us and all began to weep out of compassion 				for our misfortune, and for more than half an hour they wept so loud and so 				sincerely that it could be heard far away. <span class="numbering-line">79.</span><br />
Verily, to see beings so devoid of reason, untutored, so 				like unto brutes, yet so deeply moved by pity for us, it increased my feelings 				and those of others in my company for our own misfortune. When the lament was 				over, I spoke to the Christians and asked them if they would like me to beg the 				Indians to take us to their homes. Some of the men, who had been to New Spain, 				answered that it would be unwise, as, once at their abode, they might sacrifice 				us to their idols. <span class="numbering-line">80.</span><br />
Still, seeing there was no remedy and that in any other way 				death was surer and nearer, I did not mind what they said, but begged the 				Indians to take us to their dwellings, at which they showed great pleasure, 				telling us to tarry yet a little, but that they would do what we wished. Soon 				thirty of them loaded themselves with firewood and went to their lodges, which 				were far away, while we stayed with the others until it was almost dark. Then 				they took hold of us and carried us along hurriedly to where they lived. <span class="numbering-line">81.</span><br />
Against the cold, and lest on the way some one of us might 				faint or die, they had provided four or five big fires on the road, at each one 				of which they warmed us. As soon as they saw we had regained a little warmth 				and strength they would carry us to the next fire with such haste that our feet 				barely touched the ground. <span class="numbering-line">82.</span><br />
So we got to their dwellings, where we saw they had built a 				hut for us with many fires in it. About one hour after our arrival began to 				dance and to make a great celebration (which lasted the whole night), although 				there was neither pleasure, feast nor sleep in it for us, since we expected to 				be sacrificed. In the morning they again gave us fish and roots, and treated us 				so well that we became reassured, losing somewhat our apprehension of being 				butchered. <span class="numbering-line">83.</span><br />
That same day I saw on one of the Indians a trinket he had 				not gotten from us, and asking from where they had obtained it they answered, 				by signs, that other men like ourselves and who were still in our rear, had 				given it to them. Hearing this, I sent two Christians with two Indians to guide 				them to those people. Very near by they met them, and they also were looking 				for us, as the Indians had told them of our presence in the neighborhood. These 				were the Captains Andres Dorantes and Alonso del Castillo, with all of their 				crew. When they came near us they were much frightened at our appearance and 				grieved at being unable to give us anything, since they had nothing but their 				clothes. And they stayed with us there, telling how, on the fifth of that same 				month, their barge stranded a league and a half from there, and they escaped 				without anything being lost. <span class="numbering-line">84.</span><br />
All together, we agreed upon repairing their barge, and 				that those who had strength and inclination should proceed in it, while the 				others should remain until completely restored and then go as best they could 				along the coast, following it till God would be pleased to get us all together 				to a land of Christians. <span class="numbering-line">85.</span><br />
So we set to work, but ere the barge was afloat Tavera, a 				gentleman in our company, died, while the barge proved not to be seaworthy and 				soon sank. Now, being in the condition which I have stated, that is, most of us 				naked and the weather so unfavorable for walking and for swimming across rivers 				and coves, and we had neither food nor any way to carry it, we determined upon 				submitting to necessity and upon wintering there, and we also agreed that four 				men, who were the most able-bodied, should go to Panuco, which we believed to 				be nearby, and that, if it was God, Our Lord&#8217;s will to take them there, they 				should tell of our remaining on the island and of our distress. One of them was 				a Portuguese, called Alvaro Fernandez, a carpenter and sailor; the second was 				Mendez; the third, Figueroa, a native of Toledo; the fourth, Astudillo, from 				Zafra. They were all good swimmers and took with them an Indian from the 				island. <span class="numbering-line">86.</span><br />
A few days after these four Christians had left, the 				weather became so cold and tempestuous that the Indians could no longer pull 				roots, and the canebrake in which they used to fish yielded nothing more. As 				the lodges afforded so little shelter, people began to die, and five 				Christians, quartered on the coast, were driven to such an extremity that they 				ate each other up until but one remained, who being left alone, there was 				nobody to eat him. Their names are: Sierra, Diego, Lopez, Corral, Palacios and 				Gonzalo Ruiz. At this the Indians were so startled, and there was such an 				uproar among them, that I verily believe if they had seen this at the beginning 				they would have killed them, and we all would have been in great danger. After 				a very short time, out of eighty men who had come there in our two parties only 				fifteen remained alive. <span class="numbering-line">87.</span><br />
Then the natives fell sick from the stomach, so that 				one-half of them died also, and they, believing we had killed them, and holding 				it to be certain, they agreed among themselves to kill those of us who 				survived. <span class="numbering-line">88.</span><br />
But when they came to execute it an Indian who kept me told 				them not to believe we were the cause of their dying, for if we had so much 				power we would not have suffered so many of our own people to perish without 				being able to remedy it ourselves. He also told them there remained but very 				few of us, and none of them did any harm or injury, so that the best was to let 				us alone. It pleased Our Lord they should listen to his advice and counsel and 				give up their idea. <span class="numbering-line">89.</span><br />
To this island we gave the name of the Island of Ill-Fate. 				The people on it are tall and well formed; they have no other weapons than bows 				and arrows with which they are most dexterous. The men have one of their 				nipples perforated from side to side and sometimes both; through this hole is 				thrust a reed as long as two and a half hands and as thick as two fingers; they 				also have the under lip perforated and a piece of cane in it as thin as the 				half of a finger. The women do the hard work. People stay on this island from 				October till the end of February, feeding on the roots I have mentioned, taken 				from under the water in November and December. They have channels made of reeds 				and get fish only during that time; afterwards they subsist on roots. At the 				end of February they remove to other parts in search of food, because the roots 				begin to sprout and are not good any more. <span class="numbering-line">90.</span><br />
Of all the people in the world, they are those who most 				love their children and treat them best, and should the child of one of them 				happen to die, parents and relatives bewail it, and the whole settlement, the 				lament lasting a full year, day after day. Before sunrise the parents begin to 				weep, after them the tribe, and the same they do at noon and at dawn. At the 				end of the year of mourning they celebrate the anniversary and wash and cleanse 				themselves of all their paint. They mourn all their dead in this manner, old 				people excepted, to whom they do not pay any attention, saying that these have 				had their time and are no longer of any use, but only take space, and food from 				the children. <span class="numbering-line">91.</span><br />
Their custom as to bury the dead, except those who are 				medicine men among them, whom they burn, and while the fire is burning, all 				dance and make a big festival, grinding the bones to powder. At the end of the 				year, when they celebrate the anniversary, they scarify themselves and give to 				the relatives the pulverized bones to drink in water. Every man has a 				recognized wife, but the medicine men enjoy greater privileges, since they may 				have two or three, and among these wives there is great friendship and harmony. 				<span class="numbering-line">92.</span><br />
When one takes a woman for his wife, from the day he 				marries her, whatever he may hunt or fish, she has to fetch it to the home of 				her father, without daring to touch or eat of it, and from the home of the 				father-in-law they bring the food to the husband. All the while neither the 				wife&#8217;s father nor her mother enter his abode, nor is he allowed to go to 				theirs, or to the homes of his brothers-in-law, and should they happen to meet 				they go out of each other&#8217;s way a crossbow&#8217;s shot or so, with bowed heads and 				eyes cast to the ground, holding it to be an evil thing to look at each other 				or speak. The women are free to communicate with their parents-in-law or 				relatives and speak to them. This custom prevails from that island as far as 				about fifty leagues inland. <span class="numbering-line">93.</span><br />
There is another custom, that when a son or brother dies no 				food is gathered by those of his household for three months, preferring rather 				to starve, but the relatives and neighbors provide them with victuals. Now, as 				during the time we were there so many of them died, there was great starvation 				in most of the lodges, due to their customs and ceremonials, as well as to the 				weather, which was so rough that such as could go out after food brought in but 				very little, withal working hard for it. Therefore the Indians by whom I was 				kept forsook the island and in several canoes went over to the mainland to some 				bays where there were a great many oysters and during three months of the year 				they do not eat anything else and drink very bad water. There is lack of 				firewood, but great abundance of mosquitoes. Their lodges are made of matting 				and built on oyster shells, upon which they sleep in hides, which they only get 				by chance. There we remained to the end of April, when we went to the seashore, 				where we ate blackberries for a whole month, during which time they danced and 				celebrated incessantly. <span class="numbering-line">94.</span><br />
On the island I have spoken of they wanted to make medicine 				men of us without any examination or asking for our diplomas, because they cure 				diseases by breathing on the sick, and with that breath and their hands they 				drive the ailment away. So they summoned us to do the same in order to be at 				least of some use. We laughed, taking it for a jest, and said that we did not 				understand how to cure. <span class="numbering-line">95.</span><br />
Thereupon they withheld our food to compel us to do what 				they wanted. Seeing our obstinacy, an Indian told me that I did not know what I 				said by claiming that what he knew was useless, because stones and things 				growing out in the field have their virtues, and he, with a heated stone, 				placing it on the stomach, could cure and take away pain, so that we, who were 				wiser men, surely had greater power and virtue. <span class="numbering-line">96.</span><br />
At last we found ourselves in such stress as to have to do 				it, without risking any punishment. Their manner of curing is as follows: When 				one is ill they call in a medicine man, and after they are well again not only 				do they give him all they have, but even things they strive to obtain from 				their relatives. All the medicine man does is to make a few cuts where the pain 				is located and then suck the skin around the incisions. They cauterize with 				fire, thinking it very effective, and I found it to be so by my own experience. 				Then they breathe on the spot where the pain is and believe that with this the 				disease goes away. <span class="numbering-line">97.</span><br />
The way we treated the sick was to make over them the sign 				of the cross while breathing on them, recite a Pater noster and Ave Maria, and 				pray to God, Our Lord, as best we could to give them good health and inspire 				them to do us some favors. Thanks to His will and the mercy He had upon us, all 				those for whom we prayed, as soon as we crossed them, told the others that they 				were cured and felt well again. For this they gave us good cheer, and would 				rather be without food themselves so as to give it to us, and they gave us 				hides and other small things. So great was the lack of food then that I often 				remained without eating anything whatsoever for three days, and they were in 				the same plight, so that it seemed to me impossible for life to last, although 				I afterwards suffered still greater privations and much more distress, as I 				shall tell further on. <span class="numbering-line">98.</span><br />
The Indians that kept Alonso del Castillo, Andres Dorantes 				and the others, who were still alive, being of another language and stock, had 				gone to feed on oysters at another point of the mainland, where they remained 				until the first day of the month of April. Then they came back to the island, 				which was from there nearly two leagues off, where the channel is broadest. The 				island is half a league wide and five long. <span class="numbering-line">99.</span><br />
All the people of this country go naked; only the women 				cover part of their bodies with a kind of wool that grows on trees. The girls 				go about in deer skins. They are very liberal towards each other with what they 				have. There is no ruler among them. All who are of the same descendancy cluster 				together. There are two distinct languages spoken on the island; those of one 				language are called Capoques, those of the other Han. They have the custom, 				when they know each other and meet from time to time, before they speak, to 				weep for half an hour. After they have wept the one who receives the visit 				rises and gives to the other all he has. The other takes it, and in a little 				while goes away with everything. Even sometimes, after having given and 				obtained all, they part without having uttered a word. There are other very 				queer customs, but having told the principal ones and the most striking, I must 				now proceed to relate what further happened to us. <span class="numbering-line">100.</span><br />
After Dorantes and Castillo had come back to the island, 				they gathered together all the Christians, who were somewhat scattered, and 				there were in all fourteen. I, as told, was in another place, on the mainland, 				whither my Indians had taken me and where I suffered from such a severe illness 				that, although I might otherwise have entertained some hope for life, this was 				enough to take it away from me completely. When the Christians learned of it 				they gave an Indian the robe of marten we had taken from the cacique, as 				stated, in order that he should guide them to where I was, to see me, and so 				twelve of them came, two having become so feeble that they did not dare to take 				them along. <span class="numbering-line">101.</span><br />
The names of those who came are: Alonso del Castillo, 				Andres Dorantes and Diego Dorantes, Valdivieso, Estrada, Tostado, Chaves, 				Gutierrez, an Asturian priest; Diego de Huelva, Estevanico, the negro Benitez, 				and as they reached the mainland they found still another of our men named 				Francisco de Leon, and the thirteen went along the coast. After they had gone 				by, the Indians with whom I was told me of it, and how Hieronimo de Alaniz and 				Lope de Oviedo had been left on the island. <span class="numbering-line">102.</span><br />
My sickness prevented me from following or seeing them. I 				had to remain with those same Indians of the island for more than one year, and 				as they made me work so much and treated me so badly I determined to flee and 				go to those who live in the woods on the mainland, and who are called those 				from (of) Charruco. <span class="numbering-line">103.</span><br />
I could no longer stand the life I was compelled to lead. 				Among many other troubles I had to pull the eatable roots out of the water and 				from among the canes where they were buried in the ground, and from this my 				fingers had become so tender that the mere touch of a straw caused them to 				bleed. The reeds would cut me in many places, because many were broken and I 				had to go in among them with the clothing I had on, of which I have told. This 				is why I went to work and joined the other Indians. Among these I improved my 				condition a little by becoming a trader, doing the best in it I could, and they 				gave me food and treated me well. <span class="numbering-line">104.</span><br />
They entreated me to go about from one part to another to 				get the things they needed, as on account of constant warfare there is neither 				travel nor barter in the land. <span class="numbering-line">105.</span><br />
So, trading along with my wares I penetrated inland as far 				as I cared to go and along the coast as much as forty or fifty leagues. My 				stock consisted mainly of pieces of seashells and cockles, and shells with 				which they cut a fruit which is like a bean, used by them for healing and in 				their dances and feasts. This is of greatest value among them, besides 				shell-beads and other objects. These things I carried inland, and in exchange 				brought back hides and red ochre with which they rub and dye their faces and 				hair; flint for arrow points, glue and hard canes where-with to make them, and 				tassels made of the hair of deer, which they dye red. This trade suited me well 				because it gave me liberty to go wherever I pleased; I was not bound to do 				anything and no longer a slave. Wherever I went they treated me well, and gave 				me to eat for the sake of my wares. My principal object in doing it, however, 				was to find out in what manner I might get further away. I became well known 				among them; they rejoiced greatly when seeing me and I would bring them what 				they needed, and those who did not know me would desire and endeavor to meet me 				for the sake of my fame. <span class="numbering-line">106.</span><br />
My sufferings, while trading thus, it would take long to 				tell; danger, hunger, storms and frost overtaking me often in the open field 				and alone, and from which through the mercy of God, Our Lord, I escaped. For 				this reason I did not go out trading in winter, it being the time when the 				Indians themselves remain in their huts and abodes, unable to go out or assist 				each other. <span class="numbering-line">107.</span><br />
Nearly six years I spent thus in the country, alone among 				them and naked, as they all were themselves. <span class="numbering-line">108.</span><br />
The reason for remaining so long was that I wished to take 				with me a Christian called Lope de Oviedo, who still lingered on the island. 				The other companion, Alaniz, who remained with him after Alonso del Castillo 				and Andres Dorantes and all the others had gone, soon died, and in order to get 				him (Oviedo) out of there, I went over to the island every year, entreating him 				to leave with me and go, as well as we could, in search of Christians. But year 				after year he put it off to the year that was to follow. In the end I got him 				to come, took him away, and carried him across the inlets and through four 				rivers on the coast, since he could not swim. Thence we proceeded, together 				with several Indians, to an inlet one league wide, very deep everywhere and 				which seemed to us, from what we saw, to be the one called of the Holy Ghost. 				<span class="numbering-line">109.</span><br />
On the opposite shore we saw Indians who had come to meet 				those in our company. They informed us that further on there were three men 				like ourselves and told us their names. Upon being asked about the rest of the 				party, they answered that all had died from cold and hunger and that the 				Indians beyond had killed Diego Dorantes, Valdivieso and Diego de Huelva 				willfully, only because these had gone from one house to another, and their 				neighbors with whom was now the Captain Dorantes, had, in consequence of some 				dream dreamt by these Indians, killed Esquivel and Mendez also. We asked them 				about those who remained alive, and they said they were in a very sorry 				condition, as the boys and other Indians, idlers and roughs, kicked them, 				slapped their faces and beat them with sticks, and such was the life they had 				to lead. <span class="numbering-line">110.</span><br />
We inquired about the country further on and the 				sustenance that might be found in it. They said it was very thinly settled, 				with nothing to eat, and the people dying from cold, as they had neither hides 				nor anything else to protect their bodies. They also told us that, if we wished 				to meet the three Christians about two days hence, the Indians would come to a 				place about a league from there on the shore of that river to feed on nuts. And 				to show us that what they said of the ill-treatment of our people was true the 				Indians with whom we were kicked and beat my companion. Neither did I remain 				without my share of it. They threw mud at us, and put arrows to our chests 				every day, saying they would kill us in the same way as our companions. And 				fearing this, Lope de Oviedo, my companion, said he preferred to go back, with 				some women of the Indians in whose company we had forded the cove and who had 				remained behind. I insisted he should not go and did all I could to prevail 				upon him to remain, but it was in vain. He went back and I remained alone among 				these Indians, who are named Guevenes, whereas those with whom he went away 				were called Deaguanes. <span class="numbering-line">111.</span><br />
Two days after Lope de Oviedo had gone the Indians who 				kept Alonso del Castillo and Andres Dorantes came to the very spot we had been 				told of to eat the nuts upon which they subsist for two months in the year, 				grinding certain small grains with them, without eating anything else. Even of 				that they do not always have, since one year there may be some and the next 				year not. They (the nuts) are of the size of those of Galicia, and the trees 				are very big and numerous. <span class="numbering-line">112.</span><br />
An Indian told me that the Christians had come and that if 				I wished to see them I should run away to hide on the edge of a grove to which 				he pointed, as he and some of his relatives were to visit these Indians and 				would take me along to the Christians. I confided in them and determined to do 				it because they spoke a different language from that of my Indians. So the next 				day they took me along. When I got near the site where they had their lodges, 				Andres Dorantes came out to look who it was, because the Indians had informed 				him also that a Christian was coming, and when he saw me he was much 				frightened, as for many days they believed me to be dead, the Indians having 				told them so. We gave many thanks to God for being together again, and that day 				was one of the happiest we enjoyed in our time, and going to where was Castillo 				they asked me whither I went. I told him my purpose was to go to a country of 				Christians and that I followed this direction and trail. Andres Dorantes said 				that for many days he had been urging Castillo and Estevanico to go further on, 				but they did not risk it, being unable to swim and afraid of the rivers and 				inlets that had to be crossed so often in that country. <span class="numbering-line">113.</span><br />
Still, as it pleased God, Our Lord, to spare me after all 				my sufferings and sickness and finally let me rejoin them, they at last 				determined upon fleeing, as I would take them safely across the rivers and bays 				we might meet. But they advised me to keep it secret from the Indians (as well 				as my own departure) lest they would kill me forthwith, and that to avoid this 				it was necessary to remain with them for six months longer, after which time 				they would remove to another section in order to eat prickly pears. These are a 				fruit of the size of eggs, red and black, and taste very good. For three months 				they subsist upon them exclusively, eating nothing else. <span class="numbering-line">114.</span><br />
Now, at the time they pluck this fruit, other Indians from 				beyond come to them with bows for barter and exchange, and when those turn back 				we thought of joining them and escaping in this way. With this understanding I 				remained, and they gave me as a slave to an Indian with whom Dorantes stayed. 				This Indian, his wife, their son and another Indian who was with them were all 				cross-eyed. These are called Mariames, and Castillo was with others, who were 				their neighbors, called Iguaces. <span class="numbering-line">115.</span><br />
And so, being here with them, they told me that after 				leaving the Island of Ill-Fate they met on the coast the boat in which the 				purser and the monks were going adrift, and that crossing the rivers, of which 				there were four, all very large and very swift, the barges in which they 				crossed were swept out into the sea, where four of their number were drowned. 				Thus they went ahead until they had crossed the inlet, which they did by dint 				of great efforts. Fifteen leagues from there they met another of our parties, 				and when they reached there, already two of their companions had died in sixty 				leagues of travel. The survivors also were very near death. On the whole trip 				they ate nothing but crawfish and yerba pedrera. <span class="numbering-line">116.</span><br />
At this, the last cove, they said they saw Indians eating 				blackberries, who, upon perceiving the Christians, went away to another 				promontory. While seeking a way to cross the cove an Indian and a Christian 				came towards them, and they recognized Figueroa, one of the four we had sent 				ahead from the Island of Ill-Fate, who there told them how he and his 				companions had gotten to that place, where two of their number and one Indian 				had died from cold and hunger, because they had come and remained in the worst 				weather known. He also said the Indians took him and Mendez. <span class="numbering-line">117.</span><br />
While with them Mendez fled, going in the direction of 				Panuco as best he might, but the Indians pursued and killed him. So, as he 				(Figueroa) was with these same Indians he learned (from them) that with the 				Mariames there was a Christian who had come over from the other side and had 				met him with those called Guevenes, and that this Christian was Hernando de 				Esquivel, from Badajoz, a companion of the commissary. From Esquivel he learned 				how the Governor, the purser and the others had ended. <span class="numbering-line">118.</span><br />
The purser, with the friars, had stranded with their barge 				among the rivers, and, while they were proceeding along the coast, the barge of 				the Governor and his men came to land also. He (the Governor) then went with 				his barge as far as the big cove, whence he returned and took his men across to 				the other side, then came back for the purser, the monks and the rest. He 				further told him that after disembarking, the Governor revoked the powers he 				had given to the purser as his lieutenant, giving the office to a captain that 				was with him called Pantoja. <span class="numbering-line">119.</span><br />
The Governor did not land that night, but remained on his 				barge with a pilot and a page who was sick. They had neither water nor anything 				to eat aboard, and at midnight a northerner set in with such violence that it 				carried the barge out into the sea, without anybody noticing it. They had for 				an anchor only a stone, and never more did they hear of him. Thereupon the 				people who had remained on land proceeded along the coast, and, being much 				impeded by water, built rafts with great trouble, in which they passed to the 				other side. <span class="numbering-line">120.</span><br />
Going ahead, they reached a point of timber on the beach, 				where they found Indians, who, upon seeing them approach, placed their lodges 				on the canoes and crossed over to the other side of the coast, and the 				Christians, in view of the season and weather, since it was in the month of 				November, remained in this timber, because they found water and firewood, some 				crawfish and other sea-food, but from cold and hunger they began to die. <span class="numbering-line">121.</span><br />
Moreover, Pantoja, who remained as lieutenant, ill-treated 				them. On this Sotomayor, brother of Vasco Porcallo (the one from the Island of 				Cuba, who had come in the fleet as Maestro de Campo), unable to stand it 				longer, quarreled with Pantoja and struck him a blow with a stick, of which he 				died. Thus they perished one after another, the survivors slicing the dead for 				meat. The last one to die was Sotomayor, and Esquivel cut him up and fed on his 				body until the first of March, when an Indian, of those who had taken to flight 				previously, came to look if they were dead and took Esquivel along with him. 				<span class="numbering-line">122.</span><br />
Once in the hands of this Indian, Figueroa spoke to 				Esquivel, learning from him what we have told here, and he entreated him to go 				in his company towards Panuco. But Esquivel refused, saying he had heard from 				the monks that Panuco was in their rear, and so he remained, while Figueroa 				went back to the coast where he formerly had been. <span class="numbering-line">123.</span><br />
All this account Figueroa gave after Esquivel&#8217;s narrative, 				and thus, from one to the other, it came to me. Through it the fate of the 				whole fleet will be learned and known, and what happened to every one in 				particular. And he said furthermore that if the Christians would go about there 				for some time they might possibly meet Esquivel, because he knew that he had 				run away from the Indian with whom he was and gone to others called 				Mariames,who were their neighbors. And, as I have just said, he and the 				Asturian wished to go to other Indians further on, but when those with whom 				they were found it out, they beat them severely, undressed the Asturian and 				pierced one of his arms with an arrow. <span class="numbering-line">124.</span><br />
At last the Christians escaped through flight, and 				remained with the other Indians, whose slaves they agreed to become. But, 				although serving them, they were so ill-treated, that no slaves, nor men in any 				condition of life, were ever so abused. Not content with cuffing and beating 				them and pulling out their beards for mere pastime, they killed three out of 				the six only because they went from one lodge to another. These were Diego 				Dorantes, Valdivieso and Diego de Huelva. The three remaining ones expected to 				meet the same fate in the end. <span class="numbering-line">125.</span><br />
To escape from that life Andres Dorantes fled to the 				Mariames, and they were the ones with whom Esquivel had been. They told him how 				Esquivel stayed with them and how he fled because a woman dreamt he would kill 				her son, and the Indians pursued and killed him. They also showed Andres 				Dorantes his sword, his rosary, his prayer book and other things of his. It is 				a custom of theirs to kill even their own children for the sake of dreams, and 				the girls when newly born they throw away to be eaten by dogs. The reason why 				they do it is (as they say) that all the others of that country are their 				enemies with whom they are always at war, and should they marry their daughters 				they might multiply so much as to be able to overcome them and reduce them to 				slavery. Hence they prefer to kill the girls rather than see them give birth to 				children who would become their foes. <span class="numbering-line">126.</span><br />
We asked them why they did not wed the girls among 				themselves. They replied it was bad to marry them to their own kin, and much 				better to do away with their daughters than to leave them to relatives or to 				enemies. This custom they have in common with their neighbors, the Iguaces, and 				no other tribe of that country has it. When they want to get married they buy 				their wives from their enemies. The price paid for a woman is a bow, the best 				to be had, with two arrows, and if he has no bow he gives a net as much as a 				fathom in width and one in length. They kill their own children and buy those 				of strangers. Marriage only lasts as long as they please. For a mere nothing 				they break up wedlock. <span class="numbering-line">127.</span><br />
Dorantes remained only a few days with those Indians and 				then escaped. Castillo and Estevanico went inland to the Iguaces. All those 				people are archers and well built, although not as tall as those we had left 				behind us, and they have the nipple and lip perforated. Their principal food 				are two or three kinds of roots, which they hunt for all over the land; they 				are very unhealthy, inflating, and it takes two days to roast them. Many are 				very bitter, and with all that they are gathered with difficulty. But those 				people are so much exposed to starvation that these roots are to them 				indispensable and they walk two and three leagues to obtain them. Now and then 				they kill deer and at times get a fish, but this is so little and their hunger 				so great that they eat spiders and ant eggs, worms, lizards and salamanders and 				serpents, also vipers the bite of which is deadly. They swallow earth and wood, 				and all they can get, the dung of deer and more things I do not mention; and I 				verily believe, from what I saw, that if there were any stones in the country 				they would eat them also. They preserve the bones of the fish they eat, of 				snakes and other animals, to pulverize them and eat the powder. <span class="numbering-line">128.</span><br />
The men do not carry burdens or loads, the women and old 				men have to do it, for those are the people they least esteem. They have not as 				much love for their children as those spoken of before. Some among them are 				given to unnatural vices. The women are compelled to do very hard work and in a 				great many ways, for out of twenty-four hours of day and night they get only 				six hours&#8217; rest. They spend most of the night in stirring the fire to dry those 				roots which they eat, and at daybreak they begin to dig and carry firewood and 				water to their houses and attend to other necessary matters. Most of these 				Indians are great thieves, for, although very liberal towards each other, as 				soon as one turns his heads his own son or the father grabs what he can. They 				are great liars and drunkards and take something in order to become 				intoxicated. They are so accustomed to running that, without resting or getting 				tired, they run from morning till night in pursuit of a deer, and kill a great 				many, because they follow until the game is worn out, sometimes catching it 				alive. Their huts are of matting placed over four arches. They carry them on 				their back and move every two or three days in quest of food; they plant 				nothing that would be of any use. <span class="numbering-line">129.</span><br />
They are a very merry people, and even when famished do 				not cease to dance and celebrate their feasts and ceremonials. Their best times 				are when &#8220;tunas&#8221; (prickly pears) are ripe, because then they have plenty to eat 				and spend the time in dancing and eating day and night. As long as these tunas 				last they squeeze and open them and set them to dry. When dried they are put in 				baskets like figs and kept to be eaten on the way. The peelings they grind and 				pulverize. <span class="numbering-line">130.</span><br />
While with them it happened many times that we were three 				or four days without food. Then, in order to cheer us, they would tell us not 				to despair, since we would have tunas very soon and eat much and drink their 				juice and get big stomachs and be merry, contented and without hunger. But from 				the day they said it to the season of the tunas there would still elapse five 				or six months, and we had to wait that long. <span class="numbering-line">131.</span><br />
When the time came, and we went to eat tunas, there were a 				great many mosquitoes of three kinds, all very bad and troublesome, which 				during most of the summer persecuted us. In order to protect ourselves we 				built, all around our camps, big fires of damp and rotten wood, that gave no 				flame but much smoke, and this was the cause of further trouble to us, for the 				whole night we did not do anything but weep from the smoke that went to our 				eyes, and the heat from the fires was so insufferable that we would go to the 				shore for rest. And when, sometimes, we were able to sleep, the Indians roused 				us again with blows to go and kindle the fires. <span class="numbering-line">132.</span><br />
Those from further inland have another remedy, just as bad 				and even worse, which is to go about with a firebrand, setting fire to the 				plains and timber so as to drive off the mosquitoes, and also to get lizards 				and similar things which they eat, to come out of the soil. In the same manner 				they kill deer, encircling them with fires, and they do it also to deprive the 				animals of pasture, compelling them to go for food where the Indians want. For 				never they build their abodes except where there are wood and water, and 				sometimes load themselves with the requisites and go in quest of deer, which 				are found mostly where there is neither water nor wood. <span class="numbering-line">133.</span><br />
On the very day they arrive they kill deer and whatever 				else can be had and use all the water and wood to cook their food with and 				build fires against the mosquitoes. They wait for another day to get something 				to take along on the road, and when they leave they are so badly bitten by 				mosquitoes as to appear like lepers. In this manner they satisfy their hunger 				twice or thrice a year and at such great sacrifice as I have told. Having been 				with them I can say that no toil or suffering in this world comes near it. <span class="numbering-line">134.</span><br />
All over this country there are a great many deer, fowl 				and other animals which I have before enumerated. Here also they come up with 				cows; I have seen them thrice and have eaten their meat. They appear to me of 				the size of those in Spain. Their horns are small, like those of the Moorish 				cattle; the hair is very long, like fine wool and like a peajacket; some are 				brownish and others black, and to my taste they have better and more meat than 				those from here. Of the small hides the Indians make blankets to cover 				themselves with, and of the taller ones they make shoes and targets. These cows 				come from the north, across the country further on, to the coast of Florida, 				and are found all over the land for over four hundred leagues. On this whole 				stretch, through the valleys by which they come, people who live there descend 				to subsist upon their flesh. And a great quantity of hides are met with inland. 				<span class="numbering-line">135.</span><br />
When I had been with the Christians for six months, 				waiting to execute our plans, the Indians went for &#8220;tunas,&#8221; at a distance of 				thirty leagues from there, and as we were about to flee the Indians began 				fighting among themselves over a woman and cuffed and struck and hurt each 				other, and in great rage each one took his lodge and went his own way. So we 				Christians had to part, and in no manner could we get together again until the 				year following. During that time I fared very badly, as well from lack of food 				as from the abuse the Indians gave me. So badly was I treated that I had to 				flee three times from my masters, and they all went in my pursuit ready to kill 				me. But God, Our Lord, in His infinite goodness, protected and saved my life. 				<span class="numbering-line">136.</span><br />
When the time for the tunas came we found each other again 				on the same spot. We had already agreed to escape and appointed a day for it, 				when on that very day the Indians separated us, sending each one to a different 				place, and I told my companions that I would wait for them at the tunas until 				full moon. It was the first of September and the first day of the new moon, and 				I told them that if at the time set they did not appear I would go on alone 				without them. We parted, each one going off with his Indians. <span class="numbering-line">137.</span><br />
I remained with mine until the thirteenth of the moon, 				determined to escape to other Indians as soon as the moon would be full, and on 				that day there came to where I was Andres Dorantes and Estevanico. They told me 				they had left Castillo with other people nearby, called Anagados, and how they 				had suffered many hardships and been lost. On the following day our Indians 				moved towards where Castillo was and were going to join those who kept him, 				making friends with them, as until then they had been at war. So we got 				Castillo also. <span class="numbering-line">138.</span><br />
During all the time we ate tunas we felt thirsty. To allay 				our thirst we drank the juice of the fruit, pouring it first into a pit which 				we dug in the soil, and when that was full we drank to satisfaction. The 				Indians do it in that way, out of lack of vessels. The juice is sweet and has 				the color of must. There are many kinds of tunas, and some very good ones, 				although to me all tasted well alike, hunger never leaving me time to select, 				or stop to think which ones were better. Most of the people drink rainwater 				that collects here and there, for, as they never have a fixed abode, they know 				no springs nor established watering places, although there are rivers. <span class="numbering-line">139.</span><br />
All over the land are vast and handsome pastures, with 				good grass for cattle, and it strikes me the soil would be very fertile were 				the country inhabited and improved by reasonable people. We saw no mountains as 				long as we were in this country. These Indians told us that further on there 				were others called Cajoles, who live nearer the coast, and that they were those 				who killed all the people that came in the barge of Penalosa and Tellez. They 				had been so emaciated and feeble that when being killed they offered no 				resistance. So the Indians finished with all of them, and showed us some of 				their clothes and weapons and said the barge was still there stranded. This is 				the fifth of the missing ones. That of the Governor we already said had been 				swept out into the sea, the one of the purser and the monks was seen stranded 				on the beach and Esquivel told us of their end. Of the two in which Castillo, I 				and Dorantes were I have told how they sank close to the Isle of Ill-Fate. <span class="numbering-line">140.</span><br />
Two days after moving we recommended ourselves to God, Our 				Lord, and fled, hoping that, although it was late in the season and the fruits 				of the tunas were giving out, by remaining in the field we might still get over 				a good portion of the land. As we proceeded that day, in great fear lest the 				Indians would follow us, we descried smoke, and, going towards it, reached the 				place after sundown, where we found an Indian who, when he saw us coming, did 				not wait, but ran away. We sent the negro after him, and as the Indian saw him 				approach alone he waited. The negro told him that we were going in search of 				the people that had raised the smoke. He answered that the dwellings were 				nearby and that he would guide us, and we followed. He hurried ahead to tell of 				our coming. At sunset we came in sight of the lodges, and two crossbow shots 				before reaching them met four Indians waiting for us, and they received us 				well. We told them in the language of the Mariames that we had come to see 				them. They appeared to be pleased with our company and took us to their homes. 				They lodged Dorantes and the negro at the house of a medicine man, and me and 				Castillo at that of another. These Indians speak another language and are 				called Avavares. They were those who used to fetch bows to ours and barter with 				them, and, although of another nation and speech, they understand the idiom of 				those with whom we formerly were and had arrived there on that very day with 				their lodges. Forthwith they offered us many tunas, because they had heard of 				us and of how we cured and of the miracles Our Lord worked through us. And 				surely, even if there had been no other tokens, it was wonderful how He 				prepared the way for us through a country so scantily inhabited, causing us to 				meet people where for a long time there had been none, saving us from so many 				dangers, not permitting us to be killed, maintaining us through starvation and 				distress and moving the hearts of the people to treat us well, as we shall tell 				further on. <span class="numbering-line">141.</span><br />
On the night we arrived there some Indians came to 				Castillo complaining that their heads felt very sore and begging him for 				relief. As soon as he had made the sign of the cross over them and recommended 				them to God, at that very moment the Indians said that all the pain was gone. 				They went back to their abodes and brought us many tunas and a piece of 				venison, something we did not know any more what it was, and as the news spread 				that same night there came many other sick people for him to cure, and each 				brought a piece of venison, and so many there were that we did not know where 				to store the meat. We thanked God for His daily increasing mercy and kindness, 				and after they were all well they began to dance and celebrate and feast until 				sunrise of the day following. <span class="numbering-line">142.</span><br />
They celebrated our coming for three days, at the end of 				which we asked them about the land further on, the people and the food that 				there might be obtained. They replied there were plenty of tunas all through 				that country, but that the season was over and nobody there, because all had 				gone to their abodes after gathering tunas; also that the country was very cold 				and very few hides in it. Hearing this, and as winter and cold weather were 				setting in, we determined to spend it with those Indians. Five days after our 				arrival they left to get more tunas at a place where people of a different 				nation and language lived, and having travelled five days, suffering greatly 				from hunger, as on the way there were neither tunas nor any kind of fruit, we 				came to a river, where we pitched our lodges. <span class="numbering-line">143.</span><br />
As soon as we were settled we went out to hunt for the 				fruit of certain trees, which are like spring bittervetch (orobus), and as 				through all that country there are no trails, I lost too much time in hunting 				for them. The people returned without me, and starting to rejoin them that 				night I went astray and got lost. It pleased God to let me find a burning tree, 				by the fire of which I spent that very cold night, and in the morning loaded 				myself with wood, took two burning sticks and continued my journey. Thus I went 				on for five days, always with my firebrands and load of wood, so that in case 				the fire went out where there was no timber, as in many parts there is none, I 				always would have wherewith to make other torches and not be without firewood. 				It was my only protection against the cold, for I went as naked as a newborn 				child. For the night I used the following artifice: <span class="numbering-line">144.</span><br />
I went to the brush in the timber near the rivers and 				stopped in it every evening before sunset. Then I scratched a hole in the 				ground and threw in it much firewood from the numerous trees. I also picked up 				dry wood that had fallen and built around the hole four fires crosswise, being 				very careful to stir them from time to time. Of the long grass that grows there 				I made bundles, with which I covered myself in that hole and so was protected 				from the night cold. But one night fire fell on the straw with which I was 				covered, and while I was asleep in the hole it began to burn so rapidly that, 				although I hurried out as quick as possible, I still have marks on my hair from 				this dangerous accident. During all that time I did not eat a mouthful, nor 				could I find anything to eat, and my feet, being bare, bled a great deal. God 				had mercy upon me, that in all this time there was no norther; otherwise I 				could not have survived. <span class="numbering-line">145.</span><br />
At the end of five days I reached the shores of a river 				and there met my Indians. They, as well as the Christians, had given me up for 				dead, thinking that perhaps some snake had bitten me. They all were greatly 				pleased to see me, the Christians especially, and told me that thus far they 				had wandered about famishing, and therefore had not hunted for me, and that 				night they gave me of their tunas. On the next day we left and went where we 				found a great many of that fruit with which all appeased their hunger, and we 				gave many thanks to Our Lord, whose help to us never failed. <span class="numbering-line">146.</span><br />
Early the next day many Indians came and brought five 				people who were paralyzed and very ill, and they came for Castillo to cure 				them. Every one of the patients offered him his bow and arrows, which he 				accepted, and by sunset he made the sign of the cross over each of the sick, 				recommending them to God, Our Lord, and we all prayed to Him as well as we 				could to restore them to health. And He, seeing there was no other way of 				getting those people to help us so that we might be saved from our miserable 				existence, had mercy upon us, and in the morning all woke up well and hearty 				and went away in such good health as if they never had had any ailment 				whatever. This caused them great admiration and moved us to thanks to Our Lord 				and to greater faith in His goodness and the hope that He would save us, 				guiding us to where we could serve Him. For myself I may say that I always had 				full faith in His mercy and in that He would liberate me from captivity, and 				always told my companions so. <span class="numbering-line">147.</span><br />
When the Indians had gone and taken along those recently 				cured, we removed to others that were eating tunas also, called Cultalchuches 				and Malicones, which speak a different language, and with them were others, 				called Coayos and Susolas, and on another side those called Atayos, who were at 				war with the Susolas, and exchanging arrow shots with them every day. <span class="numbering-line">148.</span><br />
Nothing was talked about in this whole country but of the 				wonderful cures which God, Our Lord, performed through us, and so they came 				from many places to be cured, and after having been with us two days some 				Indians of the Susolas begged Castillo to go and attend to a man who had been 				wounded, as well as to others that were sick and among whom, they said, was one 				on the point of death. Castillo was very timid, especially in difficult and 				dangerous cases, and always afraid that his sins might interfere and prevent 				the cures from being effective. Therefore the Indians told me to go and perform 				the cure. They liked me, remembering that I had relieved them while they were 				out gathering nuts, for which they had given us nuts and hides. This had 				happened at the time I was coming to join the Christians. So I had to go, and 				Dorantes and Estevanico went with me. <span class="numbering-line">149.</span><br />
When I came close to their ranches I saw that the dying 				man we had been called to cure was dead, for there were many people around him 				weeping and his lodge was torn down, which is a sign that the owner has died. I 				found the Indian with eyes up turned, without pulse and with all the marks of 				lifelessness. At least so it seemed to me, and Dorantes said the same. I 				removed a mat with which he was covered, and as best I could prayed to Our Lord 				to restore his health, as well as that of all the others who might be in need 				of it, and after having made the sign of the cross and breathed on him many 				times they brought his bow and presented it to me, and a basket of ground 				tunas, and took me to many others who were suffering from vertigo. They gave me 				two more baskets of tunas, which I left to the Indians that had come with us. 				Then we returned to our quarters. <span class="numbering-line">150.</span><br />
Our Indians to whom I had given the tunas remained there, 				and at night returned telling, that the dead man whom I attended to in their 				presence had resuscitated, rising from his bed, had walked about, eaten and 				talked to them, and that all those treated by me were well and in very good 				spirits. This caused great surprise and awe, and all over the land nothing else 				was spoken of. All who heard it came to us that we might cure them and bless 				their children, and when the Indians in our company ( who were the 				Cultalchulches) had to return to their country, before parting they offered us 				all the tunas they had for their journey, not keeping a single one, and gave us 				flint stones as long as one and a-half palms, with which they cut and that are 				greatly prized among them. They begged us to remember them and pray to God to 				keep them always healthy, which we promised to do, and so they left, the 				happiest people upon earth, having given us the very best they had. <span class="numbering-line">151.</span><br />
We remained with the Avavares Indians for eight months, 				according to our reckoning of the moons. During that time they came for us from 				many places and said that verily we were children of the sun. Until then 				Dorantes and the negro had not made any cures, but we found ourselves so 				pressed by the Indians coming from all sides, that all of us had to become 				medicine men. I was the most daring and reckless of all in undertaking cures. 				We never treated anyone that did not afterwards say he was well, and they had 				such confidence in our skill as to believe that none of them would die as long 				as we were among them. <span class="numbering-line">152.</span><br />
These Indians and the ones we left behind told us a very 				strange tale. From their account it may have occurred fifteen or sixteen years 				ago. They said there wandered then about the country a man, whom they called 				&#8220;Bad Thing,&#8221; of small stature and with a beard, although they never could see 				his features clearly, and whenever he would approach their dwellings their hair 				would stand on end and they began to tremble. In the doorway of the lodge there 				would then appear a firebrand. That man thereupon came in and took hold of 				anyone he chose, and with a sharp knife of flint, as broad as a hand and two 				palms in length, he cut their side, and, thrusting his hand through the gash, 				took out the entrails, cutting off a piece one palm long, which he threw into 				the fire. Afterwards he made three cuts in one of the arms, the second one at 				the place where people are usually bled, and twisted the arm, but reset it soon 				afterwards. Then he placed his hands on the wounds, and they told us that they 				closed at once. Many times he appeared among them while they were dancing, 				sometimes in the dress of a woman and again as a man, and whenever he took a 				notion to do it he would seize the hut or lodge, take it up into the air and 				come down with it again with a great crash. They also told us how, many a time, 				they set food before him, but he never would partake of it, and when they asked 				him where he came from and where he had his home, he pointed to a rent in the 				earth and said his house was down below. <span class="numbering-line">153.</span><br />
We laughed very much at those stories, making fun of them, 				and then, seeing our incredulity they brought to us many of those whom, they 				said, he had taken, and we saw the scars of his slashes in the places and as 				they told. We told them he was a demon and explained as best we could that if 				they would believe in God, Our Lord, and be Christians like ourselves, they 				would not have to fear that man, nor would he come and do such things unto 				them, and they might be sure that as long as we were in this country he would 				not dare to appear again. At this they were greatly pleased and lost much of 				their apprehension. <span class="numbering-line">154.</span><br />
The same Indians told us they had seen the Asturian and 				Figueroa with other Indians further along on the coast, which we had named of 				the figs. All those people had no reckoning by either sun or moon, nor do they 				count by months and years; they judge of the seasons by the ripening of fruits, 				by the time when fish die and by the appearance of the stars, in all of which 				they are very clever and expert. While with them we were always well treated, 				although our food was never too plentiful, and we had to carry our own water 				and wood. Their dwellings and their food are like those of the others, but they 				are much more exposed to starvation, having neither maize nor acorns or nuts. 				We always went about naked like they and covered ourselves at night with deer 				skins. <span class="numbering-line">155.</span><br />
During six of the eighteen months we were with them we 				suffered much from hunger, because they do not have fish either. At the end of 				that time the tunas began to ripen, and without their noticing it we left and 				went to other Indians further ahead called Maliacones, at a distance of one 				day&#8217;s travel. Three days after I and the negro reached there I sent him back to 				get Castillo and Dorantes, and after they rejoined me we all departed in 				company of the Indians, who went to eat a small fruit of some trees. On this 				fruit they subsist for ten or twelve days until the tunas are fully ripe. There 				they joined other Indians called Arbadaos, whom we found to be so sick, 				emaciated and swollen that we were greatly astonished. The Indians with whom we 				had come went back on the same trail, and we told them that we wished to remain 				with the others, at which they showed grief. So we remained with the others in 				the field near their dwellings. <span class="numbering-line">156.</span><br />
When the Indians saw us they clustered together, after 				having talked among themselves, and each one of them took the one of us whom he 				claimed by the hand and they led us to their homes. While with those we 				suffered more from hunger than among any of the others. In the course of a 				whole day we did not eat more than two handfuls of the fruit, which was green 				and contained so much milky juice that our mouths were burnt by it. As water 				was very scarce, whoever ate of them became very thirsty. And we finally grew 				so hungry that we purchased two dogs, in exchange for nets and other things, 				and a hide with which I used to cover myself. I have said already that through 				all that country we went naked, and not being accustomed to it, like snakes we 				shed our skin twice a year. Exposure to the sun and air covered our chests and 				backs with big sores that made it very painful to carry the big and heavy 				loads, the ropes of which cut into the flesh of our arms. <span class="numbering-line">157.</span><br />
The country is so rough and overgrown that often after we 				had gathered firewood in the timber and dragged it out, we would bleed freely 				from the thorns and spines which cut and slashed us wherever they touched. 				Sometimes it happened that I was unable to carry or drag out the firewood after 				I had gathered it with much loss of blood. In all that trouble my only relief 				or consolation was to remember the passion of our Saviour, Jesus Christ, and 				the blood He shed for me, and to ponder how much greater His sufferings had 				been from the thorns, than those I was then enduring. I made a contract with 				the Indians to make combs, arrows, bows and nets for them. Also we made matting 				of which their lodges are constructed and of which they are in very great need, 				for, although they know how to make it, they do not like to do any work, in 				order to be able to go in quest of food. Whenever they work they suffer greatly 				from hunger. <span class="numbering-line">158.</span><br />
Again, they would make me scrape skins and tan them, and 				the greatest luxury I enjoyed was on the day they would give me a skin to 				scrape, because I scraped it very deep in order to eat the parings, which would 				last me two or three days. It also happened to us, while being with these 				Indians and those before mentioned, that we would eat a piece of meat which 				they gave us, raw, because if we broiled it the first Indian coming along would 				snatch and eat it; it seemed useless to take any pains, in view of what we 				might expect; neither were we particular to go to any trouble in order to have 				it broiled and might just as well eat it raw. Such was the life we led there, 				and even that scanty maintenance we had to earn through the objects made by our 				own hands for barter. <span class="numbering-line">159.</span><br />
After we had eaten the dogs it seemed to us that we had 				enough strength to go further on, so we commended ourselves to the guidance of 				God, Our Lord, took leave of these Indians, and they put us on the track of 				others of their language who were nearby. While on our way it began to rain and 				rained the whole day. We lost the trail and found ourselves in a big forest, 				where we gathered plenty of leaves of tunas which we roasted that same night in 				an oven made by ourselves, and so much heat did we give them that in the 				morning they were fit to be eaten. After eating them we recommended ourselves 				to God again, and left, and struck the trail we had lost. <span class="numbering-line">160.</span><br />
Issuing from the timber, we met other Indian dwellings, 				where we saw two women and some boys, who were so frightened at the sight of us 				that they fled to the forest to call the men that were in the woods. When these 				came they hid behind trees to peep at us. We called them and they approached in 				great fear. After we addressed them they told us they were very hungry and that 				nearby were many of their own lodges, and they would take us to them. So that 				night we reached a site where there were fifty dwellings, and the people were 				stupefied at seeing us and showed much fear. After they had recovered from 				their astonishment they approached and put their hands to our faces and bodies 				also. We stayed there that night, and in the morning they brought their sick 				people, begging us to cross them, and gave us of what they had to eat, which 				were leaves of tunas and green tunas baked. <span class="numbering-line">161.</span><br />
For the sake of this good treatment, giving us all they 				had, content with being without anything for our sake, we remained with them 				several days, and during that time others came from further on. When those were 				about to leave we told the first ones that we intended to accompany them. This 				made them very sad, and they begged us on their knees not to go. But we went 				and left them in tears at our departure, as it pained them greatly. <span class="numbering-line">162.</span><br />
From the Island of Ill-Fate on, all the Indians whom we 				met as far as to here have the custom of not cohabiting with their wives when 				these are pregnant, and until the child is two years old. <span class="numbering-line">163.</span><br />
Children are nursed to the age of twelve years, when they 				are old enough to gather their own food. We asked them why they brought their 				children up in that way and they replied, it was owing to the great scarcity of 				food all over that country, since it was common (as we saw) to be without it 				two or three days, and even four, and for that reason they nursed the little 				ones so long to preserve them from perishing through hunger. And even if they 				should survive, they would be very delicate and weak. When one falls sick he is 				left to die in the field unless he be somebody&#8217;s child. Other invalids, if 				unable to travel, are abandoned; but a son or brother is taken along. <span class="numbering-line">164.</span><br />
There is also a custom for husbands to leave their wives 				if they do not agree, and to remarry whom they please; this applies to the 				young men, but after they have had children they stay with their women and do 				not leave them. <span class="numbering-line">165.</span><br />
When, in any village, they quarrel among themselves, they 				strike and beat each other until worn out, and only then do they separate. 				Sometimes their women step in and separate them, but men never interfere in 				these brawls. Nor do they ever use bow and arrow, and after they have fought 				and settled the question, they take their lodges and women and go out into the 				field to live apart from the others till their anger is over, and when they are 				no longer angry and their resentment has passed away they return to the village 				and are as friendly again as if nothing had happened. There is no need of 				mediation. When the quarrel is between unmarried people they go to some of the 				neighbors, who, even if they be enemies, will receive them well, with great 				festivities and gifts of what they have, so that, when pacified, they return to 				their village wealthy. <span class="numbering-line">166.</span><br />
They all are warriors and so astute in guarding themselves 				from an enemy as if trained in continuous wars and in Italy. When in places 				where their enemies can offend them, they set their lodges on the edge of the 				roughest and densest timber and dig a trench close to it in which they sleep. 				The men at arms are hidden by brushwood and have their loopholes, and are so 				well covered and concealed that even at close range they cannot be seen. <span class="numbering-line">167.</span><br />
To the densest part of the forest they open a very narrow 				trail and there arrange a sleeping place for their women and children. As night 				sets in they build fires in the lodges, so that if there should be spies about, 				these would think the people to sleep there. And before sunrise they light the 				same fires again. Now, ditches, without being seen or discovered. <span class="numbering-line">168.</span><br />
In case there are no forests wherein they can hide thus 				and prepare their ambushes, they settle on the plain wherever it appears most 				appropriate, surrounding the place with trenches protected by brushwood. In 				these they open loopholes through which they can reach the enemy with arrows, 				and those parapets they build for the night. While I was with the Aguenes and 				these not on their guard, their enemies surprised them at midnight, killing 				three and wounding a number, so that they fled from their houses to the forest. 				As soon, however, as they noticed that the others had gone they went back, 				picked up all the arrows the others had spent and left and followed them as 				stealthily as possible. That same night they reached the others&#8217; dwellings 				unnoticed, and at sunrise attacked, killing five, besides wounding a great 				many. The rest made their escape, leaving homes and bows behind, with all their 				other belongings. <span class="numbering-line">169.</span><br />
A short time after this the women of those calling 				themselves Guevenes came, held a parley and made them friends again, but 				sometimes women are also the cause of war. All those people when they have 				personal questions and are not of one family, kill each other in a treacherous 				way and deal most cruelly with one another. <span class="numbering-line">170.</span><br />
Those Indians are the readiest people with their weapons 				of all I have seen in the world, for when they suspect the approach of an enemy 				they lie awake all night with their bows within reach and a dozen of arrows, 				and before one goes to sleep he tries his bow, and should the string not be to 				his liking he arranges it until it suits him. Often they crawl out of their 				dwellings so as not to be seen and look and spy in every direction after 				danger, and if they detect anything, in less than no time are they all out in 				the field with their bows and arrows. Thus they remain until daybreak, running 				hither and thither whenever they see danger or suspect their enemies might 				approach. When day comes they unstring their bows until they go hunting. <span class="numbering-line">171.</span><br />
The strings of their bows are made of deer sinews. They 				fight in a crouching posture, and while shooting at each other talk and dart 				from one side to the other to dodge the arrows of the foe. In this way they 				receive little damage from our crossbows and muskets. On the contrary, the 				Indians laugh at those weapons, because they are not dangerous to them on the 				plains over which they roam. They are only good in narrows and in swamps. <span class="numbering-line">172.</span><br />
Horses are what the Indians dread most, and by means of 				which they will be overcome. <span class="numbering-line">173.</span><br />
Whoever has to fight Indians must take great care not to 				let them think he is disheartened or that he covets what they own; in war they 				must be treated very harshly, for should they notice either fear or greed, they 				are the people who know how to abide their time for revenge and to take courage 				from the fears of their enemy. After spending all their arrows, they part, 				going each their own way, and without attempting pursuit, although one side 				might have more men than the other; such is their custom. <span class="numbering-line">174.</span><br />
Many times they are shot through and through with arrows, 				but do not die from the wounds as long as the bowels or heart are not touched; 				on the contrary, they recover quickly. Their eyesight, hearing and senses in 				general are better, I believe, than those of any other men upon earth. They can 				stand, and have to stand, much hunger, thirst and cold, being more accustomed 				and used to it than others. This I wished to state here, since, besides that 				all men are curious to know the habits and devices of others, such as might 				come in contact with those people should be informed of their customs and 				deeds, which will be of no small profit to them. <span class="numbering-line">175.</span><br />
I also do wish to tell of the nations and languages met 				with from the Island of Ill-Fate to the last ones, the Cuchendados. On the 				Island of Ill-Fate two languages are spoken, the ones they call Capoques, the 				others Han. On the mainland, facing the island, are others, called of Charruco, 				who take their name from the woods in which they live. Further on, along the 				seashore, are others, who call themselves Deguenes, and in front of them others 				named those of Mendica. Further on, on the coast, are the Quevenes, in front 				further inland the Mariames, and following the coast we come to the Guaycones, 				and in front of them inland the Yeguaces. After those come the Atayos, and 				behind them others, called Decubadaos, of whom there are a great many further 				on in this direction. On the coast live the Quitoles, and in front of them, 				inland, the Chauauares. These are joined by the Maliacones and the 				Cultalchulches and others called Susola and Comos, ahead on the coast are the 				Camolas, and further on those whom we call the people of the figs. <span class="numbering-line">176.</span><br />
All those people have homes and villages and speak 				different languages. Among them is a language wherein they call men mira aca, 				arraca, and dogs xo. <span class="numbering-line">177.</span><br />
In this whole country they make themselves drunk by a 				certain smoke for which they give all they have. They also drink something 				which they extract from leaves of trees, like unto water-oak, toasting them on 				the fire in a vessel like a low-necked bottle. When the leaves are toasted they 				fill the vessel with water and hold it over the fire so long until it has 				thrice boiled; then they pour the liquid into a bowl made of a gourd cut in 				twain. As soon as there is much foam on it they drink it as hot as they can 				stand, and from the time they take it out of the first vessel until they drink 				they shout,&#8221;Who wants to drink ?&#8221; When the women hear this they stand still at 				once, and although they carry a very heavy load do not dare to move. Should one 				of them stir, she is dishonored and beaten. In a great rage they spill the 				liquid they have prepared and spit out what they drank, easily and without 				pain. The reason for this custom, they say, is that when they want to drink 				that water and the women stir from the spot where they first hear the shouts, 				an evil substance gets into the liquid that penetrates their bodies, causing 				them to die before long. All the time the water boils the vessel must be kept 				covered. Should it be uncovered while a woman comes along they pour it out and 				do not drink of it. It is yellow and they drink it for three days without 				partaking of any food, each consuming an arroba and a half every day. <span class="numbering-line">178.</span><br />
When the women are ill they only seek food for themselves, 				because nobody else eats of what they bring. <span class="numbering-line">179.</span><br />
During the time I was among them I saw something very 				repulsive, namely, a man married to another. Such are impotent and womanish 				beings, who dress like women and perform the office of women, but use the bow 				and carry big loads. Among these Indians we saw many of them; they are more 				robust than the other men, taller, and can bear heavy burthens. <span class="numbering-line">180.</span><br />
After parting from those we had left in tears, we went 				with the others to their homes and were very well received. They brought us 				their children to touch, and gave us much mesquite-meal. This mezquiquez is a 				fruit which, while on the tree, is very bitter and like the carob bean. It is 				eaten with earth and then becomes sweet and very palatable. The way they 				prepare it is to dig a hole in the ground, of the depth it suits them, and 				after the fruit is put in that hole, with a piece of wood, the thickness of a 				leg and one and a half fathoms long they pound it to a meal, and to the earth 				that mixes with it in the hole they add several handfuls and pound again for a 				while. After that they empty it into a vessel, like a small, round basket, and 				pour in enough water to cover it fully, so that there is water on top. Then the 				one who has done the pounding tastes it, and if it appears to him not sweet 				enough he calls for more earth to add, and this he does until it suits his 				taste. Then all squat around and every one reaches out with his hand and takes 				as much as he can. The seeds and peelings they set apart on hides, and the one 				who has done the pounding throws them back into the vessel, pouring water over 				them again. They squeeze out the juice and water, and the husks and seeds they 				again put on hides, repeating the operation three or four times at every 				pounding. Those who take part in that banquet, which is for them a great 				occasion, get very big bellies from the earth and water they swallow. <span class="numbering-line">181.</span><br />
Now, of this, the Indians made a great feast in our 				behalf, and danced and celebrated all the time we were with them. And at night 				six Indians, to each one of us, kept watch at the entrance to the lodge we 				slept in, without allowing anybody to enter before sunrise. <span class="numbering-line">182.</span><br />
When we were about to leave some women happened to come, 				that belonged to Indians living further on, and, informing ourselves where 				their abodes were, we left, although the Indians entreated us to remain a day 				longer, since the place we wanted to go to was very far away, and there was no 				trail to it. They showed us how the women who had just arrived were tired, but 				that if we would let them rest until the next day, they then would accompany 				and guide us. We left, nevertheless, and soon the women followed with others of 				the village. <span class="numbering-line">183.</span><br />
There being no trails in that country, we soon lost our 				way. At the end of four leagues we reached a spring, and there met the women 				who had followed us, and who told us of all they had gone through until they 				fell in with us again. We went on, taking them along as guides. <span class="numbering-line">184.</span><br />
In the afternoon we crossed a big river, the water being 				more than waist-deep. It may have been as wide as the one of Sevilla, and had a 				swift current. At sunset we reached a hundred Indian huts and, as we 				approached, the people came out to receive us, shouting frightfully, and 				slapping their thighs. They carried perforated gourds filled with pebbles, 				which are ceremonial objects of great importance. They only use them at dances, 				or as medicine, to cure, and nobody dares touch them but themselves. They claim 				that those gourds have healing virtues, and that they come from Heaven, not 				being found in that country; nor do they know where they come from, except that 				the rivers carry them down when they rise and overflow the land. <span class="numbering-line">185.</span><br />
So great was their excitement and eagerness to touch us 				that, every one wanting to be first, they nearly squeezed us to death, and, 				without suffering our feet to touch the ground, carried us to their abodes. So 				many crowded down upon us that we took refuge in the lodges they had prepared 				for our accommodation, and in no manner consented to be feasted by them on that 				night. <span class="numbering-line">186.</span><br />
The whole night they spent in celebration and dancing, and 				the next morning they brought us every living soul of that village to be 				touched by us and to have the cross made over them, as with the others. Then 				they gave to the women of the other village who had come with their own a great 				many arrows. The next day we went on, and all the people of that village with 				us, and when we came to other Indians were as well received as anywhere in the 				past; they also gave us of what they had and the deer they had killed during 				the day. Among these we saw a new custom. Those who were with us took away from 				those people who came to get cured their bows and arrows, their shoes and 				beads, if they wore any, and placed them before us to induce us to cure the 				sick. As soon as these had been treated they went away contented and saying 				they felt well. <span class="numbering-line">187.</span><br />
So we left there also, going to others, by whom we were 				also very well received, and they brought us their sick, who, after we had made 				the sign of the cross over them, would say they were healed, and he who did not 				get well still believed we might cure him. And at what the others whom we had 				treated told they rejoiced and danced so much as not to let us sleep.<span class="numbering-line">188.</span><br />
After we left those we went to many other lodges, but 				thence on there prevailed a new custom. While we were received very well 				everywhere, those who came with us would treat those who received us badly, 				taking away their belongings and plundering their homes, without leaving them 				anything. It grieved us very much to see how those who were so good to us were 				abused. Besides, we dreaded lest this behavior might cause trouble and strife. 				But as we could not venture to interfere or punish the transgressors, we had to 				wait until we might have more authority over them. Furthermore, the sufferers 				themselves, noticing how we felt, comforted us by saying we should not worry; 				that they were so happy at seeing us as to gladly lose their own, considering 				it to be well employed, and besides, that further on they would repay 				themselves from other Indians who were very rich. On that whole journey we were 				much worried by the number of people following us. We could not escape them, 				although we tried, because they were so anxious to touch us, and so obtrusive 				that in three hours we could not get through with them. <span class="numbering-line">189.</span><br />
The following day they brought us all the people of the 				village; most of them had one eye clouded, while others were totally blind from 				the same cause, at which we were amazed. They are well built, of very good 				physique, and whiter than any we had met until then. There we began to see 				mountains, and it seemed as if they swept down from the direction of the North 				Sea, and so, from what the Indians told us, we believe they are fifteen leagues 				from the ocean. <span class="numbering-line">190.</span><br />
From there we went with the Indians towards the mountains 				aforesaid, and they took us to some of their relatives. They did not want to 				lead us anywhere but to their own people, so as to prevent their enemies having 				any share in the great boon which, as they fancied, it was to see us. And as 				soon as we would arrive those that went with us would sack the houses of the 				others; but as these knew of the custom before our coming, they hid some of 				their chattels, and, after receiving us with much rejoicing, they took out the 				things which they had concealed and presented them to us. These were beads and 				ochre, and several little bags of silver. We, following the custom, turned the 				gifts immediately over to the Indians who had come in our company, and after 				they had given these presents they began their dances and celebrations, and 				sent for others from another village near by to come and look at us. In the 				afternoon they all came, and brought us beads, bows, and other little things, 				which we also distributed. <span class="numbering-line">191.</span><br />
The next day, as we were going to leave, they all wanted 				to take us to others of their friends, who dwelt on a spur of the mountains. 				They said there were a great many lodges, and people who would give us much, 				but, as it was out of our way, we did not want to go there, and continued on 				the plain, though near the mountains, thinking them to be not far from the 				coast. All the people there are very bad, and we preferred to cross the 				country, as further inland they were better inclined, and treated us better. We 				also felt sure to find the country more thickly settled and with more 				resources. Finally, we did it because, in crossing the country, we would see 				much more of its particulars, so that, in case God our Lord should be pleased 				to spare one of us and take him back to a land of Christians, he might give an 				account of it. <span class="numbering-line">192.</span><br />
When the Indians saw we were determined not to go whither 				they wanted, they said that nobody lived where we intended to go, neither were 				there tunas nor any other food, and they entreated us to tarry one day longer 				with them, to which we consented. Two Indians were sent out to look for people 				on our proposed route.<span class="numbering-line">193.</span><br />
The next day we departed, taking many of them along, the 				women carrying water, and so great had become our authority that none dared to 				drink without our permission. After going two leagues we met the men sent out 				in search of people, but who had not found any. At this the Indians seemed to 				show grief, and again begged us to take the way of the mountains, but we 				persisted, and, seeing this, they took mournful leave of us and turned back 				down the river to their homes, while we proceeded along the stream upwards. 				<span class="numbering-line">194.</span><br />
Soon we met two women carrying loads. As they descried us 				they stood still, put down their loads, and brought us of what these contained, 				which was cornmeal, and told us that higher up on the river we would meet with 				dwellings, plenty of tunas, and of that same meat. We left them as they were 				going to those from whom we had just taken leave, and walked on until at sunset 				we reached a village of about twenty lodges, where they received us with tears 				and deep sorrow. They already knew that, wherever we arrived, the people would 				be robbed and plundered by those in our company. But, seeing us alone, they 				lost their fear, and gave us tunas, though nothing else. We stayed there over 				night. <span class="numbering-line">195.</span><br />
At daybreak the same Indians we had left the day before 				surprised the lodges, and, as the people were unprepared, in fancied security, 				and had neither time nor place to hide anything, they were stripped of all 				their chattels, at which they wept bitterly. In consolation, the robbers told 				them that we were children of the sun, and had the power to cure or kill, and 				other lies, bigger even than those which they invent to suit their purposes. 				They also enjoined them to treat us with great reverence, and be careful not to 				arouse our wrath; to give us all they had and guide us to where there were many 				people, and that wherever we should come to they should steal and rob 				everything the others had, such being the custom. <span class="numbering-line">196.</span><br />
After giving these instructions, and teaching the people 				how to behave, they returned, and left us with these Indians, who, mindful of 				what the others had said, began to treat us with the same respect and awe, and 				we travelled in their company for three days. They took us to where there were 				many Indians, and went ahead to tell them of our coming, repeating what they 				had heard and adding much more to it, for all these Indians are great gossipers 				and liars, particularly when they think it to be to their benefit. As we neared 				the lodges all the inmates came out to receive us, with much rejoicing and 				display, and, among other things, two of their medicine-men gave us two gourds. 				Thence onward we carried gourds, which added greatly to our authority, since 				they hold these ceremonial objects very high. Our companions sacked the 				dwellings, but as there were many and they only few in number, they could not 				carry away all they took, so that more than half was left to waste. Thence we 				turned inland for more than fifty leagues, following the slopes of the 				mountains, and at the end of them met forty dwellings. <span class="numbering-line">197.</span><br />
There, among other things which they gave us, Andres 				Dorantes got a big rattle of copper, large, on which was represented a face, 				and which they held in great esteem. They said it had been obtained from some 				of their neighbors. Upon asking these whence it had come, they claimed to have 				brought it from the north, where there was much of it and highly prized. We 				understood that, wherever it might have come from, there must be foundries, and 				that metal was cast in molds. Leaving on the next day, we crossed a mountain 				seven leagues long, the stones of which were iron slags. At night we came to 				many dwellings, situated on the banks of a very beautiful river. <span class="numbering-line">198.</span><br />
The inmates of these abodes came to receive us halfways, 				with their children on their backs. They gave us a number of pouches with 				silver and powdered antimony (or lead), with which they paint their faces, and 				many beads and robes of cow-skins, and loaded those who came with us with all 				their chattels. These people ate tunas and pine-nuts; there are in that country 				small trees of the sweet pine, the cones of which are like small eggs, but the 				nuts are better than those of Castilla, because the husks are thin. When still 				green they grind them and make balls that are eaten. When dried they grind the 				nuts with the husks, and eat them as meal. And those who received us, as soon 				as they had touched our bodies, returned to their houses on a run, then came 				again, and never stopped running back and forth. In this way they brought us a 				great many things for our journey. <span class="numbering-line">199.</span><br />
Here they brought to me a man who, they told, a long time 				ago had been shot through the left side of the back with an arrow, the head of 				which stuck close to his heart. He said it gave him much pain, and that on this 				account he was sick. I touched the region of the body and felt the arrowhead, 				and that it had pierced the cartilage. So, with a knife, I cut open the breast 				as far as the place. The arrow point had gotten athwart, and was very difficult 				to remove. By cutting deeper, and inserting the point of the knife, with great 				difficulty I got it out; it was very long. Then, with a deer-bone, according to 				my knowledge of surgery, I made two stitches. After I had extracted the arrow 				they begged me for it, and I gave it to them. The whole village came back to 				look at it, and they sent it further inland that the people there might see it 				also. <span class="numbering-line">200.</span><br />
On account of this cure they made many dances and 				festivities, as is their custom. The next day I cut the stitches, and the 				Indian was well. The cut I had made only showed a scar like a line in the palm 				of the hand, and he said that he felt not the least pain. <span class="numbering-line">201.</span><br />
Now, this cure gave us such fame among them all over the 				country as they were capable of conceiving and respecting. We showed them our 				rattle, and they told us that where it had come from there were a great many 				sheets of the same (metal) buried, that it was a thing they valued highly, and 				that there were fixed abodes at the place. We believe it to be near the South 				Sea, for we always heard that sea was richer (in metal) than the one of the 				north.<span class="numbering-line">202.</span><br />
After leaving these people we travelled among so many 				different tribes and languages that nobody&#8217;s memory can recall them all, and 				always they robbed each other; but those who lost and those who gained were 				equally content. The number of our companions became so large that we could no 				longer control them. <span class="numbering-line">203.</span><br />
Going through these valleys each Indian carried a club 				three palms in length. They all moved in a front, and whenever a hare (of which 				there are many) jumped up they closed in upon the game, and rained such blows 				upon it that it was amazing to see. Thus they drove the hare from one to the 				other, and, to my fancy, it was the most agreeable chase that could be thought 				of, for many a time they would come right to one&#8217;s hands; and when at night we 				camped they had given us so many that each one of us had eight or ten loads. 				Those of the Indians who carried bows would not take part, but went to the 				mountains after deer, and when at night they came back it was with five or six 				deer for each one of us, with birds, quails, and other game; in short, all 				those people could kill they set before us, without ever daring to touch 				anything, even if dying of hunger, unless we blessed it first. Such was their 				custom from the time they joined us. <span class="numbering-line">204.</span><br />
The women brought many mats, with which they built us 				houses, one for each of us and those attached to him. After this we would order 				them to broil all the game, and they did it quickly in ovens built by them for 				the purpose. We partook of everything a little, giving the rest to the 				principal man among those who had come with us for distribution among all. 				Every one then came with the share he had received for us to breathe on it and 				bless it, without which they left it untouched. Often we had with us three to 				four thousand persons. And it was very tiresome to have to breathe on and make 				the sign of the cross over every morsel they ate or drank. For many other 				things which they wanted to do they would come to ask our permission, so that 				it is easy to realize how greatly we were bothered. The women brought us tunas, 				spiders, worms, and whatever else they could find, for they would rather starve 				than partake of anything that had not first passed through our hands. <span class="numbering-line">205.</span><br />
While travelling with those, we crossed a big river coming 				from the north and, traversing about thirty leagues of plains, met a number of 				people that came from afar to meet us on the trail, who treated us like the 				foregoing ones. <span class="numbering-line">206.</span><br />
Thence on there was a change in the manner of reception, 				insofar as those who would meet us on the trail with gifts were no longer 				robbed by the Indians of our company, but after we had entered their homes they 				tendered us all they possessed, and the dwellings also. We turned over 				everything to the principals for distribution. Invariably those who had been 				deprived of their belongings would follow us, in order to repair their losses, 				so that our retinue became very large. They would tell them to be careful and 				not conceal anything of what they owned, as it could not be done without our 				knowledge, and then we would cause their death. So much did they frighten them 				that on the first few days after joining us they would be trembling all the 				time, and would not dare to speak or lift their eyes to Heaven. <span class="numbering-line">207.</span><br />
Those guided us for more than fifty leagues through a 				desert of very rugged mountains, and so arid that there was no game. 				Consequently we suffered much from lack of food., and finally forded a very big 				river, with its water reaching to our chest. Thence on many of our people began 				to show the effects of the hunger and hardships they had undergone in those 				mountains, which were extremely barren and tiresome to travel. <span class="numbering-line">208.</span><br />
The same Indians led us to a plain beyond the chain of 				mountains, where people came to meet us from a long distance. By those we were 				treated in the same manner as before, and they made so many presents to the 				Indians who came with us that, unable to carry all, they left half of it. We 				told the givers to take it back, so as not to have it lost, but they refused, 				saying it was not their custom to take back what they had once offered, and so 				it was left to waste. We told these people our route was towards sunset, and 				they replied that in that direction people lived very far away. So we ordered 				them to send there and inform the inhabitants that we were coming and how. From 				this they begged to be excused, because the others were their enemies, and they 				did not want us to go to them. Yet they did not venture to disobey in the end, 				and sent two women, one of their own and the other a captive. They selected 				women because these can trade everywhere, even if there be war. <span class="numbering-line">209.</span><br />
We followed the women to a place where it had been agreed 				we should wait for them. After five days they had not yet returned, and the 				Indians explained that it might be because they had not found anybody. So we 				told them to take us north, and they repeated that there were no people, except 				very far away, and neither food nor water. Nevertheless we insisted, saying 				that we wanted to go there, and they still excused themselves as best they 				could, until at last we became angry. <span class="numbering-line">210.</span><br />
One night I went away to sleep out in the field apart from 				them; but they soon came to where I was, and remained awake all night in great 				alarm, talking to me, saying how frightened they were. They entreated us not to 				be angry any longer, because, even if it was their death, they would take us 				where we chose. We feigned to be angry still, so as to keep them in suspense, 				and then a singular thing happened. <span class="numbering-line">211.</span><br />
On that same day many fell sick, and on the next day eight 				of them died! All over the country, where it was known, they became so afraid 				that it seemed as if the mere sight of us would kill them. They besought us not 				to be angry nor to procure the death of any more of their number, for they were 				convinced that we killed them by merely thinking of it. In truth, we were very 				much concerned about it, for, seeing the great mortality, we dreaded that all 				of them might die or forsake us in their terror, while those further on, upon 				learning of it, would get out of our way hereafter. We prayed to God our Lord 				to assist us, and the sick began to get well. Then we saw something that 				astonished us very much, and it was that, while the parents, brothers and wives 				of the dead had shown deep grief at their illness, from the moment they died 				the survivors made no demonstration whatsoever, and showed not the slightest 				feeling; nor did they dare to go near the bodies until we ordered their burial. 				<span class="numbering-line">212.</span><br />
In more than fifteen days that we remained with them we 				never saw them talk together, neither did we see a child that laughed or cried. 				One child, who had begun to cry, was carried off some distance, and with some 				very sharp mice-teeth they scratched it from the shoulders down to nearly the 				legs. Angered by this act of cruelty, I took them to task for it, and they said 				it was done to punish the child for having wept in my presence. Their 				apprehensions caused the others that came to see us to give us what they had, 				since they knew that we did not take anything for ourselves, but left it all to 				the Indians. <span class="numbering-line">213.</span><br />
Those were the most docile people we met in the country, 				of the best complexion, and on the whole well built. <span class="numbering-line">214.</span><br />
The sick being on the way of recovery, when we had been 				there already three days, the women whom we had sent out returned, saying that 				they had met very few people, nearly all having gone after the cows, as it was 				the season. So we ordered those who had been sick to remain, and those who were 				well to accompany us, and that, two days&#8217; travel from there, the same women 				should go with us and get people to come to meet us on the trail for our 				reception. <span class="numbering-line">215.</span><br />
The next morning all those who were strong enough came 				along, and at the end of three journeys we halted. Alonso del Castillo and 				Estevanico, the negro, left with the women as guides, and the woman who was a 				captive took them to a river that flows between mountains, where there was a 				village, in which her father lived, and these were the first abodes we saw that 				were like unto real houses. Castillo and Estevanico went to these and, after 				holding parley with the Indians, at the end of three days Castillo returned to 				where he had left us, bringing with him five or six of the Indians. He told how 				he had found permanent houses, inhabited, the people of which ate beans and 				squashes, and that he had also seen maize. <span class="numbering-line">216.</span><br />
Of all things upon earth this caused us the greatest 				pleasure, and we gave endless thanks to our Lord for this news. Castillo said 				that the negro was coming to meet us on the way, near by, with all the people 				of the houses. For that reason we started, and after going a league and a half 				met the negro and the people that came to receive us, who gave us beans and 				many squashes to eat, gourds to carry water in, robes of cowhide, and other 				things. As those people and the Indians of our company were enemies, and did 				not understand each other, we took leave of the latter, leaving them all that 				had been given to us, while we went on with the former and, six leagues beyond, 				when night was already approaching, reached their houses, where they received 				us with great ceremonies. Here we remained one day, and left on the next, 				taking them with us to other permanent houses, where they subsisted on the same 				food also, and thence on we found a new custom. <span class="numbering-line">217.</span><br />
The people who heard of our approach did not, as before, 				come out to meet us on the way, but we found them at their homes, and they had 				other houses ready for us. They were all seated with their faces turned to the 				wall, the heads bowed and the hair pulled over the eyes. Their belongings had 				been gathered in a heap in the middle of the floor, and thence on they began to 				give us many robes of skins. There was nothing they would not give us. They are 				the best formed people we have seen, the liveliest and most capable; who best 				understood us and answered our questions. We called them &#8220;of the cows,&#8221; because 				most of the cows die near therein and because for more than fifty leagues up 				that stream they go to kill many of them. Those people go completely naked, 				after the manner of the first we met. The women are covered with deer-skins, 				also some men, especially the old ones, who are of no use any more in war. <span class="numbering-line">218.</span><br />
The country is well settled. We asked them why they did 				not raise maize, and they replied that they were afraid of losing the crops, 				since for two successive years it had not rained, and the seasons were so dry 				that the moles had eaten the corn, so that they did not dare to plant any more 				until it should have rained very hard. And they also begged us to ask Heaven 				for rain, which we promised to do. We also wanted to know from where they 				brought their maize, and they said it came from where the sun sets, and that it 				was found all over that country, and the shortest way to it was in that 				direction. We asked them to tell us how to go, as they did not want to go 				themselves, to tell us about the way. <span class="numbering-line">219.</span><br />
They said we should travel up the river towards the north, 				on which trail for seventeen days we would not find a thing to eat except a 				fruit called chacan, which they grind between stones; but even then it cannot 				be eaten, being so coarse and dry; and so it was, for they showed it to us and 				we could not eat it. But they also said that, going upstream, we would always 				travel among people who were their enemies, although speaking the same 				language, and who could give us no food, but would receive us very willingly, 				and give us many cotton blankets, hides and other things; but that it seemed to 				them that we ought not to take that road. <span class="numbering-line">220.</span><br />
In doubt as to what should be done, and which was the best 				and most advantageous road to take, we remained with them for two days. They 				gave us beans, squashes and calabashes. Their way of cooking them is so new and 				strange that I felt like describing it here, in order to show how different and 				queer are the devices and industries of human beings. They have no pots. In 				order to cook their food they fill a middle-sized gourd with water, and place 				into a fire such stones as easily become heated, and when they are hot to 				scorch they take them out with wooden tongs, thrusting them into the water of 				the gourd, until it boils. As soon as it boils they put into it what they want 				to cook, always taking out the stones as they cool off and throwing in hot ones 				to keep the water steadily boiling. This is their way of cooking. <span class="numbering-line">221.</span><br />
After two days were past we determined to go in search of 				maize, and not to follow the road to the cows, since the latter carried us to 				the north, which meant a very great circuit, as we held it always certain that 				by going towards sunset we should reach the goal of our wishes. <span class="numbering-line">222.</span><br />
So we went on our way and traversed the whole country to 				the South Sea, and our resolution was not shaken by the fear of great 				starvation, which the Indians said we should suffer (and indeed suffered) 				during the first seventeen days of travel. All along the river, and in the 				course of these seventeen days we received plenty of cowhides, and did not eat 				of their famous fruit (chacan) but our food consisted (for each day) of a 				handful of deer-tallow, which for that purpose we always sought to keep, and so 				endured these seventeen days, at the end of which we crossed the river and 				marched for seventeen days more. At sunset, on a plain between very high 				mountains, we met people who, for one-third of the year, eat but powdered 				straw, and as we went by just at that time, had to eat it also, until, at the 				end of that journey we found some permanent houses, with plenty of harvested 				maize, of which and of its meal they gave us great quantities, also squashes 				and beans, and blankets of cotton, with all of which we loaded those who had 				conducted us thither, so that they went home the most contented people upon 				earth. We gave God our Lord many thanks for having taken us where there was 				plenty to eat. <span class="numbering-line">223.</span><br />
Among the houses there were several made of earth, and 				others of cane matting; and from here we travelled more than a hundred leagues, 				always meeting permanent houses and a great stock of maize and beans, and they 				gave us many deer (-hides?) and blankets of cotton better than those of New 				Spain. They also gave us plenty of beads made out of the coral found in the 				South Sea; many good turquoises, which they get from the north; they finally 				gave us all they had; and Dorantes they presented with five emeralds, shaped as 				arrow-points, which arrows they use in their feasts and dances. As they 				appeared to be of very good quality, I asked whence they got them from, and 				they said it was from some very high mountains toward the north, where they 				traded for them with feather-bushes and parrot-plumes, and they said also that 				there were villages with many people and very big houses. <span class="numbering-line">224.</span><br />
Among those people we found the women better treated than 				in any other part of the Indies as far as we have seen. They wear skirts of 				cotton that reach as far as the knee, and over them half-sleeves of scraped 				deerskin, with strips that hang down to the ground, and which they clean with 				certain roots, that clean very well and thus keep them tidy. The shirts are 				open in front and tied with strings; they wear shoes. <span class="numbering-line">225.</span><br />
All those people came to us that we might touch and cross 				them; and they were so obtrusive as to make it difficult to endure since all, 				sick and healthy, wanted to be crossed. It happened frequently that women of 				our company would give birth to children and forthwith bring them to have the 				sign of the cross made over them and the babes be touched by us. They always 				accompanied us until we were again in the care of others, and all those people 				believed that we came from Heaven. What they do not understand or is new to 				them they are wont to say it comes from above. <span class="numbering-line">226.</span><br />
While travelling with these we used to go the whole day 				without food, until night, and then we would eat so little that the Indians 				were amazed. They never saw us tired, because we were, in reality, so inured to 				hardships as not to feel them any more. We exercised great authority over them, 				and carried ourselves with much gravity, and, in order to maintain it, spoke 				very little to them. It was the negro who talked to them all the time; he 				inquired about the road we should follow, the villages, in short, about 				everything we wished to know. We came across a great variety and number of 				languages, and God our Lord favored us with a knowledge of all, because they 				always could understand us and we understood them, so that when we asked they 				would answer by signs, as if they spoke our tongue and we theirs; for, although 				we spoke six languages, not everywhere could we use them, since we found more 				than a thousand different ones. In that part of the country those who were at 				war would at once make peace and become friendly to each other, in order to 				meet us and bring us all they possessed; and thus we left the whole country at 				peace. <span class="numbering-line">227.</span><br />
We told them, by signs which they understood, that in 				Heaven there was a man called God, by us, who had created Heaven and earth, and 				whom we worshipped as our Lord; that we did as he ordered us to do, all good 				things coming from his hand, and that if they were to do the same they would 				become very happy; and so well were they inclined that, had there been a 				language in which we could have made ourselves perfectly understood, we would 				have left them all Christians. All this we gave them to understand as clearly 				as possible, and since then, when the sun rose, with great shouting they would 				lift their clasped hands to Heaven and then pass them all over their body. The 				same they did at sunset. They are well conditioned people, apt to follow any 				line which is well traced for them. <span class="numbering-line">228.</span><br />
In the village where they had given us the emeralds, they 				also gave Dorantes over six hundred hearts of deer, opened, of which they kept 				always a great store for eating. For this reason we gave to their settlement 				the name of &#8220;village of the hearts.&#8221; Through it leads the pass into many 				provinces near the South Sea, and any one who should attempt to get there by 				another route must surely be lost, as there is no maize on the coast, and they 				eat powdered fox-tail grass, straw, and fish, which they catch in the sea in 				rafts, for they have no canoes. The women cover their loins with straw and 				grass. They are a very shy and surly people. <span class="numbering-line">229.</span><br />
We believe that, near the coast, in a line with the 				villages which we followed, there are more than a thousand leagues of inhabited 				land, where they have plenty of victuals, since they raise three crops of beans 				and maize in the year. There are three kinds of deer, one kind as large as 				calves are in Castilla. The houses in which they live are huts. They have a 				poison, from certain trees of the size of our apple trees. They need but pick 				the fruit and rub their arrows with it; and if there is no fruit they take a 				branch and with its milky sap do the same. Many of those trees are so poisonous 				that if the leaves are pounded and washed in water near by, the deer, or any 				other animal that drinks of it burst at once. In this village we stayed three 				days, and at a day&#8217;s journey from it was another one, where such a rain 				overtook us that, as the river rose high, we could not cross it, and remained 				there fifteen days. <span class="numbering-line">230.</span><br />
During this time Castillo saw, on the neck of an Indian, a 				little buckle from a swordbelt, and in it was sewed a horseshoe nail. He took 				it from the Indian, and we asked what it was; they said it had come from 				Heaven. We further asked who had brought it, and they answered that some men, 				with beards like ours, had come from Heaven to that river; that they had 				horses, lances and swords, and had lanced two of them. <span class="numbering-line">231.</span><br />
As cautiously as possible, we then inquired what had 				become of those men; and they replied they had gone to sea, putting their 				lances into the water and going into it themselves, and that afterwards they 				saw them on top of the waves moving towards sunset. <span class="numbering-line">232.</span><br />
We gave God our Lord many thanks for what we had heard, 				for we were despairing to ever hear of Christians again. On the other hand, we 				were in great sorrow and much dejected, lest those people had come by sea for 				the sake of discovery only. Finally, having such positive notice of them, we 				hastened onward, always finding more traces of the Christians, and we told the 				Indians that we were now sure to find the Christians, and would tell them not 				to kill Indians or make them slaves, nor take them out of their country, or do 				any other harm, and of that they were very glad. <span class="numbering-line">233.</span><br />
We travelled over a great part of the country, and found 				it all deserted, as the people had fled to the mountains, leaving houses and 				fields out of fear of the Christians. This filled our hearts with sorrow, 				seeing the land so fertile and beautiful, so full of water and streams, but 				abandoned and the places burned down, and the people, so thin and wan, fleeing 				and hiding; and as they did not raise any crops their destitution had become so 				great that they ate tree-bark and roots. Of this distress we had our share all 				the way along, because they could provide little for us in their indigence, and 				it looked as if they were going to die. They brought us blankets, which they 				had been concealing from the Christians, and gave them to us, and told us how 				the Christians had penetrated into the country before, and had destroyed and 				burnt the villages, taking with them half of the men and all the women and 				children, and how those who could escaped by flight. Seeing them in this 				plight, afraid to stay anywhere, and that they neither would nor could 				cultivate the soil, preferring to die rather than suffer such cruelties, while 				they showed the greatest pleasure at being with us, we began to apprehend that 				the Indians who were in arms against the Christians might ill-treat us in 				retaliation for what the Christians did to them. But when it pleased God our 				Lord to take us to those Indians, they respected us and held us precious, as 				the former had done, and even a little more, at which we were not a little 				astonished, while it clearly shows how, in order to bring those people to 				Christianity and obedience unto Your Imperial Majesty, they should be well 				treated, and not otherwise. <span class="numbering-line">234.</span><br />
They took us to a village on the crest of a mountain, 				which can be reached only by a very steep trail, where we found a great many 				people, who had gathered there out of dread of the Christians. These received 				us very well, giving us all they had: over two thousand loads of maize, which 				we distributed among the poor, famished people who had led us to the place. The 				next day we dispatched (as we were wont to do) four runners, to call together 				as many as could be reached, to a village three journeys away; and on the next 				day we followed with all the people that were at the place, always meeting with 				signs and vestiges where the Christians had slept. <span class="numbering-line">235.</span><br />
At noon we met our messengers, who told us they had not 				found anybody, because all were hidden in the woods, lest the Christians might 				kill or enslave them; also that, on the night before, they had seen the 				Christians and watched their movements, under cover of some trees, behind which 				they concealed themselves, and saw the Christians take many Indians along in 				chains. At this the people who were with us became frightened, and some turned 				back to give the alarm through the land that Christians were coming, and many 				more would have done the same had we not told them to stay and have no fear, at 				which they quieted down and were comforted. We had Indians with us at the time 				who came from a distance of a hundred leagues, and whom we could not induce to 				go back to their homes. So, in order to reassure them, we slept there that 				night and the next day went further, and slept on the road; and the day after 				those we had sent to explore guided us to where they had seen the Christians. 				Reaching the place in the evening, we clearly saw they had told the truth, and 				also, from the stakes to which the horses had been tied, that there were 				horsemen among them. <span class="numbering-line">236.</span><br />
From here, which is called the river of Petutan, to the 				river which Diego de Guzman reached, there may be, from the place where we 				first heard of the Christians, eighty leagues; then to the village where the 				rain overtook us, twelve leagues; and from there to the South Sea twelve 				leagues. Throughout all that country, wherever it is mountainous, we saw many 				signs of gold, antimony, iron, copper and other metals. Where the permanent 				houses are it is so hot that even in January the air is very warm. From there 				to the southward the land, which is uninhabited as far as the Sea of the North, 				is very barren and poor. There we suffered great and almost incredible 				starvation; and those who roam through that country and dwell in it are very 				cruel people, of evil inclinations and habits. The Indians who live in 				permanent houses and those in the rear of them pay not attention to gold nor 				silver, nor have they any use for either of these metals. <span class="numbering-line">237.</span><br />
Having seen positive traces of Christians and become 				satisfied they were very near, we gave many thanks to our Lord for redeeming us 				from our sad and gloomy condition. Any one can imagine our delight when he 				reflects how long we had been in that land, and how many dangers and hardships 				we had suffered. That night I entreated one of my companions to go after the 				Christians, who were moving through the part of the country pacified and 				quieted by us, and who were three days ahead of where we were. They did not 				like my suggestion, and excused themselves from going, on the ground of being 				tired and worn out, although any of them might have done it far better than I, 				being younger and stronger. <span class="numbering-line">238.</span><br />
Seeing their reluctance, in the morning I took with me the 				negro and eleven Indians and, following the trail, went in search of the 				Christians. On that day we made ten leagues, passing three places where they 				had slept. The next morning I came upon four Christians on horseback, who, 				seeing me in such a strange attire, and in company with Indians, were greatly 				startled. They stared at me for quite a while, speechless; so great was their 				surprise that they could not find words to ask me anything. I spoke first, and 				told them to lead me to their captain, and we went together to Diego de 				Alcaraza, their commander. <span class="numbering-line">239.</span><br />
After I had addressed him he said that he was himself in a 				plight, as for many days he had been unable to capture Indians, and did not 				know where to go, also that starvation was beginning to place them in great 				distress. I stated to him that, in the rear of me, at a distance of ten 				leagues, were Dorantes and Castillo, with many people who had guided us through 				the country. He at once dispatched three horsemen, with fifty of his Indians, 				and the negro went with them as guide, while I remained and asked them to give 				me a certified statement of the date, year, month and day, when I had met them, 				also the condition in which I had come, with which request they complied. <span class="numbering-line">240.</span><br />
From this river to the village called San Miguel, which 				pertains to the government called New Galicia, there are thirty leagues. <span class="numbering-line">241.</span><br />
Five days later Andres Dorantes and Alonso del Castillo 				came with those who had gone in quest of them. They brought along more than six 				hundred Indians, from the village, the people of which the Christians had 				caused to flee to the woods, and who were in hiding about the country. Those 				who had come with us as far as that place had taken them our of their places of 				concealment, turning them over to the Christians. They had also dispatched the 				others who had come that far. <span class="numbering-line">242.</span><br />
When they arrived at where I was Alcaraz begged me to send 				for the people of the villages along the banks of the river, who were hiding in 				the timber,, and he also requested me to order them to fetch supplies. There 				was not occasion for the latter as the Indians always took good care to bring 				us whatever they could; nevertheless, we sent our messengers at once to call 				them, and six hundred persons came with all the maize they had, in pots closed 				with clay, which they had buried for concealment. They also brought nearly 				everything else they possessed, but we only took of the food, giving the rest 				to the Christians for distribution among themselves. <span class="numbering-line">243.</span><br />
Thereupon we had many and bitter quarrels with the 				Christians, for they wanted to make slaves of our Indians, and we grew so angry 				at it that at our departure we forgot to take along many bows, pouches and 				arrows, also the five emeralds, and so they were left and lost to us. We gave 				the Christians a great many cow-skin robes, and other objects, and had much 				trouble in persuading the Indians to return home and plant their crops in 				peace. They insisted upon accompanying us until, according to their custom, we 				should be in the custody of other Indians, because otherwise they were afraid 				to die; besides, as long as we were with them, they had no fear of the 				Christians and of their lances. At all this the Christians were greatly vexed, 				and told their own interpreter to say to the Indians how we were of their own 				race, but had gone astray for a long while, and were people of no luck and 				little heart, whereas they were the lords of the land, whom they should obey 				and serve. <span class="numbering-line">244.</span><br />
The Indians gave all that talk of theirs little attention. 				They parleyed among themselves, saying that the Christians lied, for we had 				come from sunrise, while the others came from where the sun sets; that we cured 				the sick, while the others killed those who were healthy; that we went naked 				and shoeless, whereas the others wore clothes and went on horseback and with 				lances. Also, that we asked for nothing, but gave away all we were presented 				with, meanwhile the others seemed to have no other aim than to steal what they 				could, and never gave anything to anybody. In short, they recalled all our 				deeds, and praised them highly, contrasting them with the conduct of the 				others. <span class="numbering-line">245.</span><br />
This they told the interpreter of the Christians, and made 				understood to the others by means of a language they have among them, and by 				which we understood each other. We call those who use that language properly 				Primahaitu, which means the same as saying Bizcayans. For more than four 				hundred leagues of those we travelled, we found this language in use, and the 				only one among them over that extent of country. Finally, we never could 				convince the Indians that we belonged to the other Christians, and only with 				much trouble and insistency could we prevail upon them to go home. <span class="numbering-line">246.</span><br />
We recommended to them to rest easy and settle again in 				their villages, tilling and planting their fields as usual, which, from lying 				waste, were overgrown with shrubbery, while it is beyond all doubt the best 				land in these Indies, the most fertile and productive of food, where they raise 				three crops every year. It has an abundance of fruit, very handsome rivers, and 				other waters of good virtues. There are many evidences and traces of gold and 				silver; the inhabitants are well conditioned, and willingly attend to the 				Christians, that is, those of the natives that are friendly. They are much 				better inclined than the natives of Mexico; in short, it is a country that 				lacks nothing to make it very good. When the Indians took leave of us they said 				they would do as we had told them, and settle in their villages, provided the 				Christians would not interfere, and so I say and affirm that, if they should 				not do it, it will be the fault of the Christians. <span class="numbering-line">247.</span><br />
After we had dispatched the Indians in peace, and with 				thanks for what they had gone through with and for us, the Christians (out of 				mistrust) sent us to a certain Alcalde Cebreros, who had with him two other 				men. He took us through forests and uninhabited country in order to prevent our 				communicating with the Indians, in reality, also, to prevent us from seeing or 				hearing what the Christians were carrying on. <span class="numbering-line">248.</span><br />
This clearly shows how the designs of men sometimes 				miscarry. We went on with the idea of insuring the liberty of the Indians, and, 				when we believed it to be assured, the opposite took place. The Spaniards had 				planned to fall upon those Indians we had sent back in fancied security and in 				peace, and that plan they carried out. <span class="numbering-line">249.</span><br />
They took us through the timber for two days, with no 				trail, bewildered and without water, so we all expected to die from thirst. 				Seven of our men perished, and many friends whom the Christians had taken along 				could not reach before noon the following day the place, where we found water 				that same night. We travelled with them twenty-five leagues, more or less, and 				at last came to a settlement of peaceable Indians. There the Alcalde left us 				and went ahead, three leagues further, to a place called Culiacan, where 				Melchior Diaz was chief Alcalde and the captain of the province. <span class="numbering-line">250.</span><br />
As soon as the chief Alcalde became informed of our 				arrival, on the same night he came to where we were. He was deeply moved, and 				praised God for having delivered us in His great pity. He spoke to us and 				treated us very well, tendering us, in his name, and in behalf of the Governor, 				Nuño de Guzman, all he had and whatever he might be able to do. He appeared 				much grieved at the bad reception and evil treatment we had met at the hands of 				Alcaraz and the others, and we verily believe that, had he been there at the 				time, the things done to us and the Indians would not have occurred. <span class="numbering-line">251.</span><br />
Passing the night there, we were about to leave in the 				morning of the next day, but the chief Alcalde entreated us to stay. He said 				that by remaining we would render a great service to God and Your Majesty, as 				the country was depopulated, lying waste, and well nigh destroyed. That the 				Indians were hiding in the woods, refusing to come out and settle again in 				their villages. He suggested that we should have them sent for, and urge them, 				in the name of God and of Your Majesty, to return to the plain and cultivate 				the soil again. <span class="numbering-line">252.</span><br />
This struck us as difficult of execution. We had none of 				our Indians with us, nor any of those who usually accompanied us and understood 				such matters. At last we ventured to select two Indians from among those held 				there as captives, and who were from that part of the country. These had been 				with the Christians whom we first met, and had seen the people that came in our 				company, and knew, through the latter, of the great power and authority we 				exercised all through the land, the miracles we had worked, the cures we had 				performed, and many other particulars. With these Indians we sent others from 				the village, to jointly call those who had taken refuge in the mountains, as 				well as those from the river of Petlatlan, where we had met the Christians 				first, and tell them to come, as we wished to talk to them. In order to insure 				their coming, we gave the messengers one of the large gourds we had carried in 				our hands (which were our chief insignia and tokens of great power.) <span class="numbering-line">253.</span><br />
Thus provided and instructed, they left and were absent 				seven days. They came back, and with them three chiefs of those who had been in 				the mountains, and with these were fifteen men. The presented us with beads, 				turquoises, and feathers, and the messengers said the people from the river 				whence we had started could not be found, as the Christians had again driven 				them into the wilderness. <span class="numbering-line">254.</span><br />
Melchior Diaz told the interpreter to speak to the Indians 				in our name and say that he came in the name of God, Who is in heaven, and that 				we had travelled the world over for many years, telling all the people we met 				to believe in God and serve Him, for He was the Lord of everything upon earth, 				Who rewarded the good, whereas to the bad ones He meted out eternal punishment 				of fire. That when the good ones died He took them up to heaven, where all 				lived forever and there was neither hunger nor thirst, nor any other wants, 				only the greatest imaginable glory. But that those who would not believe in Him 				nor obey His commandments he thrust into a huge fire beneath the earth and into 				the company of demons, where the fire never went out, but tormented them 				forever. Moreover, he said that if they became Christians and served God in the 				manner we directed, the Christians would look upon them as brethren and treat 				them very well, while we would command that no harm should be done to them; 				neither should they be taken out of their country, and the Christians would 				become their great friends. If they refused to do so, then the Christians would 				ill treat them and carry them away into slavery. <span class="numbering-line">255.</span><br />
To this they replied through the interpreter that they 				would be very good Christians and serve God. <span class="numbering-line">256.</span><br />
Upon being asked whom they worshipped and to whom they 				offered sacrifices, to whom they prayed for health and water for the fields, 				they said, to a man in Heaven. We asked what was his name, and they said Aguar, 				and that they believed he had created the world and everything in it. <span class="numbering-line">257.</span><br />
We again asked how they came to know this, and they said 				their fathers and grandfathers had told them, and they had known it for a very 				long time; that water and all good things came from him. We explained that this 				being of whom they spoke was the same we called God, and that thereafter they 				should give Him that name and worship and serve Him as we commanded, when they 				would fare very well. <span class="numbering-line">258.</span><br />
They replied that they understood us thoroughly and would 				do as we had told. <span class="numbering-line">259.</span><br />
So we bade them come out of the mountains and be at ease, 				peaceable, and settle the land again, rebuilding their houses. Among these 				houses they should rear one to God, placing at its entrance a cross like the 				one we had, and when Christians came, they should go out to receive them with 				crosses in their hands, in place of bows and other weapons, and take the 				Christians to their homes, giving them to eat of what they had. If they did so, 				the Christians would do them no harm, but be their friends. <span class="numbering-line">260.</span><br />
The promised to do as we ordered, and the captain gave 				them blankets, treating them handsomely, and they went away, taking along the 				two captives that had acted as our messengers. <span class="numbering-line">261.</span><br />
This took place in presence of a scribe (notary) and of a 				great many witnesses. <span class="numbering-line">262.</span><br />
As soon as the Indians had left for their homes and the 				people of that province got news of what had taken place with us, they, being 				friends of the Christians, came to see us, bringing beads and feathers. We 				ordered them to build churches and put crosses in them, which until then they 				had not done. We also sent for the children of the chiefs to be baptized, and 				then the captain pledged himself before God not to make any raid, or allow any 				to be made, or slaves captured from the people and in the country we had set at 				peace again. This vow he promised to keep and fulfill so long until His Majesty 				and the Governor, Nuño de Guzman, or the Viceroy, in his name, would ordain 				something else better adapted to the service of God and of His Majesty. <span class="numbering-line">263.</span><br />
After baptizing the children we left for the village of 				San Miguel, where, on our arrival, Indians came and told how many people were 				coming down from the mountains, settling on the plain, building churches and 				erecting crosses; in short, complying with what we had sent them word to do. 				Day after day we were getting news of how all was being done and completed. 				<span class="numbering-line">264.</span><br />
Fifteen days after our arrival Alcaraz came in with the 				Christians who had been raiding, and they told the captain how the Indians had 				descended from the mountains and settled on the plains; also that villages 				formerly deserted were not well populated, and how the Indians had come out to 				receive them with crosses in their hands, had taken them to their houses, 				giving them of what they had, and how they slept the night there. Amazed at 				these changes and at the sayings of the Indians who said they felt secure, he 				ordered that no harm be done to them, and with this they departed. May God in 				his infinite mercy grant that in the days of Your Majesty and under your power 				and sway, these people become willingly and sincerely subjects of the true Lord 				Who created and redeemed them. We believe they will be, and that your Majesty 				is destined to bring it about, as it will not be at all difficult. <span class="numbering-line">265.</span><br />
For two thousand leagues did we travel, on land, and by 				sea in barges, besides ten months more after our rescue from captivity; 				untiringly did we walk across the land, but nowhere did we meet either 				sacrifices or idolatry. During all that time we crossed from one ocean to the 				other, and from what we very carefully ascertained there may be, from one coast 				to the other and across the greatest width, two hundred leagues. We heard that 				on the shores of the South there are pearls and great wealth, and that the 				richest and best is near there. <span class="numbering-line">266.</span><br />
At the village of San Miguel we remained until after the 				fifteenth of May, because from there to the town of Compostela, where the 				Governor, Nuño de Guzman, resided, there are one hundred leagues of deserted 				country threatened by hostiles, and we had to take an escort along. There went 				with us twenty horsemen, accompanying us as many as forty leagues; afterwards 				we had with us six Christians, who escorted five hundred Indian captives. When 				we reached Compostela, the Governor received us very well, giving us of what he 				had, for us to dress in; but for many days I could bear no clothing, nor could 				we sleep, except on the bare floor. Ten or twelve days later we left for 				Mexico. On the whole trip we were well treated by the Christians; many came to 				see us on the road, praising God for having freed us from so many dangers. We 				reached Mexico on Sunday, the day before the vespers of Saint James, and were 				very well received by the Viceroy and the Marquis of the Valley, who presented 				us with clothing, offering all they had. On the day of Saint James there was a 				festival, with bull-fight and tournament. <span class="numbering-line">267.</span><br />
After taking two months&#8217; rest at Mexico I desired to come 				over to this realm, but when ready to sail in October, a storm wrecked the 				vessel and it was lost. So I determined to wait until winter would be over, as 				in these parts navigation is then very dangerous on account of storms. <span class="numbering-line">268.</span><br />
When winter was past, Andres Dorantes and I left Mexico, 				during Lent, for Vera Cruz, to take a ship there, but had again to wait for 				favorable winds until Palm Sunday. We embarked and were on board more than 				fifteen days, unable to leave on account of a calm, and the vessel began to 				fill with water. I took passage on one of the ships which were in condition to 				leave, while Dorantes remained on the first one, and on the tenth day of the 				month three craft left port. <span class="numbering-line">269.</span><br />
We navigated together for one hundred and fifty leagues; 				afterwards two of the ships dropped behind, and in the course of a night we 				lost track of them. It seems that, as we found out later, their pilots and 				skippers did not venture any further, and returned to port without giving us 				any warning; neither did we hear any more from them. So we kept on, and on the 				fourth of May reached the port of Habana, on the second of June, still hoping 				for the other two vessels to arrive. Then we left. <span class="numbering-line">270.</span><br />
We were afraid of falling in with French craft that only a 				few days before had captured three of ours. <span class="numbering-line">271.</span><br />
At the altitude of the Island of Bermuda a storm overtook 				us, as is quite usual in those parts, according to the people who are wont to 				travel in them, and for a whole night we considered ourselves lost. But it 				pleased God that, when morning came, the storm abated and we could proceed on 				our way. Twenty-nine days after sailing from Habana we had made eleven hundred 				leagues, said to be the distance from it to the settlement of the Azores, and 				the next day we passed the island called of the raven, and met with a French 				vessel at noon. She began to follow us, having with her a caravel taken from 				the Portuguese, and gave us chase. That same evening we saw nine more sail, but 				at such a distance that we could not distinguish whether they were of the same 				nation as our pursuer, or Portuguese. At nightfall the Frenchman was but a 				cannon-shot from our ship, and as soon as it was dark we changed our course so 				as to get away from him. As he was close upon us he saw our maneuver and did 				the same, and this happened three or four times. <span class="numbering-line">272.</span><br />
The Frenchman could have taken us then, but he preferred 				to wait until daylight. It pleased God that, when morning came, we found 				ourselves, as well as the French ship, surrounded by the nine craft we had seen 				the evening before, and which turned out to belong to the Portuguese navy. I 				thank Our Lord for having allowed me to escape from peril on land and sea. <span class="numbering-line">273.</span><br />
When the French saw it was the fleet of Portugal they 				released the caravel, which was filled with negroes. They had taken it along in 				order to make us believe they were Portuguese and to induce us to expect them. 				On separating from the caravel the Frenchman told the skipper and pilot we were 				French also, belonging to their own navy; then they put into their vessel sixty 				oarsmen, and thus, by oar and sail, went away with incredible swiftness. <span class="numbering-line">274.</span><br />
The caravel then approached the galley warning its captain 				that both our vessel and the other were French, so that when we came up to the 				galley and the squadron saw it, believing us to be French, they cleared for 				action and came to attack us. But when we were near enough to them we saluted, 				and they saw we were friends. They had been deceived, suffering the privateer 				to escape by means of his strategy in telling that we were also French. Four 				caravels went in pursuit of him. Having come up with the galley and presented 				our respects, the captain, Diego de Silveira, asked where we came from and what 				we had on board. We told him from New Spain, and that we carried silver and 				gold. He inquired how much it might be, and the skipper informed him that we 				had about three hundred thousand Castellanos. Thereupon the captain exclaimed: 				&#8220;Faith, you come back very rich, although you have a bad craft and miserable 				artillery. That dog of a French renegade has lost a fat morsel, the bastard! 				Now, go ahead, since you escaped; follow me closely, and, God helping, I shall 				lead you back to Spain.&#8221; <span class="numbering-line">275.</span><br />
The caravels that had gone in pursuit of the French soon 				returned because the latter sailed too fast for them and they did not want to 				leave their squadron, which was escorting three ships loaded with spices. <span class="numbering-line">276.</span><br />
We reached the Island of Tercera, where we rested fifteen 				days and took in supplies, also waiting for another ship from India, with the 				same kind of cargo as the three our fleet was escorting. At the end of the 				fifteen days we sailed, all together, for the port of Lisbon, where we arrived 				on the ninth of August, vespers of Saint Laurentius day, of the year 1537. <span class="numbering-line">277.</span><br />
And, in testimony of, that what I have stated in the 				foregoing narrative is true, I hereunto sign my name: <span class="numbering-line">278.</span><br />
Cabeza de Vaca <span class="numbering-line">279.</span></p>
<p><font size="+1"></font></p>
<img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/categories/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/" /> <img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/tags/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/" /> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/gocomments/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/comments/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/godelicious/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/delicious/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/gostumble/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/stumble/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/godigg/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/digg/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/goreddit/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/reddit/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/22/" /></a> <img alt="" border="0" src="http://stats.wordpress.com/b.gif?host=earlyamericas.wordpress.com&blog=1164232&post=22&subd=earlyamericas&ref=&feed=1" /></div>]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/account-of-cabeza-de-vaca/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
	
		<media:content url="http://1.gravatar.com/avatar/b8b55d3867d1a7e554ea70a1decf2a93?s=96&#38;d=identicon&#38;r=G" medium="image">
			<media:title type="html">jimgroom</media:title>
		</media:content>
	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Samuel Champlain, The Foundation of Quebec</title>
		<link>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/samuel-champlain-the-foundation-of-quebec/</link>
		<comments>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/samuel-champlain-the-foundation-of-quebec/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Thu, 27 Sep 2007 02:23:10 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>jimgroom</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Exploration & Contact to 1600]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Samuel Champlain]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Foundation of Quebec]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[champlain]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[contact]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[exploration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[french]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Quebec]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/samuel-champlain-the-foundation-of-quebec/</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Founding of Quebec
An Electronic Edition
Samuel de Champlain   1567-1635
 Original Source:    &#8220;The Founding of Quebec.&#8221; In Old                         South Leaflets Volume IV.       [...]<img alt="" border="0" src="http://stats.wordpress.com/b.gif?host=earlyamericas.wordpress.com&blog=1164232&post=20&subd=earlyamericas&ref=&feed=1" />]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class='snap_preview'><br /><h3><em>Founding of Quebec</em><br />
<font size="-1">An Electronic Edition</font></h3>
<h4>Samuel de Champlain   1567-1635</h4>
<p><font size="-1"> Original Source:    &#8220;The Founding of Quebec.&#8221; In <em>Old                         South Leaflets</em> Volume IV.                     Boston: Directors of the Old South work.                     Old South Meeting House.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1">Copyright 2003. This text   is freely available provided the text is distributed with the header   information provided</font></p>
<p><font size="-1"><a href="//"> Full Colophon Information</a></font></p>
<hr width="50%" />  <font size="+1">The Foundation of Quebec, 1608</font>HAVING returned to France after a stay of three years in New France, I proceeded to Sieur de Monts, and related to him the principal events of which I had been a witness since his departure, and gave him the map and plan of the most remarkable coasts and harbors there. <span class="numbering-line">1.</span><br />
Some time afterward Sieur de Monts determined to continue his undertaking, and complete the exploration of the interior along the great river St. Lawrence, where I had been by order of the late King Henry the Great in the year 1603, for a distance of some hundred and eighty leagues, commencing in latitude 48? 40&#8242;, that is, at Gaspé, at the entrance of the river, as far as the great fall, which is in latitude 45? and some minutes, where our exploration ended, and where boats could not pass as we then thought, since we had not made a careful examination of it as we have since done.<span class="numbering-line">2.</span><br />
Now, after Sieur de Monts had conferred with me several times in regard to his purposes concerning the exploration, he resolved to continue so noble and meritorious an undertaking, notwithstanding the hardships and labors of the past. He honored me with his lieutenancy for the voyage; and, in order to carry out his purpose, he had two vessels equipped, one commanded by Pont Gravé, who was commissioned to trade with the savages of the country and bring back the vessels, while I was to winter in the country.<span class="numbering-line">3.</span><br />
Sieur de Monts, for the purpose of defraying the expenses of the expedition, obtained letters from his majesty for one year, by which all persons were forbidden to traffic in pelts with the savages, on penalties stated in the following commission:–<span class="numbering-line">4.</span><br />
<font size="-1">HENRY BY THE GRACE OF GOD KING OF FRANCE AND NAVARRE, to our beloved and faithful counselors, the officers of our admiralty in Normandy, Brittany, and Guienne, bailiffs, marshals, provosts, judges, or their lieutenants, and to each one of them, according to his authority, throughout the extent of their powers, jurisdictions, and precincts, greeting:<span class="numbering-line">5.</span><br />
Acting upon the information which has been given us by those who have returned from New France, respecting the good quality and fertility of the lands of that country, and the disposition of the people to accept the knowledge of God, We have resolved to continue the settlement previously undertaken there, in order that our subjects may go there to trade without hindrance. And in view of the proposition to us of Sieur de Monts, gentleman in ordinary of our chamber, and our lieutenant-general in that country, to make a settlement, on condition of our giving him means and supplies for sustaining the expense of it, it has pleased us to promise and assure him that none of our subjects but himself shall be permitted to trade in pelts and other merchandise, for the period of one year only, in the lands, regions, harbors, rivers, and highways throughout the extent of his jurisdiction: this we desire to have fulfilled. For these causes and other considerations impelling us thereto, we command and decree that each one of you, throughout the extent of your powers, jurisdictions, and precincts, shall act in our stead and carry out our will in distinctly prohibiting and forbidding all merchants, masters, and captains of vessels, also sailors and others of our subjects, of whatever rank and profession, to fit out any vessels in which to go themselves or send others in order to engage in trade or barter in pelts and other things with the savages of New France, to visit, trade, or communicate with them during the space of one year, within the jurisdiction of Sieur de Monts, on penalty of disobedience, and the entire confiscation of their vessels, supplies, arms, and merchandise for the benefit of Sieur de Monts; and, in order that the punishment of their disobedience may be assured, you will allow, as we have and do allow, the aforesaid Sieur de Monts or his lieutenants to seize, apprehend, and arrest all violators of our present prohibition and order, also their vessels, merchandise, arms, supplies, and victuals, in order to take and deliver them up to the hands of justice, so that action may be taken not only against the persons, but also the property of the offenders, as the case shall require. This is our will, and we bid you to have it at once read and published in all localities and public places within your authority and jurisdiction, as you may deem necessary, by the first one of our officers or sergeants in accordance with this requisition by virtue of these presents, or a copy of the same, properly attested once only by one of our well-beloved and faithful counselors, notaries, and secretaries, to which it is our will that credence should be given as to the present original, in order that none of our subjects may claim ground for ignorance, but that all may obey and act in accordance with our will in this matter. We order, moreover, all captains of vessels, mates, and second mates, and sailors of the same, and others on board of vessels or ships in the ports and harbors of the aforesaid country, to perm it, as we have done, Sieur de Monts, and others possessing power and authority from him, to search the aforesaid vessels which shall have engaged in the fur trade after the present prohibition shall have been made known to them. It is our will that, upon the requisition of the aforesaid Sieur de Monts, his lieutenants, and others having authority, you should proceed against the disobedient and offenders, as the case may require: to this end, we give you power, authority, commission, and special mandate, notwithstanding the act of our council of the 17th day of July last, any hue and cry, Norman charter, accusation, objection, or appeals of whatsoever kind; on account of which and for fear of disregarding which, it is our will that there should be no delay, and, if any of these occur, we have withheld and reserved cognizance of the same to ourselves and our council, apart from all other judges, and have forbidden and prohibited the same to all our courts and judges: for this is our pleasure.<span class="numbering-line">6.</span><br />
Given at Paris the seventh day of January, in the year of grace sixteen hundred and eight, and the nineteenth of our reign.<span class="numbering-line">7.</span></font></p>
<p align="right"><font size="-1">Signed, HENRY.</font></p>
<p>And lower down, by the king, Delomenie. And sealed with the single label of the great seal of yellow wax. <span class="numbering-line">8.</span><br />
Collated with the original by me, counselor, notary, and secretary of the king.<span class="numbering-line">9.</span><br />
I proceeded to Honfleur for embarkation, where I found the vessel of Pont Gravé in readiness. He left port on the 5th of April. I did so on the 13th, arriving at the Grand Bank on the 15th of May, in latitude 45? 15&#8242;. On the 26th we sighted Cape St. Mary, in latitude 46? 45&#8242;, on the Island of Newfoundland. On the 27th of the month we sighted Cape St. Lawrence, on Cape Breton, and also the Island of St. Paul, distant eighty-three leagues from Cape St. Mary. On the 30th we sighted Isle Percée, and Gaspé, in latitude 48? 40&#8242;, distant from seventy to seventy-five leagues.<span class="numbering-line">10.</span><br />
On the 3d of June we arrived before Tadoussac, distant from Gaspé from eighty to ninety leagues; and we anchored in the roadstead of Tadoussac, a league distant from the harbor, which latter is a kind of cove at the mouth of the River Saguenay, and where there are sometimes violent winds, bringing severe cold. It is maintained that from the harbor of Tadoussac it is some forty-five or fifty leagues to the first fall on this river, which comes from the north-northwest. The harbor is small, and can accommodate only about twenty vessels. It has water enough, and is under shelter of the River Saguenay and a little rocky island, which is almost cut by the river. Elsewhere there are very high mountains, with little soil and only rocks and sand, thickly covered with such wood as fir and birch. There is a small pond near the harbor, shut in by mountains covered with wood. There are two points at the mouth: one on the southwest side, extending out nearly a league into the sea, called Point St. Matthew, or otherwise Point aux Allouettes; and another on the north-west side, extending out one-eighth of a league, and called Point of all Devils, from the dangerous nature of the place. The winds from the south-south-east strike the harbor, which are not to be feared; but those, however, from the Saguenay are. The two points above mentioned are dry at low tide. Our vessel was unable to enter the harbor, as the wind and tide were unfavorable. I at once had the boat lowered, in order to go to the port and ascertain whether Pont Gravé had arrived. While on the way, I met a shallop with the pilot of Pont Gravé and a Basque, who came to inform me of what had happened to them because they attempted to hinder the Basque vessels from trading, according to the commission obtained by Sieur de Monts from his Majesty, that no vessels should trade without permission of Sieur de Monts, as well as expressed in it; and that, notwithstanding the notifications which Pont Gravé made in behalf of his Majesty, they did not desist from forcibly carrying on their traffic; and that they have used their arms and maintained themselves so well in their vessels that, discharging all their cannon upon that of Pont Gravé, and letting off many musket-shots, he was severely wounded, together with three of his men, one of whom died, Pont Gravé meanwhile making no resistance, for at the first shower of musketry he was struck down. The Basques came on board of the vessel and took away all the cannon and arms, declaring that they would trade, notwithstanding the prohibition of the King, and that when they were ready to set out from France they would restore to him his cannon and ammunition, and that they were keeping them in order to be in a state of security. Upon hearing all these particulars I was greatly annoyed at such a beginning, which we might have easily avoided.<span class="numbering-line">11.</span><br />
Now, after hearing from the pilot all these things, I asked him why the Basque had come on board of our vessel. He told me that he came in behalf of their master, named Darache, and his companions to obtain assurance from me that I would do them no harm, when our vessel entered the harbor. <span class="numbering-line">12.</span><br />
I replied that I could not give any until I had seen Pont Gravé. The Basque said that, if I had need of anything in their power, they would assist me accordingly. What led them to use this language was simply their recognition of having done wrong, as they confessed, and the fear that they would not be permitted to engage in the whale-fishery. After talking at length, I went ashore to see Pont Gravé, in order to deliberate as to what was to be done. I found him very ill. He related to me in detail all that had happened. We concluded that we could only enter the harbor by force, and that the settlement must not be given up for this year, so that we considered it best, in order not to make a bad cause out of a just one, and thus work our ruin, to give them assurances on my part so long as I should remain there, and that Pont Gravé should undertake nothing against them, but that justice should be done in France, and their differences should be settled there. <span class="numbering-line">13.</span><br />
Darache, master of the vessel, begged me to go on board, where he gave me a cordial reception. After a long conference, I secured an agreement between Pont Gravé and him, and required him to promise that he would undertake nothing against Pont Gravé, or what would be prejudicial to the King and Sieur de Monts; that, if he did the contrary, I should regard my promise as null and void. This was agreed to, and signed by each.<span class="numbering-line">14.</span><br />
In this place were a number of savages who had come for traffic in furs, several of whom came to our vessels with their canoes, which are from eight to nine paces long, and about a pace or pace and a half broad in their middle, growing narrower toward the two ends. They are very apt to turn over, in case one does not understand managing them, and are made of birch bark, strengthened on the inside by little ribs of white cedar, very neatly arranged. They are so light that a man can easily carry one. Each can carry a weight equal to that of a pipe. When they want to go overland to a river where they have business, they carry them with them. From Chouacoet along the coast as far as the harbor of Tadoussac, they are all alike. <span class="numbering-line">15.</span><br />
After this agreement, I had some carpenters set to work to fit up a little barque of twelve or fourteen tons, for carrying all that was needed for our settlement, which, however, could not be got ready before the last of June.<span class="numbering-line">16.</span><br />
Meanwhile I managed to visit some parts of the river Saguenay, a fine river, which has the incredible depth of one hundred and fifty to two hundred fathoms. About fifty leagues from the mouth of the harbor there is, as is said, a great waterfall, descending from a very high elevation with great impetuosity. There are some islands in this river, very barren, being only rocks covered with small furs and heathers. It is half a league broad in places, and a quarter of a league at its mouth, where the current is so strong that at three-quarters flood-tide in the river it is still running out. All the land that I have seen consists only of mountains and rocky promontories, for the most part covered with fir and birch, a very unattractive country on both sides of the river. In a word, it is mere wastes, uninhabited by either animals or birds; for, going out hunting in places which seemed to me the most pleasant, I found only some very small birds, such as swallows and river birds, which go there in summer. At other times there are none whatever, in consequence of the excessive cold. The river flows from the north-west.<span class="numbering-line">17.</span><br />
The savages told me that after passing the first fall, they meet with eight others, when they go to a day&#8217;s journey without finding any. Then they pass ten others, and enter a lake, which they are three days in crossing, and they are easily able to make ten leagues a day upstream. At the end of the lake there dwells a migratory people. Of the three rivers which flow into this lake, one comes from the north, very near the sea, where they consider it much colder than in their own country; and the other two from other directions in the interior, where are migratory savages, living only from hunting, and where our savages carry the merchandise we give them for their furs, such as beaver, marten, lynx, and otter, which are found there in large numbers, and which they then carry to our vessels. These people of the north report to our savages that they see the salt sea; and, if that is true, as I think it certainly is, it can be nothing but a gulf entering the interior on the north. The savages say that the distance from the north sea to the port of Tadoussac is perhaps forty-five or fifty days&#8217; journey, in consequence of the difficulties presented by the roads, rivers and country, which is very mountainous, and where there is snow for the most part of the year. This is what I have definitely ascertained in regard to this river. I have often wished to explore it, but could not do so without the savages, who were unwilling that I or any of our party should accompany them. Nevertheless, they have promised that I shall do so. This exploration would be desirable, in order to remove the doubts of many persons in regard to the existence of this sea on the north, where it is maintained that the English have gone in these latter years to find a way to China.<span class="numbering-line">18.</span><br />
I set out from Tadoussac the last day of the month to go to Quebec. We passed near the island called Hare Island, distant six leagues from the above named port; it is two leagues from the northern, and nearly four leagues from the southern shore. From Hare Island we proceeded to a little river, dry at low tide, up which some seven hundred or eight hundred paces there are two falls. We named it Salmon River, since we caught some of these fish in it. Coasting along the north shore, we came to a point extending into the river, which we called Cape Dauphin, distant three leagues from Salmon River. Thence we proceeded to another, which we named Eagle Cape, distant eight leagues from Cape Dauphin. Between the two there is a large bay, at the extremity of which there is a little river dry at low tide. From Eagle Cape we proceeded to Isle aux Coudres, a good league distant, which is about a league and a half long. It is nearly level, and grows narrower towards the two ends. On the western side there are meadows, and rocky points extending some distance out into the river On the south-west side it is very reefy, yet very pleasant in consequence of the woods surrounding it. It is distant about half a league from the northern shore, where is a little river extending some distance into the interior. We named it Riviere du Gouffre, since abreast of it the tide runs with extraordinary rapidity; and, although it has a calm appearance, it is always much agitated, the depth there being great: but the river itself is shallow, and there are many rocks at and about its mouth. Coasting along from Isle aux Coudres, we reached a cape which we named Cap de Tourmente, five leagues distant; and we gave it this name because, however little wind there may be, the water rises there as if it were full tide. At this point the water begins to be fresh. Thence we proceeded to the Isle d=Orleans, a distance of two leagues, on the south side of which are numerous islands, low, covered with trees and very pleasant, with large meadows, having plenty of game, some being, so far as I could judge, two leagues in length, others a trifle more or less. About these islands are many rocks, also very dangerous shallows, some two leagues distant from the main land on the south. All this shore, both north and south, from Tadoussac to the Island of Orleans, is mountainous, and the soil very poor. The wood is pine, fir, and birch only, with very ugly rocks, so that in most places one could not make his way.<span class="numbering-line">19.</span><br />
Now we passed along south of the Island of Orleans, which is a league and a half distant from the main land and a half a league on the north side, being six leagues in length, and one in breadth, or in some places a league and a half. On the north side, it is very pleasant, on account of the great extent of woods and meadows there; but it is very dangerous sailing, in consequence of the numerous points and rocks between the main land and the island, on which are numerous fine oaks and in some places nut-trees, and on the borders of the woods wines and other trees such as we have in France. This place is the commencement of the fine and fertile country of the great river, and is distant one hundred and twenty leagues from its mouth. Off the end of the island is a torrent of water on the north shore, proceeding from a lake ten leagues in the interior: it comes down from a height nearly twenty-five fathoms, above which the land is level and pleasant, although further inland are seen high mountains appearing to be from fifteen to twenty leagues distant.<span class="numbering-line">20.</span><br />
From the Island of Orleans to Quebec the distance is a league. I arrived there on the 3rd of July, when I searched for a place suitable for our settlement; but I could find none more convenient or better suited than the point of Quebec, so called by the savages, which was covered with nut-trees. I at once employed a portion of our workmen in cutting them down, that we might construct our habitations there: one I set to sawing boards, another to making a cellar and digging ditches, another I sent to Tadoussac with the barque to get supplies, which was promptly accomplished through the zeal of all, and my attention to the work.<span class="numbering-line">21.</span><br />
Some days after my arrival at Quebec a locksmith conspired against the service of the king. His plan was to put me to death, and, getting possession of our fort, to put into the hands of the Basques or Spaniards, then at Tadoussac, beyond which vessels cannot go, from not having a knowledge of the route, nor of the banks and rocks on the way. <span class="numbering-line">22.</span><br />
In order to execute his wretched plan, by which he hoped to make his fortune, he suborned four of the worst characters, as he supposed, telling them a thousand falsehoods, and presenting to them prospects of acquiring riches. <span class="numbering-line">23.</span><br />
These four men, having been won over, all promised to act in such a manner as to gain the rest over to their side, so that, for the time being, I had no one with me in whom I could put confidence, which gave them still more hope of making their plan succeed; for four or five of my companions, in whom they knew that I put confidence, were on board of the barques, for the purpose of protecting the provisions and supplies necessary for our settlement.<span class="numbering-line">24.</span><br />
In a word, they were so skillful in carrying out their intrigues with those who remained that they were on the point of gaining all over to their cause, even my lackey, promising them many things which they could not have fulfilled.<span class="numbering-line">25.</span><br />
Being now all agreed, they made daily different plans as to how they should put me to death, so as not to be accused of it, which they found to be a difficult thing. But the devil, blindfolding them all and taking away their reason and every possible difficulty, they determined to take me while unarmed, and strangle me, or to give a false alarm at night, and shoot me as I went out, in which manner they judged that they would accomplish their work sooner than otherwise. They made a mutual promise not to betray each other, on penalty that the first one who opened his mouth should be poniarded. They were to execute their plan in four days, before the arrival of our barques, otherwise they would have been unable to carry out their scheme.<span class="numbering-line">26.</span><br />
On this very day one of our barques arrived, with our pilot, Captain Testu, a very discreet man. After the barque was unloaded, and ready to return to Tadoussac, there came to him a locksmith, named Natel, an associate of Jean du Val, the head of the conspiracy, who told him that he had promised the rest to do just as they did, but that he did not in fact desire the execution of the plot, yet did not dare to make a disclosure in regard to it from fear of being poniarded. <span class="numbering-line">27.</span><br />
Antoine Natel made the pilot promise that he would make no disclosure in regard to what he should say, since, if his companions should discover it, they would put him to death. The pilot gave him his assurance in all particulars, and asked him to state the character of the plot which they wished to carry out. This Natel did at length, when the pilot said to him: &#8220;My friend you have done well to disclose such a malicious design, and you show that you are an upright man, and under the guidance of the Holy Spirit. But these things cannot be passed by without bringing them to the knowledge of Sieur de Champlain, that he may make provision against them, and I promise you that I will prevail upon him to pardon you and the rest. And I will at once,&#8221; said the pilot, &#8220;go to him without exciting any suspicion; and do you go about your business, listening to all they may say, and not troubling yourself about the rest.&#8221;<span class="numbering-line">28.</span><br />
The pilot came at once to me, in a garden which I was having prepared, and said that he wished to speak to me in a private place, where we could be alone. I readily assented, and we went into the wood, where he related to me the whole affair. I asked who had told it to him. He begged me to pardon him who had made the disclosure, which I consented to do, although he ought to have addressed himself to me. He was afraid, he replied, that you would become angry, and harm him. I told him that I was able to govern myself better than that in such a matter, and desired him to have the man come to me, that I might hear the statement. He went, and brought him all trembling with fear lest I should do him harm. I reassured him, telling him not to be afraid, that he was in a place of safety, and that I should pardon him for all that he had done, together with the others, provided he would tell me in full the truth in regard to the whole matter, and the motive which had impelled them to it. &#8220;Nothing,&#8221; he said, &#8220;had impelled them, except that they had imagined that, by giving up the place into the hands of the Basques or Spaniards, they might all become rich, and that they did not want to go back to France.&#8221; He also related to me the remaining particulars in regard to their conspiracy.<span class="numbering-line">29.</span><br />
After having heard and questioned him, I directed him to go about his work. Meanwhile I ordered the pilot to bring up his shallop, which he did. Then I gave two bottles of wine to a young man, directing him to say to these four worthies, the leaders of the conspiracy, that it was a present of wine, which his friends at Tadoussac had given him, and that he wished to share it with them. This they did not decline, and at evening were on board the barque where he was to give them the entertainment. I lost no time in going there shortly after, and caused them to be seized and held until the next day. <span class="numbering-line">30.</span><br />
Then were my worthies astonished indeed. I at once had all get up, for it was about ten o&#8217;clock in the evening, and pardoned them all on condition that they would disclose to me the truth in regard to all that had occurred, which they did, when I had them retire. The next day I took the depositions of all, one after the other, in the presence of the pilot and sailors of the vessel, which I had put down in writing; and they were well pleased, as they said, since they had lived only in fear of each other, especially of the four knaves who had ensnared them. But now they lived in peace, satisfied, as they declared, with the treatment which they had received.<span class="numbering-line">31.</span><br />
The same day I had six pairs of handcuffs made for the authors of the conspiracy: one for our surgeon, named Bonnerme, one for another, named La Taille, whom the four conspirators had accused, which, however, proved false, and consequently they were given their liberty.<span class="numbering-line">32.</span><br />
This being done, I took my worthies to Tadoussac, begging Pont Gravé to do me the favor of guarding them, since I had as yet no secure place for keeping them, and as we were occupied in constructing our places of abode. Another object was to consult with him, and others on the ship, as to what should be done in the premises. We suggested that, after he had finished his work at Tadoussac, he should come to Quebec with the prisoners, where we should have them confronted with their witnesses, and, after giving them a hearing, order justice to be done according to the offense which they had committed.<span class="numbering-line">33.</span><br />
I went back the next day to Quebec, to hasten the completion of our storehouse, so as to secure our provisions, which had been misused by all those scoundrels, who spared nothing, without reflecting how they could find more when these failed; for I could not obviate the difficulty until the storehouse should be completed and shut up. <span class="numbering-line">34.</span><br />
Pont Gravé arrived some time after me, with the prisoners, which caused uneasiness to the workmen who remained, since they feared that I should pardon them, and that they would avenge themselves upon them for revealing their wicked design. <span class="numbering-line">35.</span><br />
We had them brought face to face, and they affirmed before them all which they had stated in their depositions, the prisoners not denying it, but admitting that they had acted in a wicked manner, and should be punished, unless mercy might be exercised towards them; accusing, above all, Jean du Val, who had been trying to lead them into such a conspiracy from the time of their departure from France. Du Val knew not what to say, except that he deserved death, that all stated in the depositions was true, and that he begged for mercy upon himself and the others, who had given in their adherence to his pernicious purposes.<span class="numbering-line">36.</span><br />
After Pont Gravé and I, the captain of the vessel, surgeon, mate, second mate, and other sailors had heard their depositions and face to face statements, we adjudged that it would be enough to put to death Du Val, as the instigator of the conspiracy; and that he might serve as an example to those who remained, leading them to deport themselves correctly in future, in the discharge of their duty; and that the Spaniards and Basques, of whom there were large numbers in the country, might not glory in the event. We adjudged that the three others be condemned to be hung, but that they should be taken to France and put into the hands of Sieur de Monts, that such ample justice might be done them as he should recommend; that they should be sent with all the evidence of their sentence, as well as that of Jean du Val, who was strangled and hung at Quebec, and his head was put on the end of a pike, to be set up in the most conspicuous place on our fort. <span class="numbering-line">37.</span><br />
After all these occurrences, Pont Gravé set out from Quebec, on the 18th of September, to return to France with the three prisoners. After he had gone, all who remained conducted themselves correctly in the discharge of their duty.<span class="numbering-line">38.</span><br />
I had the work of our quarters continued, which was composed of three buildings of two stories. Each one was three fathoms long, and two and a half wide, with a fine cellar six feet deep. I had a gallery made all around our buildings, on the outside, at the second story, which proved very convenient. There were also ditches, fifteen feet wide and six deep. On the other side of the ditches I constructed several spurs, which enclosed a part of the dwelling, at the points where we placed our cannon. Before the habitation there is a place four fathoms wide and six or seven long, looking out upon the riverbank. Surrounding the habitation are very good gardens, and a place on the north side some hundred or hundred and twenty paces long and fifty or sixty wide. Moreover, near Quebec, there is a little river, coming from a lake in the interior, distant six or seven leagues from our settlement. I am of the opinion that this river, which is north a quarter north-west from our settlement, is the place where Jacques Cartier wintered, since there are still, a league up the river, remains of what seems to have been a chimney, the foundation of which has been found, and indications of there having been ditches surrounding their dwelling, which was small. We found, also, large pieces of hewn, worm-eaten timber, and some three or four cannon-balls. All these things show clearly that there was a settlement there founded by Christians; and what leads me to say and believe that it was that of Jacques Cartier is the fact that there is no evidence whatever that any one wintered and built a house in these places except Jacques Cartier, at the time of his discoveries. This place, as I think, must have been called St. Croix, as he named it, which name has since been transferred to another place fifteen leagues west of our settlement. But there is no evidence of his having wintered in the place now called St. Croix, nor in any other there, since in this direction there is no river or other place large enough for vessels except the main river or that of which I spoke above; here there is a half a fathom of water at low tide, many rocks, and a bank at the mouth, for vessels, if kept in the main river, where there are strong currents and tides, and ice in the winter, drifting along, would run the risk of being lost; especially as there is a sandy point extending out into the river, and filled with rocks, between which we have found, within the last three years, a passage not before discovered; but one must go through cautiously, in consequence of the dangerous points there. This place is exposed to the north-west winds; and the river runs as if it were a fall, the tide ebbing two and a half fathoms. There are no signs of buildings here, nor any indications that a man of judgment would settle in this place, there being many other better ones, in case one were obliged to make a permanent stay. I have been desirous of speaking at length on this point, since many believe that the abode of Jacques Cartier was here, which I do not believe, for the reasons here given; for Cartier would have left to posterity a narrative of the matter, as he did in the case of all he saw and discovered; and I maintain that my opinion is the true one, as can be shown by the history which he has left in writing.<span class="numbering-line">39.</span><br />
As still further proof that this place now called St. Croix is not the place where Jacques Cartier wintered, as most persons think, this is what he says about it in his discoveries, taken from his history; namely, that he arrived at the Isle aux Coudres on the 5th of December; 1535, which he called by this name, as hazel-nuts were found there. There is a strong tidal current in this place; and he says that it is three leagues long, but it is quite enough to reckon a league and a half. On the 7th of the month, Notre Dame Day, he set out from this Island to go up the river, in which he saw fourteen islands, distant seven or eight leagues from Isle aux Coudres on the south. He errs somewhat in this estimation, for it is not more than three leagues. He also says that the place where the islands are is the commencement of the land or province of Canada, and that lie reached an island ten leagues long and five wide, where extensive fisheries are carried on, fish being here, in fact, very abundant, especially the sturgeon. But its length is not more than six leagues, and its breadth two, – a fact well recognized now. He says also that he anchored between this island and the main land on the north, the smallest passage, and a dangerous one, where he landed two savages whom he had taken to France, and that, after stopping in this place some time with the people of the country, he sent for his barques and went farther up the river with the tide, seeking a harbor and place of security for his ships. He says, farther, that they went on up the river, coasting along this island, the length of which he estimates at ten leagues ; and after it was passed they found a very fine and pleasant bay, containing a little river and bar harbor, which they found very favorable for sheltering their vessels. This they named St. Croix, since he arrived there on this day ; and at the time of the voyage of Cartier the place was called Stadaca, but the note call it Quebec. He says, also, that after he had examined this place he returned to get his vessels for passing the winter there.<span class="numbering-line">40.</span><br />
Now we may conclude, accordingly, that the distance is only five leagues from the Isle aux Coudres to the Isle of Orleans, at the western extremity of which the river is very broad ; and at which bay, as Cartier calls it, there is no other river than that which he called St. Croix, a good league distant from the Isle of Orleans, in which, at low tide, there is only half a fathom of water. It is very dangerous for vessels at its mouth, there being a large number of spurs; that is, rocks scattered here and there. It is accordingly necessary to place buoys in order to enter, there being, as I have stated, three fathoms of water at ordinary tides, and four fathoms, or four and a half generally, at the great tides at full flood. It is only fifteen hundred paces from our habitation, which is higher up the river; and, as. I have stated, there is no other river up to the place note called St. Croix where vessels can lie, there being only little brooks. The shores are flat and dangerous, which Cartier does not mention until the time that he sets out from St. Croix, now called Quebec, where lie left his vessels, and built his place of abode, as is seen from what follows.<span class="numbering-line">41.</span><br />
On the 19th of September he set out from St. Croix, where his vessels were, setting sail with the tide up the river, which they found very pleasant, as well on account of the woods, vines, and dwellings, which were there in his time, as for other reasons. They cast anchor twenty-five leagues from the entrance to the land of Canada; I that is, at the western extremity of the Isle of Orleans, so called by Cartier. What is now called St. Croix was then called Achelacy, at a narrow pass where the river is very swift and dangerous on account of the rocks and other things, and which can only be passed at flood-tide. Its distance from Quebec and the river where Cartier wintered is fifteen leagues.<span class="numbering-line">42.</span><br />
Now, throughout the entire extent of this river, from Quebec to the great fall, there are no narrows except at the place now called St. Croix, the name of which has been transferred from one place to another one, which is very dangerous, as my description shows. And it is very apparent, from his narrative, that this was not the site of his habitation, as is claimed, but that the latter was near Quebec, and that no one had entered into a special investigation of this matter before my doing so in my voyages. For the first time I was told that he dwelt in this place, I was greatly astonished, finding no trace of a river for vessels, as he states there was. This led me to make a careful examination, in order to remove the suspicion and doubt of many persons in regard to the matter.</p>
<img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/categories/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/" /> <img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/tags/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/" /> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/gocomments/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/comments/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/godelicious/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/delicious/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/gostumble/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/stumble/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/godigg/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/digg/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/" /></a> <a rel="nofollow" href="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/goreddit/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/"><img alt="" border="0" src="http://feeds.wordpress.com/1.0/reddit/earlyamericas.wordpress.com/20/" /></a> <img alt="" border="0" src="http://stats.wordpress.com/b.gif?host=earlyamericas.wordpress.com&blog=1164232&post=20&subd=earlyamericas&ref=&feed=1" /></div>]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/samuel-champlain-the-foundation-of-quebec/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
	
		<media:content url="http://1.gravatar.com/avatar/b8b55d3867d1a7e554ea70a1decf2a93?s=96&#38;d=identicon&#38;r=G" medium="image">
			<media:title type="html">jimgroom</media:title>
		</media:content>
	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Thomas Hariot, From A briefe and true report of the new found land of Virginia</title>
		<link>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/thomas-hariot-from-a-briefe-and-true-report-of-the-new-found-land-of-virginia/</link>
		<comments>http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/thomas-hariot-from-a-briefe-and-true-report-of-the-new-found-land-of-virginia/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Thu, 27 Sep 2007 01:44:05 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>jimgroom</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A briefe and true report of the new found land of Virgi]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Exploration & Contact to 1600]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Thomas Hariot]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[contact]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[exploration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[From A briefe and true report of the new found land of]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://earlyamericas.wordpress.com/2007/09/27/thomas-hariot-from-a-briefe-and-true-report-of-the-new-found-land-of-virginia/</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[From A briefe and true report of the new found land of 			 Virginia
An Electronic Edition
  			 Thomas Hariot  			 1560-1621
 Original Source:   		  A briefe and true report of the new found land of 			 Virginia (Frankfurt, 1590)
Copyright 2003. This text is freely available provided the text is 				distributed [...]<img alt="" border="0" src="http://stats.wordpress.com/b.gif?host=earlyamericas.wordpress.com&blog=1164232&post=17&subd=earlyamericas&ref=&feed=1" />]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class='snap_preview'><br /><h3>From<em> A briefe and true report of the new found land of 			 Virginia</em><br />
<font size="-1">An Electronic Edition</font></h3>
<h4>  			 Thomas Hariot  			 1560-1621</h4>
<p><font size="-1"> Original Source:   		  A briefe and true report of the new found land of 			 Virginia (Frankfurt, 1590)</font></p>
<p><font size="-1">Copyright 2003. This text is freely available provided the text is 				distributed with the header information provided.</font></p>
<p><font size="-1"><a href="//"> Full Colophon Information</a></font></p>
<hr width="50%" />  		  		    			 A briefe and true report of the new found land 				of Virginia, of the commodities and of the nature and man ners of the naturall 				inhabitants: Discouered bÿ the English Colony there seated by Sir Richard 				Greinuile Knight In the yeere 1585. Which remained vnder the gouernment of 				twelue monethes, At the speciall charge and direction of the Honourable SIR 				WALTER RALEIGH Knight, lord Warden of the stanneries Who therein hath beene 				fauoured and authorised bÿ her MAIESTIE :and her letters patents: This fore 				booke Is made in English By Thomas Hariot; seruant to the abouenamed Sir 				WALTER, a member of the Colonÿ, and there imploÿed in discouering. CVM GRATIA 				ET PRIVILEGIO CÆS.MATIS SPECIALD FRANCOFORTI AD MOENVM TYPIS IOANNIS WECHELI, 				SVMTIBVS VERO THEODORI DE BRY ANNO CD D XC. VENALES REPERIVNTVR IN OFFICINA 				SIGISMVNDI FEIRABENDII   		  TO THE RIGHT WORTHIE AND HONOVRABLE, SIR VVALTER RALEGH, 				KNIGHT, SENESCHAL OF THE DVCHIES OF Cornewall and Exeter, and L. Warden of the 				stannaries in Deuon and Cornewall, T.B. wisheth true felicitie.<em>SIR, seeing that the parte of the Worlde, 				which is betwene the FLORIDA and the Cap BRETON nowe nammed VIRGINIA, to the 				honneur of yours most souueraine Layde and Queene ELIZABETZ, hath ben 				descouuerd by yours meanes. And great chardges. And that your Collonye hath 				been theer established to your great honnor and prayse, and noelesser proffit 				vnto the common welth: Yt ys good raison that euery man euertwe him selfe for 				to showe the benefit which they haue receue of yt. Theerfore, for my parte I 				haue been allwayes Desirous for to make yow knowe the good will that I haue to 				remayne still your most humble særuant. I haue thincke that I cold faynde noe 				better occasion to declare yt, then takinge the paines to cott in copper (the 				most diligent ye and well that wear in my possible to doe) the Figures which 				doe leuelye represent the forme aud maner of the Inhabitants of the sane 				countrye with theirs ceremonies, sollemne,, feastes, and the manner and 				situation of their Townes of Villages. Addinge vnto euery figure a brief 				declaration of the same, to that ende that cuerye man cold the better 				vnderstand that which is in liuely represented. Moreouer I haue thincke that 				the aforesaid figures wear of greater commendation, If somme Histoire which 				traitinge of the commodites and fertillitye of the rapport which Thomas Hariot 				hath lattely sett foorth, and haue causse them booth togither to be printed for 				to dedicated vnto you, as a thiuge which by reigtte dooth allreadye apparteyne 				vnto you. Therfore doe I creaue that you will accept this little Booke, and 				take yt In goode partte. And desiring that fauor that you will receue me in the 				nomber of one of your most humble seruantz, besechinge the lord to blese and 				further you in all yours good doinges and actions, and allso to preserue, and 				keepe you allwayes in good helthe. And so I comitt you unto the almyhttie, from 				Franckfort the first of Apprill 1590.</em><span class="numbering-line">1.</span><br />
Your most humble seruant,</p>
<p align="right">THEODORVS de BRY.</p>
<p align="right">&nbsp;</p>
<p><strong>TO THE ADVENTVRERS, FAVORERS, AND VVELVVILLERS OF THE 				ENTERPRISE FOR THE INHABITTING and planting in VIRGINIA.</strong></p>
<p>SINCE the first vndertaking by Sir Walter Ralegh to deale 				in the action of discouering of that Countrey which is now called and known by 				the name of VIRGINIA; many voyages hauing bin thiter made at sundrie times to 				his great charge; as first in the yeere 1584. and afterwardes in the yeeres 				1585. 1586. and now of late this last yeare of 1587. There haue bin diuers and 				variable reportes with some slaunderous and shamefull speeches bruited abroade 				by many that returned from thence. Especially of that discouery which was made 				by the Colony transported by Sir Richard Greinuile in the yeare 1585. being of 				all the others the most principal and as yet of most effect, the time of their 				abode in the countrey beeing a whole yeare, when as in the other voyage before 				they staied but sixe weekes; and the others after were onelie for supply and 				transportation, nothing more being discouered then had been before. Which 				reports haue not done a litle wrong to many that otherwise would have also 				fauoured &amp; aduentured in the action, to the honour and benefite of our 				nation, besides the particular profite and credite which would redound to them 				selues the dealers therein; as I hope by the sequele of euents to the shame of 				those that haue auouched the contrary shalbe manifest: if you the aduenturers, 				fauourers, and welwillers do but either encrease in number, or in opinion 				continue, or hauing bin doubtfull renewe your good liking and furtherance to 				deale therein according to the worthinesse thereof alreadye found and as you 				shall vnderstand hereafter to be requisite. Touching which woorthines through 				cause of the diuersitie of relations and reportes, manye of your opinions 				coulde not bee firme, nor the mindes of some that are well disposed, bee setled 				in any certaintie. <span class="numbering-line">2.</span><br />
I haue therefore thought it good beeing one that haue beene 				in the discouerie and in dealing with the natuall inhabitantes specially 				imploied; and hauing therefore seene and knowne more then the ordinaire: to 				imparte so much vnto you of the fruites of our labours, as that you may knowe 				howe iniuriously the enterprise is slaundered. And that in publike manner at 				this present chiefelie for two respectes. <span class="numbering-line">3.</span><br />
First that some of you which are yet ignorant or doubtfull 				of the state thereof, may see that there is sufficiẽt cause why the cheefe 				enterpriser with the fauour of her Maiestie, notwithstanding suche reportes; 				hath not onelie since continued the action by sending into the countrey againe, 				and replanting this last yeere a new Colony; but is also readie, according as 				the times and meanes will affoorde, to follow and prosecute the same. <span class="numbering-line">4.</span><br />
Secondly, that you seeing and knowing the continuance of the 				action by the view hereof you may generally know &amp; learne what the countrey 				is; &amp; therevpon cõsider how your dealing therein if it proceede, may 				returne you profit and gaine; bee it either by inhabitting &amp; planting or 				otherwise in furthering thereof.<span class="numbering-line">5.</span><br />
And least that the substance of my relation should be 				doubtful vnto you, as of others by reason of their diuersitie: I will first 				open the cause in a few wordes wherefore they are so different; referring my 				selue to your fauourable constructions, and to be adiudged of as by good 				consideration you shall finde cause. <span class="numbering-line">6.</span><br />
Of our companie that returned some for their misdemenour and 				ill dealing in the countrey, haue beene there worthily punished; who by reason 				of their badde natures, haue maliciously not onelie spoken ill of their 				Gouernours; but for their sakes slaundered the countrie it selfe. The like also 				haue those done which were of their confort.<span class="numbering-line">7.</span><br />
Some beeing ignorant of the state thereof, nothwithstanding 				since their returne amongest their friendes and acquaintance and also others, 				especially if they were in companie where they might not be gainesaide; woulde 				seeme to know so much as no men more; and make no men so great trauailers as 				themselues. They stood so much as it maie seeme vppon their credite and 				reputation that hauing been a twelue moneth in the countrey, it woulde haue 				beene a great disgrace vnto them as they thought, if they coulde not haue saide 				much wheter it were true or false. Of which some haue spoken of more then euer 				they saw or otherwise knew to bee there; othersome haue not bin ashamed to make 				absolute deniall of that which although not by thẽ, yet by others is most 				certainely ãd there plẽtifully knowne. And othersome make difficulties of those 				things they haue no skill of.<span class="numbering-line">8.</span><br />
The cause of their ignorance was, in that they were of that 				many that were neuer out of the Iland where wee were seated, or not farre, or 				at the leastwise in few places els, during the time of our aboade in the 				countrey; or of that many that after golde and siluer was not so soone found, 				as it was by them looked for, had little or no care of any other thing but to 				pamper their bellies; or of that many which had little vnderstanding, lesse 				discretion, and more tongue then was needfull or requisite.<span class="numbering-line">9.</span><br />
Some also were of a nice bringing vp, only in cities or 				townes, or such as neuer (as I may say) had seene the world before. Because 				there were not to bee found any English cities, norsuch faire houses, nor at 				their owne wish any of their olde accustomed daintie food, nor any soft beds of 				downe or fethers: the countrey was to them miserable, &amp; their reports 				thereof according.<span class="numbering-line">10.</span><br />
Because my purpose was but in briefe to open the cause of 				the varietie of such speeches; the particularities of them, and of many 				enuious, malicious, and slaũderous reports and deuises els, by our owne 				countrey men besides; as trifles that are not worthy of wise men to bee thought 				vpon, I meane not to trouble you withall: but will passe to the commodities, 				the substance of that which I haue to make relation of vnto you. <span class="numbering-line">11.</span><br />
The treatise where of for your more readie view &amp; 				easier vnderstanding I will diuide into three speciall parts. In the first I 				will make declaration of such commodities there alreadie found or to be raised, 				which will not onely serue the ordinary turnes of you which are and shall bee 				the plãters and inhabitants, but such an ouerplus sufficiently to bee yelded, 				or by men of skill to bee prouided, as by way of trafficke and exchaunge with 				our owne nation of England, will enrich your selues the prouiders; those that 				shal deal with you; the enterprisers in general; and greatly profit our owne 				countrey men, to supply them with most things which heretofore they haue bene 				faine to prouide, either of strangers or of our enemies: which commodities for 				distinction sake, I call <em>Merchantable.</em><span class="numbering-line">12.</span><br />
In the second, I will set downe all the cõmodities which 				wee know the countrey by our experience doeth yeld of its selfe for victuall, 				and sustenance of mans life; such as is vsually fed vpon by the inhabitants of 				the countrey, as also by vs during the time we were there.<span class="numbering-line">13.</span><br />
In the last part I will make mention generally of such 				other cõmodities besides, as I am able to remember, and as I shall thinke 				behoofull for those that shall inhabite, and plant there to knowe of; which 				specially concerne building, as also some other necessary vses: with a briefe 				description of the nature and maners of the people of the countrey.</p>
<p>&#8230;</p>
<p><strong><em>             Of the nature and manners of the people</em></strong>It resteth I speake a word or two of the naturall 				  inhabitants, their natures and maners, leauing large discourse thereof vntill 				  time more conuenient hereafter: nowe onely so farre foorth, as that you may 				  know, how that they in respect of troubling our inhabiting and planting, are 				  not to be feared; but that they shall haue cause both to feare and loue vs, 				  that shall inhabite with them.<span class="numbering-line">106.</span><br />
They are a people clothed with loose mantles made of 				  Deere skins, &amp; aprons of the same rounde about their middles; all els 				  naked; of such as difference of statures only as wee in England; hauing no edge 				  tooles or weapons of yron or steele to offend vs withall, neither know they how 				  to make any: those weapõs that they haue, are onlie bowes made of Witch hazle, 				  &amp; arrowes of reeds; flat edged truncheons also of wood about a yard long, 				  neither haue they any thing to defend themselues but targets made of barcks; 				  and some armours made of stickes wickered together with thread.<span class="numbering-line">107.</span><br />
Their townes are but small, &amp; neere the sea coast 				  but few, some cõtaining but 10. or 12. houses: some 20. the greatest that we 				  haue seene haue bene but of 30. houses: if they be walled it is only done with 				  barks of trees made fast to stakes, or els with poles onely fixed vpright and 				  close one by another. <span class="numbering-line">108.</span><br />
Their houses are made of small poles made fast at the 				  tops in rounde forme after the maner as is vsed in many arbories in our gardens 				  of England, in most townes couered with barkes, and in some with artificiall 				  mattes made of long rushes; from the tops of the houses downe to the ground. 				  The length of them is commonly double to the breadth, in some places they are 				  but 12. and 16. yardes long, and in other some wee haue seene of foure and 				  twentie. [In]<span class="numbering-line">109.</span><br />
In some places of the countrey one onely towne belongeth 				  to the gouernment of a <em>Wiróans</em> or chiefe 				  Lorde; in other some two or three, in some sixe, eight, &amp; more; the 				  greatest <em>Wiróans</em> that yet we had dealing with 				  had but eighteene townes in his gouernmẽt, and able to make not aboue seuen or 				  eight hundred fighting men at the most: The language of euery gouernment is 				  different from any other, and the farther they are distant the greater is the 				  difference.<span class="numbering-line">110.</span><br />
Their maner of warres amongst themselues is either by 				  sudden surprising one an other most commonly about the dawning of the day, or 				  moone light; or els by ambushes, or some suttle deuises: Set battels are very 				  rare, except if fall out where there are many trees, where eyther part may haue 				  some hope of defence, after the deliuerie of euery arrow, in leaping behind 				  some or other.<span class="numbering-line">111.</span><br />
If there fall out any warres betweẽ vs &amp; them; what 				  their fight is likely to bee, we hauing aduantages against them so many maner 				  of waies, as by our discipline, our strange weapons and deuises els; especially 				  by ordinance great and small, it may be easily imagined; by the experience we 				  haue had in some places, the turning vp of their heeles against vs in running 				  away was their best defence.<span class="numbering-line">112.</span><br />
In respect of vs they are a people poore, and for want 				  of skill and iudgement in the knowledge and vse of our things, doe esteeme our 				  trifles before thinges of greater value: Notwithstanding in their proper manner 				  considering the want of such meanes as we haue, they seeme very ingenious; For 				  although they haue no such tooles, nor any such craftes, sciences and artes as 				  wee; yet in those thinges they doe, they shewe excellencie of wit. And by howe 				  much they vpon due consideration shall finde our manner of knowledges and 				  craftes to exceede theirs in perfection, and speed for doing or execution, by 				  so much the more is it probable that they shoulde desire our friendships &amp; 				  loue, and haue the greater respect for pleasing and obeying vs. Whereby may bee 				  hoped if meanes of good gouernment bee vsed, that they may in short time be 				  brought to ciuilitie, and the imbracing of true religion.<span class="numbering-line">113.</span><br />
Some religion they haue alreadie, which although it be 				  farre from the truth, yet beyng as it is, there is hope it may bee the easier 				  and sooner reformed.<span class="numbering-line">114.</span><br />
They beleeue that there are many Gods which they call 				  <em>Mantóac</em>, but of different sortes and degrees; one onely chiefe and great God, 				  which hath bene from all eternitie. Who as they affirme when hee purposed to 				  make the worlde, made first other goddes of a principall order to bee as meanes 				  and instruments to bee vsed in the creation and gouernment to follow; and after 				  the Sunne, Moone, and Starres, as pettie goddes and the instruments of the 				  other order more principall. First they say were made waters, out of which by 				  the gods was made all diuersitie of creatures that are visible or inuisible. 				  <span class="numbering-line">115.</span><br />
For mankind they say a woman was made first, which by 				  the woorking of one of the goddes, conceiued and brought foorth children: And 				  in such sort they say they had their beginning.<span class="numbering-line">116.</span><br />
But how manie yeeres or ages haue passed since, they say 				  they can make no relation, hauing no letters nor other such meanes as we to 				  keepe recordes of the particularities of times past, but onelie tradition from 				  father to sonne. <span class="numbering-line">117.</span><br />
They thinke that all the gods are of humane shape, &amp; 				  therfore they represent them by images in the formes of men, which they call 				  <em>Kewasowok</em> one alone is called 				  <em>Kewás</em>; Them they place in houses appropriate 				  or temples which they call <em>Mathicómuck</em>; Where 				  they woorship, praie, sing, and make manie times offerings vnto them. In some 				  <em>Machicómuck</em> we haue seene but on 				  <em>Kewas</em>, in some two, and in other some three; 				  The common sort thinke them to be also gods.<span class="numbering-line">118.</span><br />
They beleeue also the immortalitie of the soule, that 				  after this life as soone as the soule is departed from the bodie according to 				  the workes it hath done, it is eyther carried to heauẽ the habitacle of gods, 				  there to enioy perpetuall blisse and happiness, or els to a great pitte or 				  hole, which they thinke to bee in the furthest partes of their part of the 				  worlde towarde the sunne set, there to burne continually: the place they call 				  <em>Popogusso</em>.<span class="numbering-line">119.</span><br />
For the confirmation of this opinion, they tolde mee two 				  stories of two men that had been lately dead and reuiued againe, the one 				  happened but few yeres before our comming in the countrey of a wicked man which 				  hauing beene dead and buried, the next day the earth of the graue beeing seene 				  to moue, was takẽ vp againe; Who made declaration where his soule had beene, 				  that is to saie very neere entring into <em>Popogusso</em>, had not one of the gods saued him &amp; gaue 				  him leaue to returne againe, and teach his friends what they should doe to 				  auiod that terrible place of tormenr. <span class="numbering-line">120.</span><br />
The other happened in the same yeere wee were there, but 				  in a towne that was threescore miles from vs, and it was tolde mee for straunge 				  newes that one beeing dead, buried and taken vp againe as the first, shewed 				  that although his bodie had lien dead in the graue, yet his soule was aliue, 				  and had trauailed farre in a long broade waie, on both sides whereof grewe most 				  delicate and pleasaũt trees, bearing more rare and excellent fruites then euer 				  hee had seene before or was able to expresse, and at length came to most braue 				  and faire houses, neere which hee met his father, that had beene dead before, 				  who gaue him great charge to goe backe againe and shew his friendes what good 				  they were to doe to enioy the pleasures of that place, which when he had done 				  he should after come againe.<span class="numbering-line">121.</span><br />
What subtilty soeuer be in the <em>Wiroances</em> and Priestes, this opinion worketh so much in 				  manie of the common and simple sort of people that it maketh them haue great 				  respect to their Gouernours, and also great care what they do, to auoid torment 				  after death, and to enjoy blisse; although nothwithstanding there is punishment 				  ordained for malefactours, as